629810

Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640 Handleiding

649
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/654
Pagina verder
User’s Manual
CNC PILOT 640
NC Software
688946-03
688947-03
English (en)
1/2015
Controls and displays of the CNC PILOT
Keys on visual display unit
Operating mode keys
smart.Turn keys
Navigation keys
Numeric keypad
Special keys
Machine operating panel
Key Function
Switches the help graphics between outside
and inside machining (only in the cycle
programming)
No function
Soft keys for selecting functions on screen
Switches to the soft-key menu at left / right
Switches to the next menu in the PLC menu
Key Function
Machine operating modes:
Manual Operation
Program Run
Programming modes
smart.Turn
DINplus
DIN/ISO
Tables for tool data and technology data
Organization:
Parameters
File organization
Transfer
Diagnosis
Key Function
Go to the next form
Next/previous group
Key Function
Up/Down arrow keys
Left/Right arrow keys
Screen page or dialog page up/down
Go to beginning of program/list or to end of
program/list
Key Function block
Number keys 0-9:
Numeric input keys
Menu operation
Decimal point
Switchover between positive and negative
values
Escape key: Cancelation of dialogs and next
higher menu level
Insert key: OK in dialogs and new NC blocks
in the editor
Delete block: Deletes the selected area
Backspace: Deletes the character to the left
of the cursor
CE key: Deletes the error messages in the
machine operating mode
Next: Enables input fields for additional
entries in dialog boxes
Enter: Confirms the input
Key Function
Error key: Opens the error window
Starts the integrated calculator
Info key: Shows additional information in the
parameter editor
Activates special functions, such as input
options or input of characters as on an
alphabetic keyboard
Key Function
Cycle start
Cycle stop
Feed rate stop
Spindle stop
Spindle on – M3/M4 direction
Spindle jog – M3/M4 direction. The spindle
rotates as long as you press the key.
Manual direction keys +X/–X
0
9
+
/
DEL
CE
ERR
CALC
Operating panel of the CNC PILOT
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 5
CNC PILOT 640, software and
features
This manual describes functions that are available in the CNC PILOT
with NC software number 688946-03 and 688947-03.
The programming of smart.Turn and DIN PLUS is not included in this
manual. These functions are described in the User's Manual for
smart.Turn and DIN PLUS Programming (ID 685556-xx). Please
contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this manual.
The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the control
to the capabilities of the specific machine tool by setting machine
parameters. Therefore, some of the functions described in this manual
may not be among the features provided by the CNC PILOT on your
machine tool.
Some of the CNC PILOT functions that are not available on every
machine are:
Positioning of spindle (M19) and driven tool
Operations with the C or Y axis
Please contact your machine manufacturer for detailed information on
the features that are supported by your machine tool.
Many machine manufacturers and HEIDENHAIN offer programming
courses. We recommend these courses as an effective way of
improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas
with other CNC PILOT users.
HEIDENHAIN also offers the DataPilot MP 620 or DataPilot CP 640
software for personal computers, which is designed to simulate the
functions of the MANUALplus 620 and CNC PILOT 640. The
DataPilot is suitable for both shop-floor programming as well as off-
location program creation and testing. It is also ideal for training
purposes. The DataPilot can be run on PCs with WINDOWS
operating systems.
Intended place of operation
The CNC PILOT complies with the limits for Class A devices in
accordance with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for
use primarily in industrially-zoned areas.
Legal information
This product uses open source software. Further information is
available on the control under
Organization mode of operation
LICENSE INFO SOFT KEY
6
New functions of software 688945-02
In the program simulation, the current contour description (of work-
piece blank and finished part) can be mirrored and saved. In
smart.Turn, these contours can be reinserted (siehe Seite 498)
On machines with opposing spindle, the workpiece spindle can now
be selected in the TSF menu (siehe Seite 98)
On machines with opposing spindle, its zero point can be shifted
(see Seite 98)
The user documentation is now also available in the context-sensi-
tive help system TURNguide (see Seite 66)
You can make your own project folder in the project management,
so that you can centrally manage associated files (see Seite 129)
With a manual tool change system it is possible to insert tools that
are not in the turret during a program run (see Seite 511)
Engraving cycles are now available in the Teach-In mode of opera-
tion (see Seite 345)
During tool data backup, you can now select in a dialog window the
data to be saved or restored (see Seite 596)
The G30 function is now available for converting G functions, M
functions or spindle numbers, as well as for mirroring traverse paths
and tool dimensions (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming
User’s Manual)
The "traverse to a fixed stop" function (G916) is now available for
transferring the workpiece to the second traversable spindle or for
pressing the tailstock against the workpiece (see the smart.Turn and
DIN Programming User’s Manual)
The G925 function makes it possible to define and monitor the max-
imum contact force for an axis. This function can be applied to use
the opposing spindle as a mechatronic tailstock, for example (see
the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s Manual)
Controlled parting using servo-lag monitoring (G917) can now be
activated to prevent collisions caused by incomplete parting pro-
cesses (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s Manual)
The spindle synchronization option G720 synchronizes the shaft
speeds of two or more spindles so that they rotate synchronously
with a gear ratio or a defined offset (see the smart.Turn and DIN Pro-
gramming User’s Manual)
In combination with the synchronization (G720) of main spindle and
tool spindle, the new "Hobbing" cycle (G808) is available for milling
external teeth and profiles (see the smart.Turn and DIN Program-
ming User’s Manual)
With G924, a "fluctuating speed" can now be programmed to pre-
vent resonance (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s
Manual)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 7
New functions of software 688945-03 and
68894x-01
In the Organization mode of operation, you can grant or restrict
access to the control by using the EXTERNAL ACCESS soft key
(siehe auch „Organization mode of operation” auf Seite 542)
The pocket calculator can now be activated in each application and
also remains active after a change in operating modes. The Get cur-
rent value and Load current value soft keys enable you to fetch
numerical values from an active input field or to transfer them to an
active input field (siehe auch „Integrated calculator” auf Seite 58)
Tool touch probes can now be calibrated in the Machine Setup
menu (siehe auch „Calibrating the tool touch probe” auf Seite 100)
The workpiece zero point can now also be set in the direction of the
Z axis using a touch probe (siehe auch „Machine setup” auf Seite
92)
In Teach-in mode, the oversizes RI and RK for the workpiece blank
were introduced for finishing in the recess-turning cycles (siehe
auch „Recess turning, radial finishing—expanded” auf Seite 250)
The oversizes RI and RK for the workpiece blank were introduced for
finishing in the recess-turning units and in Cycle G869 (see
smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual).
On machines with a B axis it is now also possible to drill, bore, and
mill in oblique planes. In addition to this, the B axis enables you to
use tools even more flexibly during turning (see smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual).
The control now provides numerous touch probe cycles for various
applications (see smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual):
Calibrating a touch trigger probe
Measuring circles, circle segments, angle and position of the C
axis
Misalignment compensation
Single-point and double-point measurement
Finding a hole or stud
Zero point setting in the Z or C axis
Automatic tool measurement
8
The new TURN PLUS function automatically generates NC pro-
grams for turning and milling operations based on a fixed machining
sequence (see smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual).
The G940 function now provides a way to calculate the tool lengths
in the basic (definition) position of the B axis (see smart.Turn and
DIN Programming User's Manual).
For machining operations that require rechucking, you can define a
separation point on the contour description with G44 (see
smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual).
The G927 function enables you to convert tool lengths to the refer-
ence position of the tool (B axis = 0) (see smart.Turn and DIN Pro-
gramming User's Manual).
Recesses that were defined with G22 can now be machined with
the new Cycle 870 ICP Recessing (see smart.Turn and DIN Pro-
gramming User's Manual).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 9
New functions of software 68894x-02
The "Zero point shift" miscellaneous function was introduced in ICP
(siehe auch „Zero point shift” auf Seite 389)
In ICP contours, fit dimensions and inside threads can now be cal-
culated using an input form (siehe auch „Fits and inside threads” auf
Seite 384)
The miscellaneous functions "Copy in linear/circular series, and by
mirroring" were introduced in ICP (siehe auch „Copying a contour
section in linear series” auf Seite 389)
The system time can now be set using an input form (siehe auch
„Displaying operating times” auf Seite 101)
The parting cycle G859 was expanded by the parameters K, SD and
U (siehe auch „Parting” auf Seite 267)
The angle of approach and departure can now be defined for ICP
recess turning (siehe auch „ICP recess turning, radial finishing” auf
Seite 258)
With TURN PLUS you can now create programs for machining with
an opposing spindle and for multipoint tools (see the smart.Turn and
DIN Programming User’s Manual)
In the G797 Area Milling function, milling contours can now be
selected (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s Manual)
The G720 function was expanded by the Y parameter (see the
smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s Manual)
The G860 function was expanded by the O and U parameters (see
the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User’s Manual)
10
New functions of software 68894x-03
In the Teach-In submode, the parameter RB was added to the cycles
"Figure, axial", "Figure, radial", "ICP contour, axial" and "ICP contour,
radial" (siehe „Milling cycles” auf Seite 317)
In the Teach-In submode, the parameters SP and SI were added to
all tapping cycles (siehe „Drilling cycles” auf Seite 299)
In the Simulation submode, the 3-D view provides additional fea-
tures (siehe „3-D view” auf Seite 491)
Tool control graphics were introduced in the Tool Editor mode of
operation (siehe „Tool control graphics” auf Seite 505)
An ID number can be entered directly in the turret list (siehe „Filling
the turret list” auf Seite 88)
The tool list provides additional filter options (siehe „Sorting and fil-
tering the tool list” auf Seite 502)
The Transfer submode provides enhanced tool backup functionality
(siehe „Transferring tool data” auf Seite 596)
The Transfer submode provides enhanced tool import functionality
(siehe „Importing tool data of the CNC PILOT 4290” auf Seite 604)
The Set Axis Values menu item now also enables you to define off-
set values for shifts using G53, G54 and G55 (siehe „Defining off-
sets” auf Seite 94)
Load monitoring was introduced in the Program Run submode
(siehe „Load monitoring (option)” auf Seite 119)
The definition of skip levels was introduced in the Program Run sub-
mode (siehe „Program execution” auf Seite 114)
A function was introduced to query information on the tool status
(siehe „Tool life monitoring”, Seite 90), (siehe „Editing tool-life
data” auf Seite 509)
A user parameter was introduced to enable you to activate and deac-
tivate the software limit switches for the Simulation submode (siehe
„List of user parameters” auf Seite 545)
A user parameter was introduced to enable you to suppress the
error message for the software limit switches (siehe „List of user
parameters” auf Seite 545)
A user parameter was introduced to enable you to use NC Start for
executing a tool change programmed in the T,S,F dialog (siehe „List
of user parameters” auf Seite 545)
A user parameter was introduced to divide the T,S,F dialog into sep-
arate dialogs (siehe „List of user parameters” auf Seite 545)
The parameter WE was added to G32 (see the smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual)
The parameters U, V and W were added to G51, G56 and G59 (see
the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
Parameters ensuring maximum compatibility with the ICP contour
description were added to G0, G1, G12/G13, G101, G102/G103,
G110, G111, G112/G113, G170, G171, G172/G173, G180, G181 and
G182/G183 (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Man-
ual)
The parameter C was added to G808 (see the smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 11
The parameter U was added to G810 and G820 (see the smart.Turn
and DIN Programming User's Manual)
The parameter D was added to G4 and G860 (see the smart.Turn
and DIN Programming User's Manual)
The parameter B was added to G890 (see the smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual)
The parameter RB was added to the units G840 "Contour milling, fig-
ures" and G84X "Pocket milling, figures" (see the smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual)
The parameters SP and SI were added to all tapping units (see the
smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
G48 was introduced to allow limiting the rapid traverse rate for
rotary and linear axes (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming
User's Manual)
G53, G54 and G55 were introduced for zero point shifts using offset
values (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
The functions for superimposing axis movements G725 "Eccentric
turning", G726 "Transition to eccentric" and G727 "Eccentric X" were
introduced (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Man-
ual)
The load monitoring functions G995 "Monitoring zone definition" and
G996 "Type of load monitoring" were introduced (see the smart.Turn
and DIN Programming User's Manual)
The AWG submode now also supports tools with quick-change
holders (see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
A tree view is available in the smart.Turn operating mode (see the
smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
Skip levels can be defined in the smart.Turn operating mode (see
the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
A function was introduced to query information on the tool status
(see the smart.Turn and DIN Programming User's Manual)
12
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 13
About this manual
About this manual
The symbols used in this manual are described below.
Would you like any changes, or have you found
any errors?
We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you.
Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail
address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de.
This symbol indicates that important information about the
function described must be considered.
This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the
following risks when using the described function:
Danger to workpiece
Danger to fixtures
Danger to tool
Danger to machine
Danger to operator
This symbol indicates that the described function must be
adapted by the machine tool builder. The function
described may therefore vary depending on the machine.
This symbol indicates that you can find detailed
information about a function in another manual.
14
About this manual
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 15
Contents
Introduction and fundamentals
1
Basics of operation
2
Machine mode of operation
3
Teach-in mode
4
ICP programming
5
Graphic simulation
6
Tool and technology database
7
Organization mode of operation
8
Tables and overviews
9
Overview of cycles
10
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 17
1.1 The CNC PILOT ..... 36
1.2 Configuration ..... 37
Slide position ..... 37
Tool carrier systems ..... 37
The C axis ..... 37
The Y axis ..... 38
Full-surface machining ..... 39
1.3 Features ..... 40
Configuration ..... 40
Modes of operation ..... 40
1.4 Data backup ..... 42
1.5 Explanation of terms ..... 43
1.6 CNC PILOT design ..... 44
1.7 Fundamentals ..... 45
Position encoders and reference marks ..... 45
Axis designations ..... 45
Coordinate system ..... 46
Absolute coordinates ..... 46
Incremental coordinates ..... 47
Polar coordinates ..... 47
Machine zero point ..... 47
Workpiece zero point ..... 48
Units of measure ..... 48
1.8 Tool dimensions ..... 49
Tool length ..... 49
Tool compensation ..... 49
Tool-tip radius compensation (TRC) ..... 50
Milling cutter radius compensation (MCRC) ..... 50
1 Introduction and fundamentals ..... 35
18
2.1 General information on operation ..... 52
Operation ..... 52
Setup ..... 52
Programming – Teach-in mode ..... 52
Programming – smart.Turn ..... 52
2.2 The CNC PILOT screen ..... 53
2.3 Operation and data input ..... 54
Operating modes ..... 54
Menu selection ..... 55
Soft keys ..... 55
Data input ..... 56
smart.Turn dialogs ..... 56
List operations ..... 57
Alphanumeric keyboard ..... 57
2.4 Integrated calculator ..... 58
Calculator functions ..... 58
Adjusting the position of the calculator ..... 60
2.5 Types of programs ..... 61
2.6 The error messages ..... 62
Display of errors ..... 62
Opening the error window ..... 62
Closing the error window ..... 62
Detailed error messages ..... 63
"Details" soft key ..... 63
Clearing errors ..... 64
Error log file ..... 64
Keystroke log file ..... 65
Saving service files ..... 65
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system ..... 66
Application ..... 66
Working with the TURNguide ..... 67
Downloading current help files ..... 71
2 Basics of operation ..... 51
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 19
3.1 Machine mode of operation ..... 74
3.2 Switch-on / Switch-off ..... 75
Switch-on ..... 75
Monitoring EnDat encoders ..... 75
Traversing the reference marks ..... 76
Switch-off ..... 77
3.3 Machine data ..... 78
Input of machine data ..... 78
Machine data display ..... 80
Cycle statuses ..... 84
Axis feed rate ..... 84
Spindle ..... 84
3.4 Setting up a tool list ..... 85
Machine with turret ..... 85
Machine with multifix ..... 85
Tools in different quadrants ..... 86
Filling the turret list from the database ..... 87
Filling the turret list ..... 88
Tool call ..... 89
Driven tools ..... 89
Tool life monitoring ..... 90
3.5 Machine setup ..... 92
Defining the workpiece zero point ..... 93
Defining offsets ..... 94
Homing the axes ..... 95
Setting the protection zone ..... 96
Defining the tool change position ..... 97
Setting C-axis values ..... 98
Setting up machine dimensions ..... 99
Calibrating the tool touch probe ..... 100
Displaying operating times ..... 101
Setting the system time ..... 102
3.6 Tool measurement ..... 103
Touch off ..... 104
Touch probe (tool touch probe) ..... 105
Optical gauge ..... 106
Tool compensation ..... 107
3.7 Manual mode ..... 108
Tool change ..... 108
Spindle ..... 108
Handwheel operation ..... 108
Manual direction keys ..... 109
Teach-in cycles in Manual mode ..... 109
3 Machine mode of operation ..... 73
20
3.8 Teach-in mode ..... 110
Teach-in mode ..... 110
Programming Teach-in cycles ..... 110
3.9 Program Run mode ..... 111
Loading a program ..... 111
Comparing a tool list ..... 112
Before executing a program ..... 112
Finding a start block ..... 113
Program execution ..... 114
Entering compensation values during program run ..... 115
Program execution in "dry run" mode ..... 118
3.10 Load monitoring (option) ..... 119
Reference machining ..... 121
Checking the reference values ..... 122
Adapting the limit values ..... 124
Using load monitoring during production ..... 125
3.11 Graphic simulation ..... 126
3.12 Program management ..... 127
Program selection ..... 127
File manager ..... 128
Project management ..... 129
3.13 Conversion into DIN format ..... 130
Making a conversion ..... 130
3.14 Units of measure ..... 131
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 21
4.1 Working with cycles ..... 134
Cycle starting point ..... 134
Help graphics ..... 135
DIN macros ..... 135
Graphical test run (simulation) ..... 135
Contour follow-up in Teach-in mode ..... 136
Cycle keys ..... 136
Switching functions (M functions) ..... 137
Comments ..... 137
Cycle menu ..... 138
Addresses used in many cycles ..... 140
4.2 Workpiece blank cycles ..... 141
Bar/tube blank ..... 142
ICP workpiece blank contour ..... 143
4.3 Single cut cycles ..... 144
Rapid traverse positioning ..... 145
Move to the tool change position ..... 146
Linear machining, longitudinal ..... 147
Linear machining, transverse ..... 148
Linear machining at angle ..... 149
Circular machining ..... 151
Chamfer ..... 153
Rounding arc ..... 155
M functions ..... 157
4 Teach-in mode ..... 133
22
4.4 Turning cycles ..... 158
Tool position ..... 159
Cut longitudinal ..... 161
Cut transverse ..... 163
Roughing, longitudinal—expanded ..... 165
Roughing, transverse—expanded ..... 167
Finishing cut, longitudinal ..... 169
Finishing cut, transverse ..... 170
Finishing cut, longitudinal—expanded ..... 171
Finishing cut, transverse—expanded ..... 173
Cut, longitudinal plunge ..... 175
Cut, transverse plunge ..... 177
Cut, longitudinal plunging—expanded ..... 179
Cut, transverse plunging—expanded ..... 181
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge ..... 183
Cut, transverse finishing plunge ..... 185
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge—expanded ..... 187
Cut, transverse finishing plunge—expanded ..... 189
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal ..... 191
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse ..... 194
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal finishing ..... 196
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse finishing ..... 198
ICP cutting, longitudinal ..... 200
ICP cut transverse ..... 202
ICP longitudinal finishing cut ..... 204
ICP transverse finishing cut ..... 206
Examples of turning cycles ..... 208
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 23
4.5 Recessing cycles ..... 212
Cutting and infeed directions for recessing cycles ..... 212
Undercut position ..... 213
Contour forms ..... 213
Recessing, radial ..... 214
Recessing, axial ..... 216
Recessing, radial—expanded ..... 218
Recessing, axial—expanded ..... 220
Recessing radial, finishing ..... 222
Recessing axial, finishing ..... 224
Recessing radial, finishing—expanded ..... 226
Recessing axial, finishing—expanded ..... 228
ICP recessing radial ..... 230
ICP recessing cycles, axial ..... 232
ICP recessing, radial finishing ..... 234
ICP recessing, axial finishing ..... 236
Recess turning ..... 238
Recess turning, radial ..... 239
Recess turning, axial ..... 240
Recess turning, radial—expanded ..... 242
Recess turning, axial—expanded ..... 244
Recess turning, radial finishing ..... 246
Recess turning, axial finishing ..... 248
Recess turning, radial finishing—expanded ..... 250
Recess turning, axial finishing—expanded ..... 252
ICP recess turning, radial ..... 254
ICP recess turning, axial ..... 256
ICP recess turning, radial finishing ..... 258
ICP recess turning, axial finishing ..... 260
Undercutting type H ..... 262
Undercutting type K ..... 264
Undercutting type U ..... 265
Parting ..... 267
Examples of recessing cycles ..... 269
24
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles ..... 271
Thread position, undercut position ..... 271
Handwheel superimposition ..... 272
Feed angle, thread depth, proportioning of cuts ..... 273
Thread run-in / thread run-out ..... 273
Last cut ..... 274
Thread cycle (longitudinal) ..... 275
Thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded ..... 277
Tapered thread ..... 279
API thread ..... 281
Recut (longitudinal) thread ..... 283
Recut (longitudinal) thread—expanded ..... 285
Recut tapered thread ..... 287
Recut API thread ..... 289
Undercut DIN 76 ..... 291
Undercut DIN 509 E ..... 293
Undercut DIN 509 F ..... 295
Examples of thread and undercut cycles ..... 297
4.7 Drilling cycles ..... 299
Drilling, axial ..... 300
Drilling, radial ..... 302
Deep-hole drilling, axial ..... 304
Deep-hole drilling, radial ..... 307
Tapping, axial ..... 309
Tapping, radial ..... 311
Thread milling, axial ..... 313
Examples of drilling cycles ..... 315
4.8 Milling cycles ..... 317
Rapid positioning milling ..... 318
Slot, axial ..... 319
Figure, axial ..... 321
ICP contour, axial ..... 325
Face milling ..... 328
Slot, radial ..... 331
Figure, radial ..... 333
ICP contour, radial ..... 337
Helical-slot milling, radial ..... 340
Milling direction for contour milling ..... 342
Milling direction for pocket milling ..... 343
Example of milling cycle ..... 344
Engraving, axial ..... 345
Engraving, radial ..... 347
Engraving, axial/radial ..... 349
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 25
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns ..... 350
Drilling pattern linear, axial ..... 351
Milling pattern linear, axial ..... 353
Drilling pattern circular, axial ..... 355
Milling pattern circular, axial ..... 357
Drilling pattern linear, radial ..... 359
Milling pattern linear, radial ..... 361
Drilling pattern circular, radial ..... 363
Milling pattern circular, radial ..... 365
Examples of pattern machining ..... 367
4.10 DIN cycles ..... 370
DIN cycle ..... 370
26
5.1 ICP contours ..... 374
Loading contours ..... 374
Form elements ..... 375
Machining attributes ..... 375
Calculation of contour geometry ..... 376
5.2 ICP editor in cycle mode ..... 377
Editing contours for cycles ..... 377
File organization with the ICP editor ..... 378
5.3 ICP editor in smart.Turn ..... 379
Editing a contour in smart.Turn ..... 380
5.4 Creating an ICP contour ..... 382
Entering an ICP contour ..... 382
Absolute or incremental dimensioning ..... 383
Transitions between contour elements ..... 383
Fits and inside threads ..... 384
Polar coordinates ..... 385
Angular input ..... 385
Contour graphics ..... 386
Selection of solutions ..... 387
Colors in contour graphics ..... 387
Selection functions ..... 388
Zero point shift ..... 389
Copying a contour section in linear series ..... 389
Copying a contour section in circular series ..... 390
Copying a contour section by mirroring ..... 390
Inverting ..... 390
Contour direction (cycle programming) ..... 391
5.5 Editing ICP contours ..... 392
Superimposing form elements ..... 392
Adding contour elements ..... 392
Editing or deleting the last contour element ..... 393
Deleting a contour element ..... 393
Editing contour elements ..... 394
5.6 The zoom function in the ICP editor ..... 399
Changing the view ..... 399
5.7 Defining the workpiece blank ..... 400
"Bar" blank ..... 400
"Tube" blank ..... 400
"Cast part" blank ..... 400
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour ..... 401
Basic elements of a turning contour ..... 401
Contour form elements ..... 405
5 ICP programming ..... 373
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 27
5.9 Contour elements on face ..... 412
Starting point of face contour ..... 412
Vertical lines on face ..... 413
Horizontal lines on face ..... 414
Line at angle on face ..... 415
Circular arc on face ..... 416
Chamfer/rounding arc on face ..... 417
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface ..... 418
Starting point of lateral surface contour ..... 418
Vertical lines on lateral surface ..... 420
Horizontal lines on lateral surface ..... 420
Line at angle on lateral surface ..... 421
Circular arc on lateral surface ..... 422
Chamfer/rounding arc on lateral surface ..... 423
5.11 C and Y axis machining in smart.Turn ..... 424
Reference data, nested contours ..... 425
Representation of the ICP elements in the smart.Turn program ..... 426
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn ..... 427
Reference data for complex face contours ..... 427
TURN PLUS attributes ..... 428
Circle on face ..... 428
Rectangle on face ..... 429
Polygon on face ..... 430
Linear slot on face ..... 431
Circular slot on face ..... 431
Hole on face ..... 432
Linear pattern on face ..... 433
Circular pattern on face ..... 434
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn ..... 435
Reference data of lateral surface ..... 435
TURN PLUS attributes ..... 436
Circle on lateral surface ..... 437
Rectangle on lateral surface ..... 438
Polygon on lateral surface ..... 439
Linear slot on lateral surface ..... 440
Circular slot on lateral surface ..... 441
Hole on lateral surface ..... 442
Linear pattern on lateral surface ..... 443
Circular pattern on lateral surface ..... 444
28
5.14 Contours in the XY plane ..... 446
Reference data in XY plane ..... 446
Starting point of contour in XY plane ..... 447
Vertical lines in XY plane ..... 447
Horizontal lines in XY plane ..... 448
Line at angle in XY plane ..... 449
Circular arc in XY plane ..... 450
Chamfer/rounding arc in XY plane ..... 451
Circle in XY plane ..... 452
Rectangle in XY plane ..... 453
Polygon in XY plane ..... 454
Linear slot in XY plane ..... 455
Circular slot in XY plane ..... 456
Hole in XY plane ..... 457
Linear pattern in XY plane ..... 458
Circular pattern in XY plane ..... 459
Single surface in XY plane ..... 460
Centric polygon in XY plane ..... 461
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane ..... 462
Reference data in YZ plane ..... 462
TURN PLUS attributes ..... 463
Starting point of contour in YZ plane ..... 464
Vertical lines in YZ plane ..... 464
Horizontal lines in YZ plane ..... 465
Line at angle in YZ plane ..... 466
Circular arc in YZ plane ..... 467
Chamfer/rounding arc in YZ plane ..... 468
Circle in YZ plane ..... 469
Rectangle in YZ plane ..... 470
Polygon in YZ plane ..... 471
Linear slot in YZ plane ..... 472
Circular slot in YZ plane ..... 473
Hole in YZ plane ..... 474
Linear pattern in YZ plane ..... 475
Circular pattern in YZ plane ..... 476
Single surface in YZ plane ..... 477
Centric polygons in YZ plane ..... 478
5.16 Loading existing contours ..... 479
Integrating cycle contours in smart.Turn ..... 479
DXF contours (option) ..... 480
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 29
6.1 Simulation mode of operation ..... 484
Using the graphic simulation ..... 485
The miscellaneous functions ..... 486
6.2 Simulation window ..... 487
Setting up the views ..... 487
Single-window view ..... 488
Multiple window view ..... 488
6.3 Views ..... 489
Traverse path display ..... 489
Tool depiction ..... 490
Material-removal graphic ..... 490
3-D view ..... 491
6.4 The zoom function ..... 493
Adjusting the visible section ..... 493
6.5 Simulation with mid-program startup ..... 495
Startup block with smart.Turn programs ..... 495
Mid-program startup in cycle programs ..... 496
6.6 Time calculation ..... 497
Showing the machining times ..... 497
6.7 Saving the contour ..... 498
Saving the generated contour in the simulation ..... 498
6 Graphic simulation ..... 483
30
7.1 Tool database ..... 500
Tool types ..... 500
Multipoint tools ..... 501
Tool life management ..... 501
7.2 Tool editor ..... 502
Sorting and filtering the tool list ..... 502
Editing the tool data ..... 504
Tool control graphics ..... 505
Tool texts ..... 506
Editing multipoint tools ..... 507
Editing tool-life data ..... 509
Manual change systems ..... 511
7.3 Tool data ..... 516
General tool parameters ..... 516
Standard turning tools ..... 519
Recessing tools ..... 520
Thread-cutting tools ..... 521
Twist drills and indexable-insert drills ..... 522
NC center drill ..... 523
Centering tool ..... 524
Counterbore ..... 525
Countersink ..... 526
Tap ..... 527
Standard milling tools ..... 528
Thread milling tools ..... 529
Angle cutters ..... 530
Milling pins ..... 531
Knurling tool ..... 532
Touch probes ..... 533
Stopper tool ..... 534
Gripper ..... 535
7.4 Technology database ..... 536
Technology editor ..... 537
Editing a workpiece material or cutting material list ..... 538
Displaying/editing cutting data ..... 539
7 Tool and technology database ..... 499
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 31
8.1 Organization mode of operation ..... 542
8.2 Parameters ..... 543
Parameter editor ..... 543
List of user parameters ..... 545
Descriptions of the most important machining parameters (processing) ..... 561
General settings ..... 561
Thread cutting ..... 576
8.3 Transfer ..... 581
Data backup ..... 581
Data exchange with TNCremo ..... 581
External access ..... 581
Connections ..... 582
Ethernet interface CNC PILOT 620 ..... 583
Ethernet interface CNC PILOT 640 ..... 584
USB connection ..... 591
Data transfer options ..... 592
Transferring programs (files) ..... 593
Transferring parameters ..... 595
Transferring tool data ..... 596
Service files ..... 598
Creating a data backup file ..... 599
Importing NC programs from predecessor controls ..... 600
Importing tool data of the CNC PILOT 4290 ..... 604
8.4 Service pack ..... 605
Installing a service pack ..... 605
8 Organization mode of operation ..... 541
32
9.1 Thread pitch ..... 608
Thread parameters ..... 608
Thread pitch ..... 609
9.2 Undercut parameters ..... 615
DIN 76—undercut parameters ..... 615
DIN 509 E – undercut parameters ..... 617
DIN 509 F – undercut parameters ..... 617
9.3 Technical information ..... 618
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs ..... 627
Syntax elements of the CNC PILOT 640 ..... 629
9 Tables and overviews ..... 607
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 33
10.1 Workpiece blank cycles, single cut cycles ..... 642
10.2 Turning cycles ..... 643
10.3 Recessing and recess-turning cycles ..... 644
10.4 Thread cycles ..... 645
10.5 Drilling cycles ..... 646
10.6 Milling cycles ..... 647
10 Overview of cycles ..... 641
34
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 35
Introduction and
fundamentals
36 Introduction and fundamentals
1.1 The CNC PILOT
1.1 The CNC PILOT
The CNC PILOT was conceived for CNC lathes. It is suitable for
horizontal and vertical lathes. The CNC PILOT supports lathes with
tool turrets. The tool carrier of horizontal lathes can be located in front
of or behind the workpiece.
The CNC PILOT supports lathes with spindle, one slide (X and Z axis),
C axis or positionable spindle, driven tool and machines with a Y axis.
Regardless of whether you are turning simple parts or complex
workpieces, the CNC PILOT provides you with the benefits of
graphical contour input and convenient programming with smart.Turn.
Programming with variables, controlling special machine components,
or using externally created programs, etc. is no problem: Simply
switch to DINplus. This programming mode helps you solve all your
special tasks.
The CNC PILOT also offers the powerful Teach-in mode. It enables
you to perform simple machining, rework or repair operations without
writing NC programs.
The CNC PILOT supports operations with the C axis in cycle,
smart.Turn and DIN programming. In the Y axis, the CNC PILOT
supports operations with smart.Turn and DIN programming.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 37
1.2 Configuration
1.2 Configuration
In the standard version, the control is equipped with the axes X and Z
and a main spindle. Optionally, a C axis, a Y axis, and a driven tool can
be configured.
Slide position
The machine tool builder configures the CNC PILOT. These are the
available possibilities:
Z axis horizontal with tool slide behind the workpiece
Z axis horizontal with tool slide in front of the workpiece
Z axis vertical with tool slide to the right of the workpiece
The menu symbols, help graphics and graphic representations during
ICP and simulation consider the slide position.
The representations in this User’s Manual assume a lathe with tool
carrier behind the workpiece.
Tool carrier systems
The CNC PILOT supports turrets with a number n of tool mounts as
tool carriers.
The C axis
With a C axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its face and lateral
surfaces.
When the C axis is used, one axis interpolates linearly or circularly with
the spindle in the given working plane, while the third axis interpolates
linearly.
The CNC PILOT supports part program creation with the C axis in:
Teach-in mode
smart.Turn programming
DINplus programming
38 Introduction and fundamentals
1.2 Configuration
The Y axis
With a Y axis you can drill and mill a workpiece on its face and lateral
surfaces.
During use of the Y axis, two axes interpolate linearly or circularly in
the given working plane, while the third axis interpolates linearly. This
enables you to machine slots or pockets, for example, with plane
floors and perpendicular edges. By defining the spindle angle, you can
determine the position of the milling contour on the workpiece.
The CNC PILOT supports program creation with the Y axis in:
Teach-in mode
smart.Turn programs
DINplus programs
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 39
1.2 Configuration
Full-surface machining
Functions like angle-synchronous part transfer with rotating spindle,
traversing to a stop, controlled parting, and coordinate transformation
ensure efficient machining as well as simple programming of full-
surface machining.
The CNC PILOT supports full-surface machining for all common
machine designs.
Examples: Lathes with
Rotating gripper
Movable opposing spindle
Several spindles and tool carriers
40 Introduction and fundamentals
1.3 Features
1.3 Features
Configuration
Basic version: X and Z axis, spindle
Positionable spindle and driven tool
C axis and driven tool
Y axis and driven tool
B axis for machining a tilted plane
Digital current and speed control
Modes of operation
Manual operation
Manual slide movement through axis-direction keys or electronic
handwheels.
Graphic support for entering and running Teach-in cycles without
saving the machining steps in alternation with manual machine
operation.
Thread reworking (thread repair in a second workpiece setup).
Teach-in mode
Sequential linking of Teach-in cycles, where each cycle is run
immediately after input, or is graphically simulated and subsequently
saved.
Program run
All are possible in single-block and full-sequence modes
DINplus programs
smart.Turn programs
Teach-in programs
Setup functions
Setting the workpiece zero point
Defining the tool-change point
Defining the protection zone
Tool measurement through touch-off, touch probe or optical gauge
Programming
Teach-in programming
Interactive Contour Programming (ICP)
smart.Turn programming
Automatic program creation with TURN PLUS
DINplus programming
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 41
1.3 Features
Graphic simulation
Graphic depiction of the sequence of smart.Turn or DINplus
programs and graphic depiction of a Teach-in cycle or Teach-in
program
Simulation of the tool paths as wire-frame or cutting-path graphics,
special identification of the rapid-traverse paths
Machining simulation (2-D material-removal graphic)
Side or face view, or 2-D view of cylindrical surface
Display of programmed contours
Shifting and magnifying functions
Tool system
Database for 250 tools, optionally 999 tools
Description can be entered for every tool
Optional support of multipoint tools (tools with multiple reference
points or multiple cutting edges)
Turret or multifix system
Technology database
Cutting data is entered in the cycle or in the UNIT as default values
9 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (144 entries)
Optionally 62 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (992
entries)
Interpolation
Linear: In 2 principal axes (max. ± 100 m)
Circular: in 2 axes (radius max. 999 m)
C axis: Interpolation in the linear axes X and Z with the C axis
Y axis: Linear or circular interpolation of two axes in the given plane.
The respective third axis can simultaneously perform linear
interpolation.
G17: XY plane
G18: XZ plane
G19: YZ plane
B axis: Drilling, boring and milling operations in oblique planes
42 Introduction and fundamentals
1.4 Data backup
1.4 Data backup
HEIDENHAIN recommends saving new programs and files created on
a PC at regular intervals.
HEIDENHAIN provides a backup function for this purpose in the data
transfer software TNCremoNT. Your machine tool builder can provide
you with a copy.
You additionally need a data medium on which all machine-specific
data, such as the PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored.
Please contact your machine tool builder.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 43
1.5 Explanation of terms
1.5 Explanation of terms
Cursor: In lists, or during data input, a list item, an input field or a
character is highlighted. This "highlight" is called a cursor. Entries
and operations, like copying, deleting, inserting a new item, etc.,
refer to the current cursor position.
Arrow keys: The cursor is moved with the horizontal and vertical
arrow keys and with the PG UP / PG DN keys.
Page keys: The PG UP / PG DN keys are also called "Page keys."
Navigation: Within a list or an input box, you can move the cursor
to any position you would like to check, change, delete or add to. In
other words, you "navigate" through the list.
Active/ inactive windows, functions, menu items: Of all
windows that are displayed on the screen, only one is active. That
means, any data you type on the keyboard or keypad are entered in
the active window only. In the active window the title bar is shown
in color. In the inactive windows, the title bar appears dimmed.
Inactive function keys or menu keys also appear dimmed.
Menu, menu key: The CNC PILOT arranges the available functions
and function groups in a 9-field box. This box is called a menu. Each
symbol in the menu is a menu key.
Editing: Editing is changing, deleting and adding to parameters,
commands, etc. within programs, tool data or parameters.
Default value: If the parameters of cycles or DIN commands are
preassigned values, these values are referred to as default values.
These values are used if you do not enter the parameters.
Byte: The capacity of storage media is measured in bytes. Since the
CNC PILOT features an internal memory, the individual program
lengths are expressed in bytes.
Extension: File names consist of the actual name and the
extension. The name part and the extension part are separated by a
dot ("."). The extension indicates the type of file. Examples:
*.NC "DIN programs"
*.NCS "DIN subprograms (DIN macros)"
Soft key: Soft keys are the unmarked keys along the side of the
screen. The meaning of each key is shown on the screen.
Form: The individual pages of a dialog are shown as easy-to-fill
forms.
UNITS: A UNIT is a group of functions united into a dialog in
smart.Turn.
44 Introduction and fundamentals
1.6 CNC PILOT design
1.6 CNC PILOT design
The dialog between machinist and control takes place via:
Screen
Soft keys
Data input keypad
Machine operating panel
The entered data can be displayed and checked on the screen. With
the soft keys directly below the screen, you can select functions,
capture position values, confirm entries, and a lot more.
With the ERR key you can call error and PLC information.
The data input keyboard (operating panel) serves for the input of
machine data, positioning data, etc. The CNC Pilot has an
alphanumeric keyboard for easy input of tool descriptions, program
descriptions or comments in an NC program. The machine operating
panel contains all necessary controls for manual operation of the lathe.
Cycle programs, ICP contours and NC programs are stored in memory
in the CNC PILOT.
For data exchange and data backup, you can use the Ethernet
interface and the USB interface.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 45
1.7 Fundamentals
1.7 Fundamentals
Position encoders and reference marks
The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register
the positions of the slide or tool. When a machine axis moves, the
corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal. The
control evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position
of the machine axis.
If there is a power interruption, the calculated position will no longer
correspond to the actual position of the machine slide. To recover this
association, incremental position encoders are provided with
reference marks. The scales of the position encoders contain one or
more reference marks that transmit a signal to the control when they
are crossed over. This enables the CNC PILOT to re-establish the
assignment of the displayed position to the current machine position.
For linear encoders with distance-coded reference marks, you only
need to move each axis a maximum of 20 mm (0.8 in.) for these, and
a maximum of 20° for angle encoders.
If incremental encoders are without reference marks, fixed reference
positions have to be traversed after switch-on. The control knows the
exact distance between these reference points and the machine
datum (see figure).
With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to
the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment
of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established
directly after switch-on.
Axis designations
The cross slide is referred to as the X axis and the saddle as the Z
axis.
All X-axis values that are displayed or entered are regarded as
diameters.
Lathes with Y axis: The Y axis is perpendicular to the X axis and Z axis
(Cartesian system).
When programming paths of traverse, remember to:
Program a positive value to depart the workpiece.
Program a negative value to approach the workpiece.
X (Z,Y)
X
MP
Zref
Xref
M
M
Z
Z+
Y+
X
X+
46 Introduction and fundamentals
1.7 Fundamentals
Coordinate system
The meanings of the coordinates X, Y, Z, and C are specified in DIN
66 217.
The coordinates entered for the principal axes X, Y and Z are
referenced to the workpiece zero point. The angles entered for the
rotary axis (C axis) are referenced to the datum of the C axis.
The axis designations X and Z describe positions in a two-dimensional
coordinate system. As you can see from the figure to the center right,
the position of the tool tip is clearly defined by its X and Z coordinates.
The CNC PILOT can connect points by linear and circular paths of
traverse (interpolations). Workpiece machining is programmed by
entering the coordinates for a succession of points and connecting the
points by linear or circular paths of traverse.
Like the paths of traverse, you can also describe the complete contour
of a workpiece by defining single points through their coordinates and
connecting them by linear or circular paths of traverse.
Positions can be programmed to an accuracy of 1 µm (0.001 mm). This
is also the accuracy with which they are displayed.
Absolute coordinates
If the coordinates of a position are referenced to the workpiece datum,
they are referred to as absolute coordinates. Each position on a
workpiece is clearly defined by its absolute coordinates (see figure).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 47
1.7 Fundamentals
Incremental coordinates
Incremental coordinates are always given with respect to the last
programmed position. They specify the distance from the last active
position to the subsequent position. Each position on a workpiece is
clearly defined by its incremental coordinates (see figure).
Polar coordinates
Positions located on the face or lateral surface can either be entered
in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates.
When programming with polar coordinates, a position on the
workpiece is clearly defined by the entries for diameter and angle (see
figure).
Machine zero point
The point of intersection of the X and Z axes is called the machine
zero point. On a lathe, the machine zero point is usually the point of
intersection of the spindle axis and the spindle surface. It is designated
with the letter "M" (see figure).
48 Introduction and fundamentals
1.7 Fundamentals
Workpiece zero point
To machine a workpiece, it is easier to enter all input data with respect
to a zero point located on the workpiece. By programming the zero
point used in the workpiece drawing, you can take the dimensions
directly from the drawing, without further calculation. This point is the
workpiece zero point. It is designated with the letter "W" (see figure).
Units of measure
You can program the CNC PILOT either in the metric or inch system.
The units of measurement listed in the table below apply to all inputs
and displays.
Dimensions Metric Inches
Coordinates mm inch
Lengths mm inch
Angle Degrees Degrees
Spindle speed rpm rpm
Cutting speed m/min ft/min
Feed per revolution mm/rev inch/rev
Feed per minute mm/min inch/min
Acceleration m/s
2
ft/s
2
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 49
1.8 Tool dimensions
1.8 Tool dimensions
The CNC PILOT requires information on the specific tools for a variety
of tasks, such as calculating the cutting radius compensation or the
proportioning of cuts.
Tool length
All programmed and displayed position values are given with respect
to the distance between the tool tip and workpiece zero point. Since
the control only knows the absolute position of the tool carrier (slide),
the CNC PILOT needs the dimensions XL and ZL (see figure) to
calculate and display the position of the tool tip.
Tool compensation
The tool tip is subjected to wear during machining processes. To
compensate for this wear, the CNC PILOT uses compensation values.
The compensation values are managed independent of the values for
length. The system automatically adds the compensation values to the
values for length.
50 Introduction and fundamentals
1.8 Tool dimensions
Tool-tip radius compensation (TRC)
The tip of a lathe tool has a certain radius. When machining tapers,
chamfers and radii, this results in inaccuracies which the CNC PILOT
compensates with its cutting radius compensation function.
Programmed paths of traverse are referenced to the theoretical tool
tip S. With non-paraxial contours, this will lead to inaccuracies during
machining.
The TRC function compensates for this error by calculating a new path
of traverse, the equidistant line (see figure).
The CNC PILOT calculates the TRC for cycle programming. The
smart.Turn and DIN programming feature also takes the TRC for
clearance cycles into account. During DIN programming with single
paths, you can also enable/disable TRC.
Milling cutter radius compensation (MCRC)
In milling operations, the outside diameter of the milling cutter
determines the contour. When the MCRC function is not active, the
system defines the center of the cutter as reference point. The MCRC
function compensates for this error by calculating a new path of
traverse equidistant line.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 51
Basics of operation
52 Basics of operation
2.1 General information on operation
2.1 General information on
operation
Operation
Select the desired operating mode with the corresponding operating
mode key.
Within the operating mode, you can change the mode through the
soft keys.
With the numeric keypad you can select the function within the
menus.
Dialogs can consist of multiple pages.
Besides with the soft keys, dialogs can be concluded positively with
"INS" or negatively with "ESC."
Changes made in lists are effective immediately. They are also
saved if the list is closed with "ESC" or "Cancel."
Setup
You will find all setup functions in the machine mode in "Manual
mode."
All preparatory work can be performed through the "setup" menu
item and "Set S,F,T."
Programming – Teach-in mode
Select Teach-in in the "machine" mode and use the Program list
soft key to open a new cycle program.
Activate the cycle menu through the Add cycle soft key. Here you
select the operation and enter the details.
Then press the Input finished soft key. Now you can start the
simulation and check the machining process.
Start the operation in the machine with "Cycle on."
Save that cycle after the operation is completed.
Repeat the last steps for each new operation.
Programming – smart.Turn
Convenient programming with UNITS in a structured NC program.
Combinable with DIN functions.
Contour definition is graphically possible.
Contour follow-up when used with a workpiece blank.
Conversion of cycle programs to smart.Turn programs with the
same functions.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 53
2.2 The CNC PILOT screen
2.2 The CNC PILOT screen
The CNC PILOT shows the data to be displayed in windows. Some
windows only appear when they are needed, for example, for typing
in entries.
In addition, the control shows the type of operation, the soft-key
display and the PLC soft-key display on the screen. Each function
that appears in a field of the soft-key row is activated by pressing the
soft key directly below it.
Operating mode line
The operating mode tabs (at the top of the screen) show the four
operating modes as well as the submodes.
Machine display
The machine display field (beneath the operating mode tabs) is
configurable. It shows all important information on axis positions, feed
rates, rotational speeds, and tool.
Other windows used:
List and program window
Display of program lists, tool lists, parameter lists, etc. To select
specific elements from the list, simply move the highlight to the
desired element with the arrow keys.
Menu window
Display of menu symbols. This window only appears on the screen
in the Teach-in and Manual modes.
Input window/Dialog window
For entering the parameters of a cycle, ICP element, DIN command,
etc. Look over the existing data, then delete or edit them in the
dialog window.
Graphic support window
Input data (such as cycle parameters, tool data, etc.) are explained
with graphics. The switchover key (the key with three rotating
arrows at the left edge of the screen) allows you to switch between
the help graphics for internal and external machining (only for cycle
programming).
Simulation window
The simulation window shows a graphic representation of the
contour elements and a simulation of the tool movements. This
enables you to check cycles, entire cycle programs, and DIN
programs.
ICP contour graphics
Display of the contour during ICP programming.
DIN editing window
Display of the DIN program during DIN programming.
Error window
Display of occurred errors and warnings.
54 Basics of operation
2.3 Operation and data input
2.3 Operation and data input
Operating modes
The active mode of operation is highlighted in the operating-mode tab.
The CNC PILOT differentiates between the following operating
modes:
Machine—with the submodes:
Manual (display: "Machine")
Teach-in (Teach-in mode)
Program Run
Programming—with the submodes:
smart.Turn
Simulation
ICP
TURN PLUS: Automatic working plan generation (AWG)
Tool management—with the submodes:
Tool editor
Technology editor
Organization—with the submodes:
User parameters
Transfer
User login
You can use the operating mode keys to switch between the modes.
The selected submode and the current menu position remain during
the mode change.
If you press the operating mode key in a submode, the CNC PILOT
switches back to the main level of the mode.
At some places, a dialog has to be ended in order to switch
modes (e.g. in the tool editor).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 55
2.3 Operation and data input
Menu selection
The numerical keypad is used for activating a menu and for entering
data. They are displayed differently depending on the operating mode.
During setup, Teach-in mode etc., the functions are shown in a 9-
field box, the menu window. The meaning of the selected symbol
/ menu item is described in the footer.
In other operating modes, the keypad symbol is shown with the
position of the function marked (see figure).
Press the corresponding numerical key, or move the highlight with the
arrow keys to the symbol on the screen and press the ENT key.
Soft keys
With some system functions, the available functions are arranged
on several soft-key levels.
Some soft keys work like “toggle switches.” A function is active
when the associated field in the soft-key row is highlighted in color.
The setting remains in effect until the function is switched off again.
With functions like Take over position you do not have to enter
values manually. The data are automatically written into the
appropriate input fields.
Data entries are not concluded until the Save or Input finished soft
key has been pressed.
The Back soft key takes you back to the previous operating level.
56 Basics of operation
2.3 Operation and data input
Data input
Input windows comprise several input fields. You can move the
cursor to the desired input field with the vertical arrow keys. The CNC
PILOT shows the function of the selected field in the footer of the
window.
Place the highlight on the desired input field and enter the data.
Existing data are overwritten. With the horizontal arrow keys, you can
move the cursor within the input field and place it on the position
where you want to delete, copy or add characters.
To confirm the data you entered in a field, press a vertical arrow key
or the ENTER key.
If there are more input fields than a window can show, a second input
window is used. You will recognize this through the symbol in the
bottom line of the input window. To switch back and forth between
the windows, press the PG UP/PG DN keys.
smart.Turn dialogs
The unit dialog is divided into fillable forms and the forms are divided
again into groups. The forms are identified by tabs and fine lines divide
each tab into groups. You can navigate between the forms and groups
with the smart keys.
Data entry is concluded when you press the OK or Input
finished or Save soft key. The Back or Cancel soft key
discards input or changes.
smart keys
Go to the next form
Next/previous group
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 57
2.3 Operation and data input
List operations
Cycle programs, DIN programs, tool lists, etc. are displayed as lists.
You can scroll through a list with the arrow keys to check data or to
highlight elements for operations like deleting, copying, editing, etc.
Alphanumeric keyboard
You enter letters and special characters with the screen keypad or (if
available) with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port.
Entering text with the screen keyboard
Press the "Alphabetic keyboard" soft key or the GOTO key to enter
a text, for example a program name.
The CNC PILOT opens the Text Input window.
Just as on a cell phone, you press the numerical keys a few times
to get the desired letters or special characters.
Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field
before you enter the next character.
Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field.
Use the abc/ABC soft key to select upper or lower case.
To delete individual characters, use the Backspace soft key.
58 Basics of operation
2.4 Integrated calculator
2.4 Integrated calculator
Calculator functions
The calculator can be selected only from open dialogs in cycle
programming or smart.Turn programming. You can use the calculator
in the following three views (see figures at right):
Scientific
Standard
Equation editor. Here you can type in multiple calculations in
immediate sequence (for example 17*3+5/9).
Using the calculator
Use the arrow keys to select the input field.
Use the CALC key to activate and deactivate the
calculator.
Shift the soft-key menu until the desired function
appears.
Perform the calculation.
Press the soft key. The CNC PILOT transfers the value
into the active input box and closes the calculator.
Switching the view of the calculator
Shift the soft-key menu until the VIEW soft key appears.
Press the View soft key until the desired view is set.
The calculator remains in effect even after a change in
operating modes. Press the END soft key to close the
calculator.
The GET CURRENT VALUE soft key enables you to
transfer a numerical value from the active input field to the
calculator. The CONFIRM VALUE soft key enables you to
load the current value from the calculator to the active
input field.
Mathematical function Shortcut (soft key)
Addition +
Subtraction -
Multiplication *
Division /
Calculations in parentheses ()
Arc cosine ARC
Sine SIN
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 59
2.4 Integrated calculator
Cosine COS
Tangent TAN
Powers of values X^Y
Square root SQRT
Inversion 1/x
pi (3.14159265359) PI
Add value to buffer memory M+
Save the value to buffer memory MS
Recall from buffer memory MR
Delete buffer memory contents MC
Natural logarithm LN
Logarithm LOG
Exponent function e^x
Check the algebraic sign SGN
Form the absolute value ABS
Truncate decimal places INT
Truncate places before the decimal point FRAC
Modulus operator MOD
Select view View
Delete value DEL
Unit of measure MM or INCH
Display mode for angle values DEG (degree) or
RAD (radian
measure)
Display mode of the numerical value DEC (decimal) or
HEX (hexadecimal)
Mathematical function Shortcut (soft key)
60 Basics of operation
2.4 Integrated calculator
Adjusting the position of the calculator
You can move the calculator as follows:
Move the calculator with the arrow keys
Move the calculator to the center
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 61
2.5 Types of programs
2.5 Types of programs
The CNC PILOT supports the following programs/contours:
Teach-in programs (cycle programs) are used in the "Teach in"
mode of operation.
smart.Turn and DIN main programs are written in the smart.Turn
mode of operation.
DIN subprograms are written in the smart.Turn operating mode
and are used in cycle programs and smart.Turn main programs.
ICP contours are generated during Teach-in in the Teach-in or
Manual mode of operation. The extension depends on the contour
described.
In smart.Turn the contours are saved directly in the main program.
Program type Folder Extension
Teach-in programs
(cycle programs)
"nc_prog\gtz" "*.gmz"
smart.Turn and DIN
main programs
"nc_prog\ncps" "*.nc"
DIN subprograms "nc_prog\ncps" "*.ncs"
ICP contours "nc_prog\gti"
Turning contours "*.gmi"
Contours of
workpiece blanks
"*.gmr"
Contours on face "*.gms"
Lateral surface
contours
"*.gmm"
62 Basics of operation
2.6 The error messages
2.6 The error messages
Display of errors
The CNC PILOT generates error messages when it detects problems
such as:
Incorrect data input
Logical errors in the program
Contour elements that are impossible to machine
When an error occurs, it is displayed in red type in the header. Long
and multi-line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form. If an
error occurs in a background mode, the error symbol is shown in the
operating mode tab. Complete information on all pending errors is
shown in the error window.
If a rare "processor check error" should occur, the CNC PILOT
automatically opens the error window. You cannot remove such an
error. Shut down the system and restart the CNC PILOT.
The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or
replaced by a higher-priority error.
An error message that contains the block number of an NC program
was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block.
Opening the error window
Press the ERR key. The CNC PILOT opens the error
window and displays all accumulated error
messages.
Closing the error window
Press the END soft key—or
Press the ERR key. The CNC PILOT closes the error
window.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 63
2.6 The error messages
Detailed error messages
The CNC PILOT displays possible causes of the error and suggestions
for solving the problem:
Information on error causes and remedies:
Open the error window.
Position the cursor on the error message and press
the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the window with
information on the error cause and corrective action.
To exit the info, press the Info soft key again.
"Details" soft key
The DETAILS soft key supplies information on the error message.
This information is only required if servicing is needed.
Open the error window.
Position the cursor on the error message and press
the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the window with
internal information about the error.
To exit the details, press the Details soft key again.
64 Basics of operation
2.6 The error messages
Clearing errors
Clearing errors outside of the error window:
Open the error window.
To clear the error/message in the header: Press the
CE key.
Clearing more than one error:
Open the error window.
To delete an individual error: Position the cursor on the
error message and press the soft key.
To delete all errors: Press the Delete All soft key.
Error log file
The CNC PILOT stores errors and important events (e.g. system
startup) in an error log file. The capacity of the error log file is limited.
If the log file is full, it switches to the next one, etc. If the last log file
is full, the first one is overwritten by a new one, etc. If necessary,
switch the log file to see the history. 5 log files are available.
Open the error window.
Press the Log file soft key.
Open the log file.
Select previous log file, if needed.
Select current log file, if needed.
The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file, and the most recent
entry is at the end.
In some operating modes (such as the Editing mode), the
CE key cannot be used to clear the error, since the key is
reserved for other functions.
If the cause of the error has not been removed, the error
message cannot be deleted. In this case, the error
message remains in the window.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 65
2.6 The error messages
Keystroke log file
The CNC PILOT stores keystrokes and important events (e.g. system
startup) in the keystroke log file. The capacity of the keystroke log file
is limited. If the log file is full, it switches to the next one, etc. If the
last log file is full, the first one is overwritten by a new one, etc. If
necessary, switch the log file to see the history. 10 log files are
available.
Open the keystroke log file.
Press the Log file soft key.
Open the log file.
Select previous log file, if needed.
Select current log file, if needed.
The CNC PILOT saves each key pressed during operation in the
keystroke log file. The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file,
and the most recent entry is at the end.
Saving service files
If necessary, you can save the "Current status of the CNC PILOT," and
make it available to a service technician for evaluation. A group of
service files is saved that contain information about the current status
of the machine and the machining. See “Service files” auf Seite 598.
The information is summarized in a service files data record as a zip
file.
TNC:\SERVICEx.zip
The "x" designates a consecutive serial number. The CNC PILOT
always generates the service file with the number 1, and all existing
files are renamed to the numbers 2 to 5. An existing file with the
number 5 is deleted.
Saving service files
Open the error window.
Press the Log file soft key.
Press the Service files soft key.
66 Basics of operation
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive
help system
Application
The TURNguide context-sensitive help system includes the user
documentation in HTML format. The TURNguide is called with the Info
key, and the control often immediately displays the information
specific to the condition from which the help was called (context-
sensitive call). Even if you are editing in a cycle and press the Info key,
you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation that
describes the corresponding function.
The following user documentation is available in the TURNguide:
User's Manual (BHBoperating.chm)
smart.Turn and DIN (ISO) programming (smartTurn.chm)
List of All Error Messages (errors.chm)
In addition, the main.chm "book" file is available, with the contents of
all existing .chm files.
Before you can use the TURNguide, you need to
download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home
page (siehe „Downloading current help files” auf Seite
71).
The control always tries to start the TURNguide in the
language that you have selected as the conversational
language on your control. If the files with this language are
not yet available on your control, it automatically opens
the English version.
As an option, your machine tool builder can embed
machine-specific documentation in the TURNguide.
These documents then appear as a separate book in the
main.chm file.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 67
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Working with the TURNguide
Calling the TURNguide
There are several ways to start the TURNguide:
Press the Info key if the control is not already showing an error
message
Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand,
then click the appropriate soft keys
For many soft keys there is a context-sensitive call through which you
can go directly to the description of the soft key's function. This
functionality requires using a mouse. Proceed as follows:
Select the soft-key row containing the desired soft key
Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the control displays
just above the soft-key row: The mouse pointer turns into a question
mark.
Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an
explanation, and click: The TNC opens the TURNguide. If no specific
part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key, the control
opens the book file main.chm, in which you can use the search
function or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually.
Even if you are editing a cycle, context-sensitive help is available:
Select any cycle.
Press the Info key: The control start the help system and shows a
description for the active function (does not apply to miscellaneous
functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool
builder)
If one or more error messages are waiting for your
attention, the control shows the help directly associated
with the error messages. To start the TURNguide, you
first have to acknowledge all error messages.
When the help system is called on the programming
station, the control starts the internally defined standard
browser (usually the Internet Explorer), or otherwise an
adapted browser.
68 Basics of operation
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Navigating in the TURNguide
It's easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TURNguide. A table of
contents appears on the left side of the screen. By clicking the
rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections, and by
clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages. It is
operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer.
Linked text positions (cross references) are shown underlined and in
blue. Clicking the link opens the associated page.
Of course you can also operate the TURNguide through keys and soft
keys. The following table contains an overview of the corresponding
key functions.
The key functions described below are only available on
the control hardware, and not on the programming
station.
Function Soft key
If the table of contents at left is active:
Select the entry above it or below it
If the text window at right is active:
Move the page downward or upward if texts or
graphics are not shown completely
If the table of contents at left is active:
Open a branch of the table of contents. If the
branch is at its end, jump into the window at
right
If the text window at right is active:
No function
If the table of contents at left is active:
Close a branch of the table of contents
If the text window at right is active:
No function
If the table of contents at left is active:
Use the cursor key to show the selected page
If the text window at right is active:
If the cursor is on a link, jump to the linked page
If the table of contents at left is active:
Switch the tab between the display of the table
of contents, display of the subject index, and
the full-text search function and switching to
the screen half at right
If the text window at right is active:
Jump back to the window at left
If the table of contents at left is active:
Select the entry above it or below it
If the text window at right is active:
Jump to the next link
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 69
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Select the page last shown
Page forward if you have used the "Select page
last shown" function
Move up by one page
Move down by one page
Display or hide table of contents
Switch between full-screen display and reduced
display. With the reduced display you can see
some of the rest of the control window.
The focus is switched internally to the control
application so that you can operate the control
when the TURNguide is open. If the full screen is
active, the control reduces the window size
automatically before the change of focus.
Exit TURNguide
Function Soft key
70 Basics of operation
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Subject index
The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject
index (Index tab). You can select them directly by mouse or with the
cursor keys.
The left side is active.
Select the Index tab
Activate the Keyword input field
Enter the word for the desired subject and the control
synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you
can find the subject more easily, or
Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword
Use the ENT key to call the information on the
selected keyword
Full-text search
In the Find tab you can search all of TURNguide for a specific word.
The left side is active.
Select the Find tab
Activate the Find: input field
Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key:
the control lists all sources containing the word
Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source
Press the ENT key to go to the selected source
You can enter the search word only with a keyboard
connected via USB.
You can enter the search word only with a keyboard
connected via USB.
The full-text search only works for single words.
If you activate the Search only in titles function (by
mouse or by using the cursor and the space key), the
control searches only through headings and ignores the
body text.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 71
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Downloading current help files
You’ll find the help files for your control software on the HEIDENHAIN
homepage www.heidenhain.de. Help files for most conversational
languages are at:
Services and Documentation
Software
CNC PILOT help system
NC software number of your control, for example 34056x-02
Select the desired language, e.g. English: You will see a ZIP file with
the appropriate help files
Download the ZIP file and unzip it
Move the unzipped CHM files to the control in the
TNC:\tncguide\en directory or into the respective language
subdirectory (see also the following table)
If you want to use TNCremoNT to transfer the CHM files
to the TNC, then in the
Extras>Configuration>Mode>Transfer in binary
format menu item you have to enter the extension .CHM.
Language TNC directory
German TNC:\tncguide\de
English TNC:\tncguide\en
Czech TNC:\tncguide\cs
French TNC:\tncguide\fr
Italian TNC:\tncguide\it
Spanish TNC:\tncguide\es
Portuguese TNC:\tncguide\pt
Swedish TNC:\tncguide\sv
Danish TNC:\tncguide\da
Finnish TNC:\tncguide\fi
Dutch TNC:\tncguide\nl
Polish TNC:\tncguide\pl
Hungarian TNC:\tncguide\hu
Russian TNC:\tncguide\ru
Chinese (simplified) TNC:\tncguide\zh
Chinese (traditional) TNC:\tncguide\zh-tw
72 Basics of operation
2.7 TURNguide context-sensitive help system
Slovenian (software option) TNC:\tncguide\sl
Norwegian TNC:\tncguide\no
Slovak TNC:\tncguide\sk
Korean TNC:\tncguide\kr
Turkish TNC:\tncguide\tr
Romanian TNC:\tncguide\ro
Language TNC directory
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 73
Machine mode of
operation
74 Machine mode of operation
3.1 Machine mode of operation
3.1 Machine mode of operation
The Machine mode of operation includes all functions for machine
setup, workpiece machining, and Teach-in program definition.
Machine setup: For preparations like setting axis values (defining
workpiece zero point), measuring tools or setting the protection
zone.
Manual mode: Machine a workpiece manually or semi-
automatically.
Teach-in mode: "Teach-in" a new cycle program, change an existing
program, or graphically simulate cycles.
Program run: Graphically simulate existing cycle programs or
smart.Turn programs and use them for the production of parts.
A Teach-in cycle is a machining step that has already been
programmed for you. This can be any machining operation from a
single cut through to a complex machining task like thread cutting. In
any case, a cycle is always a complete machining step that is
immediately executable once you have defined a few parameters that
describe the workpiece to be machined.
In Manual mode, the cycles that you program are not stored. In
Teach-in mode, each machining step is executed with a cycle and then
stored and integrated into a complete Teach-in program. You can
subsequently use this program in parts production by repeating it as
often as desired in the Program Run mode.
In ICP programming, any contour can be defined using linear/circular
elements and transition elements (chamfers, rounding arcs,
undercuts). You include the contour description in ICP cycles (see
“ICP contours” auf Seite 374).
You write smart.Turn and DIN programs in the smart.Turn mode of
operation. The DIN programming feature provides you with
commands for simple traversing movements, DIN cycles for complex
machining tasks, switching functions, mathematical operations and
programming with variables.
You can either create "independent" programs that already contain all
necessary switching and traversing commands and are executed in
the Program Run mode, or program DIN subprograms that are
integrated in Teach-in cycles. The commands that you use in a DIN
subprogram depend on the job at hand. DIN subprograms support the
complete range of commands that is available for DIN programs.
You can also convert Teach-in programs to smart.Turn programs.
This enables you to make use of straightforward Teach-in
programming, and then convert the part program to DIN format for
subsequent optimization or completion.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 75
3.2 Switch-on / Switch-off
3.2 Switch-on / Switch-off
Switch-on
The CNC PILOT displays the startup status. When the system has
completed all tests and initializations, it switches to the Machine
mode of operation. The tool display shows the tool that was last used.
If errors are encountered during system start, the control displays the
error symbol on the screen. You can check these error messages as
soon as the system is ready (see “The error messages” auf Seite 62).
Monitoring EnDat encoders
If EnDat encoders are used, the control saves the axis positions during
switch-off of the machine. During switch-on, the CNC PILOT
compares for each axis the position during switch-on with the position
saved during switch-off.
If there is a difference, one of the following messages appears:
"S-RAM error: Saved position of the axis is invalid."
This message is correct if the control has been switched on for the
first time, or if the encoder or other control components involved
were exchanged.
"Axis was moved after power-off. Position difference: xx mm or
degrees"
Check the current position and confirm it if the axis was in fact
moved.
"HW parameter changed: Saved position of the axis is invalid."
This message is correct if configuration parameters were changed.
The cause for one of the above listed messages can also be a defect
in the encoder or control. Please contact your machine supplier if the
problem recurs.
After system start, the CNC PILOT assumes that the tool
which was last used is still inserted in the tool holder. If
this is not the case, you must inform the control of the tool
change.
76 Machine mode of operation
3.2 Switch-on / Switch-off
Traversing the reference marks
Whether a reference run is necessary depends on the encoders used:
EnDat encoder: Reference run is not necessary.
Distance-coded encoders: The position of the axes is ascertained
after a short reference run.
Standard encoder: The axes move to known, machine-based points.
As soon as a reference mark is traversed, a signal is transmitted to
the control. The control knows the distance between the reference
mark and the machine zero point and can now establish the precise
position of the axis.
Press the Z reference soft key
Press the X reference soft key
Or press the All soft key
Press Cycle start for the control to traverse the
reference marks
The CNC PILOT activates the position display and switches to the
main menu.
REFERENCE RUN
In case you traverse the reference marks separately for
the X and Z axes, you only traverse in either the X or the Z
axis.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 77
3.2 Switch-on / Switch-off
Switch-off
Go to the main level of the Machine mode of
operation
Activate the error window
Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key
Press the OFF soft key
The CNC PILOT displays a confirmation request.
Press the Enter key or the YES soft key. The software
shuts down
Wait until the CNC PILOT requests you to switch off the machine.
Proper switch-off is recorded in the error log file.
SWITCH-OFF
78 Machine mode of operation
3.3 Machine data
3.3 Machine data
Input of machine data
In Manual mode, you enter the information for tool, spindle speed and
feed rate/cutting speed in the TSF dialog box (Set T, S, F input
window). In Teach-in programs the tool information and technology
data are included in the cycle parameters, and in smart.Turn programs
they are part of the NC program.
In the TSF dialog box you also define the "maximum speed", the
"stopping angle" and the workpiece material.
You can save the cutting data (cutting speed, feed rate) in the
technology database as a function of the workpiece material, the
tool's cutting material and the type of operation. With the Proposed
technology soft key the data are taken into the dialog.
The Tool list soft key opens the tool list. With the Turret list soft
key you open a list of the current assignment of the tool carrier. There
is a place in the table for every tool holder. During setup, each tool (ID
number) is assigned to a tool holder.
If your machine is equipped with a driven tool, you use the spindle-
change key to select the spindle for which the entries are to apply. The
selected spindle is indicated in the display. For this reason there are
two versions of the TSF dialog box:
Without driven tool: The parameters S, D and A apply to the main
spindle
With driven tool: The parameters S, D and A apply to the selected
spindle
Meaning of the parameters:
S: Cutting speed / constant speed
D: Max. spindle speed
A: Stopping angle
BW: Angle in the B axis (machine-dependent function)
CW: Reverse tool position (No/Yes): For determining the tool's work
position for machining the front or rear face (machine-dependent
function)
In the machine parameter Separate dialogs for tool
change, speed and feed rate (604906) you can define
how you would like the TSF dialog to be displayed:
TSF dialog box with input of all cutting data
Separate dialogs for T, S and F
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 79
3.3 Machine data
TSF dialog box with input of all cutting data
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Define the parameters
Conclude data input
TSF dialog box with separate dialogs
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Select T for tool change
Select S for setting the spindle speed
Select F for setting the feed rate
Enter the parameters in the submenu
Conclude data input
Selecting the workpiece spindle (machine-dependent)
If your machine is equipped with a workpiece spindle, the WP
parameter is shown in the TSF form. The WP parameter allows you to
select the workpiece spindle for machining in Teach-in mode and MDI.
Soft keys for "Set T, S, F"
Siehe „Tool compensation” auf
Seite 107.
Siehe „Touch off” auf Seite 104.
Call the tool list. Transfer of T number
from the tool list: Siehe „Setting up a tool
list” auf Seite 85.
Transfer of cutting speed and feed rate
from the technology data.
On: Feed per minute (mm/min)
Off: Feed per revolution (mm/rev)
On: Constant speed (rpm)
Off: Constant surface speed (m/min)
ENTER THE TOOL DATA AND TECHNOLOGY DATA
Caution. Depending on the machine, this operation might
cause the turret to turn.
ENTER THE TOOL DATA OR TECHNOLOGY DATA
Caution. Depending on the machine, the input of data in
the T dialog might cause the turret to turn.
80 Machine mode of operation
3.3 Machine data
Select the workpiece spindle for machining with WP:
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
The WP parameter setting is saved in the Teach-in and MDI cycles and
displayed in the corresponding cycle form.
If you selected the opposing spindle for rear-face machining with the
WP parameter, the cycle is mirrored (in the opposite Z direction). Use
tools with suitable tool orientation.
Machine data display
In the TSF menu, the setting for the WP parameter is
changed when you:
run a cycle with another WP parameter setting
select a program during program run
Elements of machine data display
Position display X, Y, Z, W: Distance between tool tip and workpiece zero point
A black axis letter means the axis is enabled; white means it is not enabled.
Handwheel active Clamping active
Display of C position: Position of C axis
Empty box: C-axis is not active
A black axis letter means the axis is enabled; white means it is not enabled.
Display settings of the position display: Can be set via the
MP_axesDisplayMode user parameter. The setting is shown by a letter next to the
position window.
A: Actual value (setting: REF ACTL)
N: Nominal value (setting: REF NOML)
L: Following error (setting: LAG)
D: Distance to go (setting: DIST)
Display of the slide number and C-axis number: A numeral next to the position
window of the axis shows the assigned slide or C-axis number. The numeral is only
displayed if an axis was configured multiple times, e.g. a second C-axis as opposing
spindle.
Distance-to-go display X, Y, Z, W: The distance remaining from the current
position to the target position of the active traversing command.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 81
3.3 Machine data
Distance-to-go and protection zone status: Distance-to-go display and display of
status of protection zone monitoring.
Protection zone monitoring
active
Protection zone monitoring
not active
Position display for four axes: Display of position values for up to four axes. The
displayed axes depend on the machine configuration.
T number display
T number of the inserted tool
Tool compensation values
For all of the T displays:
T highlighted in color indicates a driven tool
T number or ID highlighted in color indicates a mirrored tool holder
T number with index: Multipoint tool
A letter X/Z of the compensation highlighted in color indicates that a special
compensation is active in the X/Z direction
T ID display
ID of the inserted tool
Tool compensation values
T ID display without compensation values
ID of the inserted tool
Tool compensation
Special compensation only for recessing tools or button tools
Special compensation value in gray means special compensation is not active
A letter X/Z of the compensation highlighted in color indicates that a special
compensation is active in the X/Z direction
Additive compensation
Compensation values in gray means D compensation is not active
Compensation values in black means D compensation is active
Tool life information
"T": Black=global tool life monitoring on; white=global tool life monitoring off
MT, RT active: Monitoring for tool life
MZ, RZ active: Monitoring for part quantity
All fields empty: Tool without tool-life monitoring
Elements of machine data display
82 Machine mode of operation
3.3 Machine data
Slide display and cycle status
Upper field: Setting of the override control
Lower field with white background: Actual feed rate
Lower field with gray background: Programmed feed rate with stationary slide
Slide display and cycle status
Upper field: Programmed feed rate
Lower field: Actual feed rate
Slide display and cycle status
Upper field: Setting of the override control
Middle field: Programmed feed rate
Lower field: Actual feed rate
Slide display with rear-face machining
If rear-face machining is enabled, the slide number is highlighted in blue.
Spindle display with spindle number, gear range and spindle status
Upper field: Setting of the override control
Lower field: Actual speed or spindle position
For all of the spindle displays:
Spindle symbol: Black means the spindle is enabled; white means it is not.
Numeral in spindle symbol: Gear range
Numeral at right next to the spindle symbol: Spindle number
If a spindle key exists, the number of the selected spindle is highlighted in color.
Spindle status: Siehe “Spindle” auf Seite 84.
Display of the programmed speed in rpm or m/min
Display of the actual speed in rpm
If M19 is active and the machine tool builder has made the setting, when the
spindle is not turning, the display shows the spindle position instead of the
spindle speed.
If a spindle is in slave mode during synchronous operation, the value "0" is
displayed instead of the programmed speed.
During synchronous operation, the spindle symbol is highlighted in color for both
the master spindle and the slave spindle
Spindle display with spindle number, gear range and spindle status
Upper field: Programmed speed
Lower field: Actual speed or spindle position
Spindle display with spindle number, gear range and spindle status
Upper field: Setting of the override control
Middle field: Programmed speed
Lower field: Actual speed or spindle position
Elements of machine data display
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 83
3.3 Machine data
Override display of the active spindle
F: Feed rate
R: Rapid traverse
S: Spindle
Utilization of the drives: Utilization of the drive relative to the rated torque.
Digital axis and spindle motors
Analog axis and spindle motors, if set up by the machine tool builder
Display of unit quantities: The quantity is incremented after each M30, M99 or
M18 programmed counter pulse.
MP: Default unit quantity
P: Number of finished parts
Display of unit quantities and time per unit: The quantity is incremented after
each M30, M99 or M18 programmed counter pulse.
MP: Default unit quantity
P: Number of finished parts
t: Run time of the current program
Sum t: Total time
Display of skip levels and M01 conditional stop
Defined skip levels (upper row) and set/activated skip levels (lower row)
Setting for M01: M01 is not executed in Continuous Run mode (yellow display)
Display of rear-face machining: The RSM display (RSM: Rear Side Machining)
provides information about rear-face machining.
RSM status
Active zero point shift of the configured RSM axis
B-axis display: The information displayed about the status of the tilted plane varies
depending on the setting of the machine parameters.
Programmed angular value of the B axis
Display of the current values I, K, U and W
I: Plane reference in X
K: Plane reference in Z
U: Shift in X
W: Shift in Z
Elements of machine data display
The machine data display is configurable by the machine
tool builder. The machine data that appear on your screen
may therefore deviate from the example shown.
84 Machine mode of operation
3.3 Machine data
Cycle statuses
The CNC PILOT shows the current cycle status with the cycle symbol
(see table at right).
Axis feed rate
F is the identification letter for feed data. Depending on which mode
of the Feed rate soft key is active, data is entered in:
Millimeters per spindle revolution (feed per revolution)
Millimeters per minute (feed per minute).
On the screen, you can tell the type of feed rate from the unit of
measure in the input field.
You can change the feed value with the feed compensation
controller (feed override) (range: 0 % to 150 %).
Spindle
S is the identification letter for spindle data. Depending on which
mode of the Constant speed soft key is active, data is entered in:
Revolutions per minute (constant speed)
Meters per minute (constant surface speed).
The input range is limited by the maximum spindle speed. You define
the speed limitation in the Set T, S, F dialog box or in DIN
programming with the G26 command. The speed limit remains in
effect until a new speed limit value is programmed.
The speed compensation controller (speed override) allows you to
change the spindle speed (range: 50% to 150 %).
Cycle symbols
Status "Cycle ON"
Cycle or program execution is active.
Status "Cycle OFF"
Cycle or program execution is not active.
Spindle symbols (S display)
Direction of spindle rotation M3
Direction of spindle rotation M4
Spindle stopped
Spindle position-controlled (M19)
C axis on spindle motor is active
Spindle designations
Main spindle H0 1
Driven tool 112
If you are machining with a constant cutting speed, the
CNC PILOT calculates the spindle speed from the
position of the tool tip. The smaller the diameter of the
tip, the higher the spindle speed. The maximum spindle
speed, however, is never exceeded.
The spindle symbols indicate the direction of spindle
rotation as seen from the point of view of the machinist.
The spindle designation is fixed by the machine tool
builder (see table at right).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 85
3.4 Setting up a tool list
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Machine with turret
The tools used are listed in the turret list. The ID number of the
mounted tool is assigned to every tool holder in the turret.
In the Teach-in cycle you program the turret position as T number.
The tool ID number is automatically entered under "ID."
The turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-in mode.
T turret pocket number
Tool ID (name) is entered automatically.
Open the Turret list. If the cursor is on the ID input
field, the CNC PILOT also automatically opens the
tool list with the entries in the tool database.
Machine with multifix
Machines with multifix tool holders have one tool pocket in which the
tools are changed manually.
T turret pocket number: Always T1
Tool ID (name): Select the ID number from the tool list
Open the Tool list.
The turret and multifix tool systems can be used together
on one machine. The machine tool builder defines the
number of the multifix pocket.
86 Machine mode of operation
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Tools in different quadrants
Example: The principal tool carrier of your lathe is in front of the
workpiece (standard quadrant). An additional tool holder is behind
the workpiece.
When CNC PILOT is configured, it is defined for each tool holder
whether the X dimensions and the direction of rotation of circular arcs
are mirrored. In the above-mentioned example the additional tool
holder is assigned the attribute "mirrored."
If this method is used, all machining operations are programmed as
usual—regardless of which tool holder executes the operation. The
simulation also shows all machining operations in the standard
quadrant.
The tools are also described and dimensioned for the standard
quadrant—even if they are inserted in the additional tool holder.
Mirroring does not become effective until the machining of the
workpiece, i.e. when the additional tool holder is executing the
machining operation.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 87
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Filling the turret list from the database
The turret list indicates the current assignment of the tool carrier. The
turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-in mode.
Look at the entries in the tool database in order to move entries from
the database into the turret assignment list. The CNC PILOT displays
the database entries in the lower area of the screen. The cursor keys
are active in this list. You can move the cursor directly to a tool ID
number by entering the first few letters or digits of the ID number.
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Initiate the cycle dialog
Press the Tool list soft key to activate the turret
assignment list and the tool list.
Adapt the turret assignment
Select the position in the turret assignment list.
Select and sort the entries in the tool database (see soft-key table at
right)
Use the cursor keys to select the entry in the tool database.
Load the selected tool into the turret assignment list.
Selecting and sorting entries in the tool
database
The CNC PILOT opens the soft-key
menu to select the desired tool type.
The CNC PILOT opens the soft-key
menu containing additional filter options.
The CNC PILOT opens the soft-key
menu containing various sorting options.
Sorts the tools in the displayed list as
desired according to:
Tool type
Tool ID
Tool orientation
Each time the soft key is pressed it
changes to the next sorting mode.
Switches between ascending and
descending sorting.
Not active here
Closes the tool list.
OPEN THE TURRET LIST
TRANSFERRING TOOLS FROM THE DATABASE
88 Machine mode of operation
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Filling the turret list
The turret assignment indicates the current assignment of the tool
carrier. When you set up a turret list, you enter the ID numbers of the
tools.
The turret list can be set up through the TSF menu or directly from the
cycle dialogs in the Teach-in mode. The desired turret pocket is
selected through the cursor keys.
You can also set up manual changing systems in the turret assignment
(siehe „Setting up the holder for manual change systems” auf Seite
515).
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Initiate the cycle dialog
Press the Turret list soft key to activate the turret
assignment list
Use the arrow keys to select a turret pocket
Adapt the turret assignment with the soft keys (see soft-key table at
right).
Enter the tool ID number directly
Press the ENT key to activate direct input.
Enter the tool ID number
Press the INS key to conclude input.
Press the ESC key to cancel input.
Soft keys in turret list
Delete entry
Paste entry from clipboard
Cut out entry and save it in the clipboard
Show entries in the tool database
Switch to next menu
Delete the complete turret list
Reset tool life
Back by one menu level
Load the T number and the tool ID
number into the TSF or cycle dialog
Close the turret list without loading the T
number and tool ID into the dialog box.
Changes in the turret list remain
effective.
SET UP THE TURRET LIST
ENTER THE TOOL ID NUMBER DIRECTLY
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 89
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Tool call
T is the identification letter for the tool holder. ID designates the tool
ID number. The tool is called by "T" (turret pocket number). The ID
number ID is shown and automatically filled in the dialogs. A turret list
is kept.
In the turret list, multipoint tools are displayed with all cutting edges.
In manual operation, you enter the T number in the TSF dialog box. In
Teach-in mode, “T” and “ID” are cycle parameters.
Driven tools
Driven tools are defined in the tool description.
The driven tool can be operated with feed per revolution if the tool
spindle drive is equipped with a rotary encoder.
If driven tools are used with constant cutting speed, the spindle
speed is calculated from the tool diameter.
If a T number is entered in the TSF dialog box with an ID
number that is not defined in the turret list, then the turret
list will be changed accordingly. The existing turret list will
be overwritten.
90 Machine mode of operation
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Tool life monitoring
If desired, you can have the CNC PILOT monitor tool life or the number
of parts that are produced with a specific tool.
The tool life monitoring function adds the time a tool is used at feed
rate. The quantity monitoring counts the number of finished parts. The
count is compared with the entry in the tool data.
As soon as the tool life expires or the programmed quantity is reached,
the CNC PILOT sets the diagnostic bit 1. This causes an error message
to be issued the next time the tool is called. If no replacement tool is
available, the program will be stopped.
For Teach-in programs, the simple tool life monitoring is available.
Here the CNC PILOT informs you when a tool is worn out.
In smart.Turn and DIN PLUS programs, you have the choice
between the simple tool life monitoring and the tool life
monitoring with replacement tools option. If you use
replacement tools, the CNC PILOT automatically inserts the "sister
tool" as soon as the tool is worn-out. The CNC PILOT does not stop
the program run until the last tool of the tool sequence of exchange
is worn out.
You activate/deactivate the tool life management in the parameter
"System/General settings for automatic operation/user parameter tool
life."
The CNC PILOT manages the type of monitoring, the "tool life/
remaining tool life" and the "maximum number of pieces/remaining
number of pieces" in the diagnostic bits of the tool data. You can edit
and display the diagnostic bits and the tool life in the tool editor (see
“Editing tool-life data” auf Seite 509).
You can define replacement tools when setting up the turret in
smart.Turn. The "interchange chain" can contain more than one
replacement tool. The interchange chain is part of the NC program
(see chapter titled "Tool Programming" in the "smart.Turn and DIN
Programming" User's Manual).
You must update the data on tool life and number of
pieces in the "tool management" mode when you replace
the insert of a tool.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 91
3.4 Setting up a tool list
Resetting the tool life in the turret list
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Open the turret list
Press the Special Functions soft key
Press the Set new cutting edge soft key
Answer Yes to the confirmation prompt
Press the Back soft key
RESET TOOL LIFE
92 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
3.5 Machine setup
The machine always requires a few preparations, regardless of
whether you are machining a workpiece manually or automatically. In
Manual mode the following functions are subitems of the Setup menu
item:
Setting the axis values (defining workpiece zero point)
Machine reference (axis reference run)
Setting the protection zone
Defining the tool change position
Setting C-axis values
Defining machine dimensions
Display operating times
Probing
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 93
3.5 Machine setup
Defining the workpiece zero point
In the dialog, the distance between the machine zero point and the
workpiece zero point (also know as offset) is shown as XN and ZN. If
the workpiece zero point is changed, the display values will be
changed accordingly.
Select Setting up
Select Set axis values
Touch the workpiece zero point (end face)
Define this point as the "workpiece zero point Z"
Enter the distance between the tool and the workpiece zero point as
"measuring point coordinate Z"
The CNC PILOT calculates the workpiece zero point Z
Machine zero point Z = workpiece zero point Z
(offset = 0)
This makes it possible to enter the zero point shift
directly in ZN
The workpiece zero point can also be set in the Z axis
using a touch probe. When setting the zero point, the
control checks which type of tool is currently active. If you
select the Workpiece zero point setup function and a
touch probe is inserted, the control automatically adjusts
the input form. Press NC Start to start the measuring
process.
SETTING THE WORKPIECE ZERO POINT
94 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
Defining offsets
Before using zero point shifts with G53, G54 and G55, you need to
define the offset values in setup mode.
Select Setting up
Select Set axis values
Press the Shift soft key
Enter the offset value
Press the G53 soft key
Press the G54 soft key
Press the G55 soft key
Press the Save soft key.
The CNC PILOT saves the values to a table. In this way, you can
activate the offsets in the program by entering the respective G codes.
SET OFFSET
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 95
3.5 Machine setup
Homing the axes
It is possible to home axes that have already been homed. Here you
can select individual axes or all axes simultaneously.
Select Setting up
Select Set axis values
Press the Machine reference soft key
Press the Z reference soft key
Press the X reference soft key
Or press the All soft key
Press Cycle start for the control to traverse the
reference marks
The CNC PILOT refreshes the position display.
REFERENCE RUN
96 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
Setting the protection zone
With active protection zone monitoring, the CNC PILOT checks for
every movement whether the protection zone in –Z direction would
be violated. If it detects such a violation, it stops the axis movement
and generates an error message.
The "Setting the protection zone" setup dialog shows the distance
between the machine zero point and the protection zone in –ZS.
The status of the protection zone monitoring is shown in the machine
display if it has been configured by the machine manufacturer (see
table).
Select Setting up
Select Set protection zone
Move the tool with the jog keys or handwheel until it reaches the
protection zone
Use the Take over position soft key to load this
position as protection zone
Enter the position of the protection zone relative to the workpiece zero
point (field: "Meas. pt. coordin.–Z")
Use the Save soft key to load the entered position as
protection zone
Switch off protection zone monitoring
Protection zone status
Protection zone monitoring active
Protection zone monitoring not active
SETTING THE PROTECTION ZONE/SWITCHING OFF THE MONITORING
FUNCTION
Protection zone monitoring is not active if the Set
protection zone dialog box is open.
In DIN programming, you deactivate protection zone
monitoring with G60 Q1 and reactivate it with G60.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 97
3.5 Machine setup
Defining the tool change position
With the cycle Move to tool change position or the DIN command
G14, the slide moves to the tool change point. Program the tool
change point far enough away from the workpiece so that the turret
can rotate without collision and the tools do not damage the
workpiece during tool change.
Select Setting up
Select the tool change point
Move to the tool change position
Move to the tool change point using the jog keys or
the handwheel and load this position as tool change
point
Enter the tool change position directly
Enter the desired tool change position in the X and Z input fields in
machine coordinates (X = radius dimension).
DEFINING THE TOOL CHANGE POSITION
The coordinates of the tool change position are entered
and displayed as the distance between machine zero point
and tool carrier zero point. It is recommended to move to
the tool change point and load the position with the Take
over position soft key.
98 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
Setting C-axis values
The "Set C-axis values" function enables you to define a zero point shift
for the workpiece spindle:
CN: Position value of the workpiece spindle (display)
C: Zero point shift of the C axis
Select Setting up
Select Set C axis values
Position the C axis
Define the position as the C axis zero point
Enter the zero point shift of the C axis:
Confirm entry for CNC PILOT to calculate the C axis
zero point
Delete the zero point shift of the C axis
Expanded form view for machines with opposing spindle
If your machine is equipped with an opposing spindle, the CA
parameter is shown. The CA parameter enables you to specify for
which workpiece spindle (main spindle or opposing spindle) entries for
the "Set C-axis value" function are effective.
The active angle offset is shown in the CV parameter. An angle offset
is activated with G905 to match the position of main and opposing
spindle to each other. This may be necessary if both spindles need to
be synchronized for a part transfer. The "Delete CV offset" soft key
enables you to reset an active angle offset.
Additional parameters for machines with opposing spindle:
CV: Display of active angle offset
CA: Selection of C axis (main spindle or opposing spindle)
DEFINING THE ZERO POINT OF THE C AXIS
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 99
3.5 Machine setup
Setting up machine dimensions
The "Set up machine dimensions" function allows you to save any
positions to use these in NC programs.
Select Setting up
Select Set up machine dimensions
Enter the number for the machine dimensions
Assume position of a single axis as machine
dimensions
Assume position of all axes as machine dimensions
Save machine dimensions
SETTING UP MACHINE DIMENSIONS
100 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
Calibrating the tool touch probe
The "Calibrate the tool touch probe" function enables you to determine
the exact position values of the tool touch probe.
Insert an exactly measured tool or reference tool
Select Setting up
Select touch probe
Select tool touch probe
Pre-position the tool for the first direction of measurement
Set the positive or negative traverse direction
Press the soft key for this direction (e.g. –Z direction)
Press Cycle START. The tool moves in the direction
of measurement. The position of the touch probe is
measured and saved when the tool touch probe
releases a trigger signal. The tool returns to the
starting point.
Press the "Back" soft key to terminate the calibration
process. The calibration values measured are saved,
or
Pre-position the tool for the next measuring direction and repeat the
procedure (max. 4 measuring directions)
MEASURING THE TOUCH PROBE POSITION
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 101
3.5 Machine setup
Displaying operating times
In the Service menu, you can view different operating times:
Select Setting up
Select Service
Select Display operating times
Operating time Meaning
Control on Operating time of the control since being
put into service
Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since
being put into service
Program run Duration of controlled operation since being
put into service
The machine tool builder can provide further operating
time displays. The machine manual provides further
information.
DISPLAY OPERATING TIMES
102 Machine mode of operation
3.5 Machine setup
Setting the system time
With the "Adjust system time" function, you can set the date and time
on your control.
Select Setting up
Select Service
Select Adjust system time
Select Synchronize the time over NTP server (if available)
Select Set the time manually
Select Date
Select Time
Select Time zone
Press the OK soft key
You will need a mouse to navigate the Adjust system time
input form.
Use the Month and Year soft keys to increment or
decrement the respective settings.
To use an NTP server for setting the time, select a server
from the server list first.
ADJUST THE SYSTEM TIME
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 103
3.6 Tool measurement
3.6 Tool measurement
The CNC PILOT supports tool calibration
By touch-off. The setup dimensions are determined by comparing a
tool with an already measured tool.
By touch probe (stationary of swiveling in the working space;
installed by the machine tool builder).
By optical gauge (installed by the machine tool builder).
Calibration by touch-off is always available. If a touch probe or an
optical gauge is installed, select these measuring methods by soft
key.
If the tool dimensions are already known, you can enter the setup
dimensions directly in the "tool management" mode of operation.
The compensation values are deleted during tool
measurement.
Please note that for drilling and milling tools the center
is measured.
The tools' type and orientation determine how they are
measured. Note the help graphics.
104 Machine mode of operation
3.6 Tool measurement
Touch off
You measure the dimensions relative to a calibrated tool by "touching
the tool off."
In the tool table, enter the tool you want to measure
Insert the reference tool and enter the T number in
the TSF dialog box
Turn an end face and define this coordinate as the workpiece zero
point
Return to the TSF dialog box and insert the tool to be
measured
Activate Measure tool
Touch the face with the tool
Enter the value 0 for the measuring point coordinate
Z (workpiece zero point) and save it
Turn a measuring diameter
Enter the diameter value as measuring point
coordinate X and save it
For turning tools, enter the cutting edge radius and
load it into the tool table
FINDING THE TOOL DIMENSIONS BY TOUCH-OFF WITH THE TOOL
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 105
3.6 Tool measurement
Touch probe (tool touch probe)
In the tool table, enter the tool you want to measure
Insert the tool and enter the T number in the TSF
dialog box
Activate Measure tool
Activate Touch probe
Pre-position the tool for the first direction of measurement
Set the positive or negative traverse direction
Press the soft key for this direction (e.g. –Z direction)
Press Cycle START. The tool moves in the direction
of measurement. When it contacts the touch probe,
the control calculates and saves the set-up
dimensions. The tool returns to the starting point.
Pre-position the tool for the second direction of measurement
Press the soft key for this direction (e.g. –X direction)
Press Cycle START. The tool moves in the direction
of measurement. When it contacts the touch probe,
the control calculates and saves the set-up
dimensions.
For turning tools, enter the cutting edge radius and
load it into the tool table
FINDING THE TOOL DIMENSIONS BY USING A TOUCH PROBE
106 Machine mode of operation
3.6 Tool measurement
Optical gauge
In the tool table, enter the tool you want to measure
Insert the tool and enter the T number in the TSF
dialog box
Activate Measure tool
Activate optical gauge
Position the tool at the cross hairs of the optical gauge by using the jog
keys or the handwheel
Save the tool dimension in Z
Save the tool dimension in X
For turning tools, enter the cutting edge radius and
load it into the tool table
FINDING THE TOOL DIMENSIONS BY USING AN OPTICAL GAUGE
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 107
3.6 Tool measurement
Tool compensation
The tool compensation in X and Z as well as the special compensation
for recessing tools and button tools compensate for wear of the
cutting edge.
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Press the Tool correct. soft key
Press the X offset for tool (or Z offset) soft key
The compensation values that you determine per
handwheel are now shown in the distance-to-go
display
Transfer the compensation value to the tool table
The T display shows the new compensation value
The distance-to-go display is canceled
Select Set T, S, F (only available in Manual mode)
Press the Tool correct. soft key
Press the Delete soft key
Delete compensation value in X (or Z)
A compensation value must not exceed +/–10 mm.
DEFINING TOOL COMPENSATION
DELETING TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES
108 Machine mode of operation
3.7 Manual mode
3.7 Manual mode
With manual workpiece machining, you move the axes with the
handwheels or manual direction keys. You can also use Teach-in
cycles for machining more complex contours (semi-automatic mode).
The paths of traverse and the cycles, however, are not stored.
After switch-on and traversing the reference marks, the CNC PILOT is
always in Manual mode. This mode remains active until you select
Teach-in or Program Run. "Machine" displayed in the header indicates
that you are in Manual mode.
Tool change
Enter the T number/tool ID in the Set T, S, F dialog box. Check the
tool parameters.
T0 does not define a tool. This also means that it does not contain any
data on tool length, cutting radius, etc.
Spindle
Enter the spindle speed in the Set T, S, F dialog box. To start and
stop spindle rotation, press the spindle keys on the machine operating
panel. The stopping angle A in the TSF dialog box makes the spindle
always stop at this position.
Handwheel operation
Refer to the machine manual.
Define the workpiece zero point and enter the machine
data before you start machining.
Pay attention to the maximum speed (can be defined with
TSF dialog box).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 109
3.7 Manual mode
Manual direction keys
With the manual direction keys, you can move the axes at the
programmed feed rate or at rapid traverse. Enter the feed rate in the
TSF dialog box.
Teach-in cycles in Manual mode
Set the spindle speed
Set the feed rate
Insert tool, define T number and check tool data (T0 is not permitted)
Approach cycle start point
Select the cycle and enter cycle parameters
Graphically check the cycle run
Run the cycle
Feed rate
If the spindle is rotating: Feed per revolution [mm/
rev]
If the spindle is not rotating: Feed per minute [m/
min]
Feed rate in rapid traverse: Feed per minute [m/min]
The entries last made in a cycle dialog remain in memory
until a new cycle is selected.
110 Machine mode of operation
3.8 Teach-in mode
3.8 Teach-in mode
Teach-in mode
In the Teach-in mode you machine a workpiece step by step with the
help of Teach-in cycles. The CNC PILOT "memorizes" how the
workpiece was machined and stores the working steps in a cycle
program, which you can call up again at any time. The Teach-in mode
can be switched on by soft key and is displayed in the header.
Each Teach-in program is given a name and a short description. The
individual cycles of a cycle program are listed as blocks and are
numbered in ascending order. The block number has no meaning for
the program run. The cycles are run after each other. When the cursor
is located on a cycle block, CNC PILOT displays the cycle parameters.
The cycle block contains:
Block number
Tool used (turret pocket number and tool ID)
Cycle designation
Number of ICP contour or of DIN subprogram (after "%")
Programming Teach-in cycles
When creating a new Teach-in program, you program each cycle in the
following sequence of actions "Enter—Simulate—Execute—Save."
The individual cycles form the cycle program.
You can change Teach-in programs by simply editing the necessary
cycle parameters, and delete or add cycles as required.
When you exit the Teach-in mode or switch off the machine, the
Teach-in program remains as it was programmed or edited.
When you call an ICP cycle, the control displays a soft key for
switching to the ICP contour editor (see “ICP editor in cycle mode” auf
Seite 377).
DIN subprograms are programmed in the smart.Turn editor and then
integrated in a DIN cycle. You can use either the DIN edit soft key to
go into the smart.Turn editor when you select the DIN cycle, or the
operating-mode key.
Soft keys
Switch to the "select cycle programs"
function.
Renumber the block numbers of the
cycles.
Enter/edit the program description. Open
the alphabetic keyboard.
Delete the selected cycle.
Copy the cycle parameters into a buffer
memory. (Example: Adopt the
parameters of the roughing cycle for the
finishing cycle).
Transfer the cutting data from the tool
memory. (Soft key appears only after Copy
cycle.)
Change the cycle parameter or mode. The
cycle type, however, cannot be changed.
Insert a new cycle below the highlighted
block.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 111
3.9 Program Run mode
3.9 Program Run mode
Loading a program
In Program Run mode, you use Teach-in and DIN programs for parts
production. You cannot change the programs in this mode. The
graphic simulation feature, however, allows you to check the
programs before you run them. The CNC PILOT also offers the Single
Block and the Continuous Run mode with which you can machine step
by step the first workpiece of a whole batch.
The smart.Turn programs are saved as DIN programs (*.nc).
Program Run automatically loads the most recently used program. To
load another program, proceed as follows:
Open the program list—the CNC PILOT displays the
Teach-in programs
Display the DIN program
Select the Teach-in program or DIN program
Display the DIN program
You can start a Teach-in or smart.Turn program at any desired block to
resume a machining operation after an interruption (mid-program
startup).
The Program Run mode can be switched on with the soft key and is
displayed in the header.
If you press Program Run, the CNC PILOT reads in the program that
was last active in this mode or in the editing mode. Alternately, you
can select another program with Program list (see “Program
management” auf Seite 127).
LOAD THE TEACH-IN PROGRAM OR NC PROGRAM
112 Machine mode of operation
3.9 Program Run mode
Comparing a tool list
While a program is being loaded, the CNC PILOT compares the current
tools in the turret with the tool list of the program. If tools are used in
the program that are not in the current turret list or are located in
another pocket, an error message is displayed.
After the error message is confirmed, the program-dependent tool list
is shown for checking.
You can transfer the programmed tool table with the Load tool soft
key, or cancel the program selection with Cancel.
Before executing a program
Faulty programs
The CNC PILOT checks the programs during loading up to the
MACHINING section. If it detects an error (for example, an error in the
contour description), it displays the error symbol in the screen
headline. You can then press the Info key for detailed information on
the error.
The machining section of a program and therefore all traverse is not
interpreted until after Cycle on. If there is an error here, the machine
stops with an error message.
Testing the cycles and cycle parameters
The CNC PILOT displays the Teach-in program or the DIN program
in the list window. With Teach-in programs, the parameters of the
cycle on which the cursor is placed are displayed.
Graphic control
You can monitor program run with the graphic simulation feature
(see “Simulation mode of operation” auf Seite 484).
Danger of collision!
Load the programmed tool list only if it matches the
actual turret assignment.
A program start is not possible unless the programmed
tool list matches the turret list that was set up.
Danger of collision!
Before starting the program, check it in the simulation to
find errors in the programming or the syntax used.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 113
3.9 Program Run mode
Finding a start block
Mid-program startup means entering into an NC program at a selected
point. In smart.Turn programs you can start the program at any NC
block.
The CNC PILOT starts program run from the cursor position. The
starting position is not changed by a previous graphic simulation.
In the search for a start block, the CNC PILOT brings the machine into
the situation in which it would be in a normal program run just before
the startup block. First the tool is selected, then the axes are
positioned in the configured sequence, and finally the spindle is
switched on.
The CNC PILOT must be prepared by the machine tool
builder for the mid-program startup function (PLC).
In the End mid-program startup after start block
machine parameter (601810), you can define whether
program execution after a mid-program startup will start
at the selected NC block or at the subsequent NC block.
HEIDENHAIN recommends starting at an NC block
immediately after a T command.
Please note:
Position the slide with the following conditions:
The turret can tilt without collision.
The axes must be able to move to the last
programmed position without collision.
The mid-program startup feature can vary depending on
the individual machine tool. If the machine parameter
601810 is set to start program execution at the selected
NC block, remember the following:
If you use a T command as the starting block, the turret
moves first to the previous tool and then to the tool
selected in the starting block.
114 Machine mode of operation
3.9 Program Run mode
Program execution
The selected Teach-in or DIN program is executed as soon as you
press Cycle start. You can interrupt machining at any time by pressing
Cycle stop.
During program run, the cycle (or DIN block) that is presently being
executed is highlighted. With Teach-in programs, the parameters of
the cycle currently being run are displayed in the input window.
You can influence the program run with the soft keys listed in this
table.
Soft keys
Select Teach-in program or smart.Turn
program.
Teach-in program:
On: Cycles are run continuously, one
after the other, up to the next tool
change to be acknowledged.
Off: Stop after every cycle. Start the
following cycle with Cycle start.
smart.Turn program:
On: Program execution without any
interruption.
Off: Stop before command M01.
On: Program execution stops after
each path of traverse (basic block). Start
the next path: Cycle start.
(Recommendation: Single block should
be used together with the basic-block
display.)
Off: Cycles / DIN commands are
executed without any interruption
Input of tool compensation values or
additive correction values, see “Entering
compensation values during program
run” auf Seite 115
Switch the graphic simulation on.
On: The traversing and switching
commands are shown in DIN format
(basic blocks).
Off: Teach-in program or DIN program
is displayed.
The cursor returns to the first block of the
Teach-in program or DIN program.
In the menu Program Run > No. of pieces, the number of
parts to be machined can be defined in the MP parameter
(machine-dependent function). If this parameter is
defined, you can only run the program until the specified
quantity is reached. The control will then display a
message and will not allow any further machining
operations. With the Delete qty. Parts soft key, you can
reset the workpiece counter.
In the P input field, you can enter the actual count. This is
useful, for example, if you have already machined a
number of parts.
In the menu Program Run > Skip levels, the skip levels
defined in the program can be set/activated with the NR
parameter. Before you can set/activate skip levels, you
need to define them in the program (see the smart.Turn
and DIN Programming User’s Manual).
If you enter the value 2 in the NR parameter and press the
Save soft key, the control sets/activates the skip level 2
and refreshes the display field accordingly (siehe
„Machine data display” auf Seite 80). The next time the
program is run, the NC blocks defined by the set/active
skip level will not be executed by the control.
You can set/activate more than one skip level at a time by
entering a string of numerals in the NR parameter. The
entry "159" sets/activates the skip levels 1, 5 and 9.
To deactivate the skip levels, program the NR parameter
without a value and press Save.
When setting/activating skip levels during program run,
please remember that the control will respond with a delay
due to the block scan.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 115
3.9 Program Run mode
Entering compensation values during program
run
Tool compensation
Activate the tool compensation
Enter the tool number or select a tool from the tool list
Enter the compensation values
Press the Save soft key for the valid compensation
data to be displayed in the input window and saved
ENTERING TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES
Entered values are added to the existing compensation
values. They are immediately effective in the display and
taken into account in the following traverse block.
To delete a compensation, enter the current
compensation value with the opposite algebraic sign.
116 Machine mode of operation
3.9 Program Run mode
Additive compensation
The CNC PILOT manages 16 additive compensation values. You edit
the compensation values in the Program Run mode and activate them
with G149 in a smart.Turn program or in ICP finishing cycles.
Activate the additive compensation
Enter the number of the additive compensation
Enter the compensation values
Press the Save soft key for the valid compensation
data to be displayed in the input window and saved
Activate the additive compensation
Enter the number of the additive compensation
Place the cursor in the next input field—CNC PILOT displays the valid
compensation values
ENTERING ADDITIVE COMPENSATION
READING ADDITIVE COMPENSATION
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 117
3.9 Program Run mode
Activate the additive compensation
Enter the number of the additive compensation
Press the Delete soft key—these compensation
values are deleted
Press the Delete all soft key—all compensation
values are deleted
DELETING ADDITIVE COMPENSATION
Entered values are added to the existing compensation
values and are immediately effective in the display. The
control moves in the compensation direction by the
compensation value in the following traverse block.
The compensation values are saved in an internal table
and are available in any program.
Delete all additive compensation values when you set
up the machine again.
118 Machine mode of operation
3.9 Program Run mode
Program execution in "dry run" mode
The dry run mode is used for fast program execution up to a point at
which machining is to resume. The prerequisites for a dry run are:
The CNC PILOT must be prepared by the machine tool builder for
dry run. (The function is activated with a keylock switch or a key.)
The Program Run mode must be activated.
In dry run, all feed paths (except thread cuts) are traversed at the rapid
rate. You can reduce the traversing speed with the feed rate override.
Do not use the dry run feature for anything other than "cutting air."
When dry run is activated, the spindle status or spindle speed is
"frozen." After deactivation of the dry run, the CNC PILOT returns to
the programmed feed rates and spindle speeds.
Use the dry run feature only to "cut air."
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 119
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
During a machining operation with active load monitoring, the control
compares the current utilization of the drives specified by G995 with
the respective limit values. To calculate the limit values for a
monitoring zone defined with G995, the control uses reference values
determined during reference machining as well as predefined factors
specified in the machine parameters.
If the utilization limit 1 or the total utilization limit is exceeded, the
control issues a warning and sets the corresponding diagnostic bits in
the tool editor to identify the active tool as worn-out.
If the utilization limit 2 is exceeded, the control issues an error
message, stops the machining operation and sets the corresponding
diagnostic bits in the tool editor to identify the active tool as broken.
The control must be specially prepared by the machine
tool builder for the use of the Load Monitoring option.
The following steps are required before you can use the
load monitoring feature in the Program Run submode:
Define the respective machine parameters in the
System section (siehe „List of user parameters”, Seite
545)
In the smart.Turn operating mode, define the type of load
monitoring with G996 and the monitoring zone with G995
in your program (see smart.Turn and DIN Programming
User's Manual)
When tool life monitoring is active, the control will
automatically insert a predefined sister tool during the next
tool call in order to replace the tool that has been identified
as worn-out or broken by the diagnostic bits of the tool
editor. As an alternative to the automatic evaluation of the
diagnostic bits by the tool life monitoring function, you can
also evaluate the diagnostic bits in your program.
Keep in mind that load monitoring is not possible for
hanging axes without counterweight!
Note that load monitoring only works to a limited extent if
the load changes are small. Therefore, monitor the drives
that are subjected to significant loads, such as the main
spindle.
120 Machine mode of operation
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
When face turning with a constant surface speed,
remember that the load monitoring feature will monitor
the spindle up to a maximum of 15 % of the nominal
acceleration defined in the machine parameters. Since
acceleration increases as a result of the change in
rotational speed, the control only monitors the period after
the first cut!
The load monitoring function compares current utilization
values with maximum limit values. For proper comparison,
the utilization values must not be too low. Since the
utilization depends on the cutting conditions, the following
example is provided for your guidance. It illustrates the
required values for the machining of steel:
Longitudinal turning: Cutting depth > 1 mm
Recessing: Cutting depth > 1 mm
Drilling into solid material: Hole diameter > 10 mm
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 121
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
Reference machining
During reference machining, the control determines the maximum
utilization and the total utilization for each monitoring zone. The
determined values are used as reference values. To calculate the limit
values for a monitoring zone, the control uses the determined
reference values and the predefined factors specified in the machine
parameters.
Select the Program Run submode and open the NC program
Activate load monitoring: Select the menu Program Run > Activate
load monitoring
Select reference machining: Select the menu Program Run >
Reference machining—the control shows the title bar with a green
background
Start reference machining: Press NC Start—the control executes the
machining operation and stores the reference data in a separate file.
After the successful completion of reference machining, the control
displays an information message.
Perform reference machining under the conditions in
which the parts will later be produced, for example, with
respect to feed rates, spindle speeds, and the type and
quality of the tools you will be using.
REFERENCE MACHINING
Program M30 or M99 to conclude reference machining. If
the program is aborted during machining, no reference
data are stored. In this case you need to execute reference
machining again.
Reference machining must be repeated if you make any
changes to your program; for example:
Define new zones
Delete existing zones
Change zone numbers
Change, add or remove axes within a zone
Change feed rates or spindle speeds
Change tools
Change cutting depth values
122 Machine mode of operation
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
Checking the reference values
After the successful completion of reference machining, check the
determined reference values.
Meanings of the values:
Utilization: Determined drive torque relative to the rated torque of
the drive in [%]
Total utilization: Sum of the utilization values in the monitoring zone
in [%*ms]
To display the reference values, select the menu View > Edit load
data. The control opens the "Set load data" form containing the
parameters listed below. In addition, the determined values are
displayed as a bar graph.
The load monitoring function compares current utilization
values with limit values. For proper comparison, the
reference values for utilization must not be too low. Check
the determined values and, if required, remove monitored
axes with a utilization rate of less than 5 % from the
monitoring zone.
OPEN REFERENCE VALUES
Parameters
ZO Number of the monitoring zone
AX Monitored axis
CH Selected channel
T Tool pocket of the active tool in the monitoring zone
ID Name of the active tool in the monitoring zone
P Maximum utilization during reference machining
PA Maximum utilization during the current machining
operation
PG1 Utilization limit 1
PG2 Utilization limit 2
W Total utilization during reference machining
WA Total utilization during the current machining operation
WGF Factor for the total utilization limit
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 123
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
Bar graph
Thick upper bar (display in %)
Green Range up to maximum utilization during reference
machining (P)
Yellow Range up to utilization limit 1 (PG1)
Red Range up to utilization limit 2 (PG2)
Magenta Maximum utilization during last machining operation (PA)
Thin lower bar (display standardized to reference value 1):
Green Range up to maximum total utilization during reference
machining (W)
Yellow Range up to total utilization limit (WGF)
Magenta Maximum total utilization during last machining operation
(WA)
After reference machining, the value W equals WA and
the value P equals PA. They are used as the reference
values for calculating the limit values.
124 Machine mode of operation
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
Adapting the limit values
After successful reference machining, the control uses the reference
values and the predefined factors specified in the machine parameters
to calculate the limit values.
You can adapt the calculated limit values as required for the
subsequent production.
To display limit values, select the menu View > Edit load data—the
control opens the "Set load data" form
Check the limit values
If required, adapt the parameters PG1, PG2 or WGF
ADAPT LIMIT VALUES
Be sure to adapt the correct limit values. First, press the
Next zone and Next axis soft keys to select the form
containing the limit values you want to change! As an
alternative, you can use the selection lists of the ZO and
AX parameters to select the correct form. Save the
changes separately for each axis by pressing the Save soft
key!
Reference machining does not have to be repeated after
adapting the limit values. You can continue production
with the adapted limit values.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 125
3.10 Load monitoring (option)
Using load monitoring during production
During program run, the control monitors the utilization and the total
utilization in each interpolator cycle. In parallel with machining, you can
display a graph of the current utilization values for all monitored axes
of the active zone.
To display the utilization values, select the menu View > Edit load
data—the control opens the "Set load data" form and additionally
displays the determined values as a bar graph
To display the current utilization values, press the Display active zone
soft key—the control automatically switches to the current monitoring
zone and displays the current utilization values as a bar graph
Keep in mind that you cannot adapt the limit values during
machining. Adapt the limit values before starting a
machining operation.
OPEN DIAGRAM DURING MACHINING
Bar graph
Thick upper bar (display in %)
Green Current utilization (PA)
Mark in thick upper bar:
Green Current peak value between 0 and limit value 1 (P)
Yellow Current peak value between P and limit value 1 (PG1)
Red
Current peak value between PG1 and limit value 2 (PG1)
Thin lower bar (display standardized to reference value 1):
Green Current total utilization (WA)
Yellow Current total utilization up to limit value (WGF)
126 Machine mode of operation
3.11 Graphic simulation
3.11 Graphic simulation
The graphic simulation feature enables you to check the machining
sequence, the proportioning of cuts and the finished contour before
actual machining.
In the Manual Operation and Teach-in modes, this function
simulates the execution of a single Teach-in cycle—in Program Run
mode it simulates a complete Teach-in program or DIN program.
A programmed workpiece blank is displayed in the simulation
graphics. The CNC PILOT also simulates machining operations that
are executed with a traversable spindle or the C axis on the face or
lateral surface. This allows you to check the complete machining
process.
In Manual mode and Teach-in mode, the Teach-in cycle you are
currently working on is simulated. In the Program Run mode the
simulation begins starting with the cursor position. smart.Turn and
DIN programs are simulated from program start.
For more details on the use and operation of the simulation, refer to
the chapter “Simulation mode of operation” auf Seite 484.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 127
3.12 Program management
3.12 Program management
Program selection
Program Run automatically loads the most recently used program.
In the program selection the programs available in the control are
listed. You select the desired program, or use the ENTER key to go to
the File name input field. In this input field you limit the selection or
enter the program name directly.
Open the program list. Use the soft keys for program
selection and sorting (see following table).
Soft keys in the program selection dialog
Displays the file attributes: size, date, time
Switch between Teach-in and DIN/smart.Turn
programs
Open the program organization soft-key menu (siehe
Seite 128)
Open the sorting functions soft-key menu (see following
table)
Open the project organization soft key menu (see
“Project management” auf Seite 129)
Open the alphabetic keyboard (see “Alphanumeric
keyboard” auf Seite 57)
Open the program for the automatic start
Close the program selection dialog box. The program
previously active in the Program Run mode remains
effective.
Soft keys for sorting functions
Displays the file attributes: size, date, time
Sort the programs by file name
Sort the programs by file size
128 Machine mode of operation
3.12 Program management
File manager
With the functions of the program organization you can copy, delete
and otherwise manipulate files. You can select the program type
(Teach-in programs, smart.Turn or DIN programs) before calling the
program organization.
Sort the programs by change date
Reverse the sorting direction
Open the program for the automatic start
Return to program selection dialog
Soft keys for sorting functions
Soft keys file manager
Alternate between directory and file window
Cut marked file
Copy marked file
Insert the file stored in the buffer memory
Rename marked files
Delete marked file following confirmation prompt
Display details
Mark all files
Sort files
Activate/deactivate write protection for the marked
program
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 129
3.12 Program management
Project management
You can make your own project folder in the project management so
that you can centrally manage associated files. When you create a
project, a new folder is set up with the corresponding subfolder
structure in the "TNC:\Project\" directory. You can save your programs,
contours and drawings to the subfolders.
The "Project" soft key activates the project management. The control
shows you all existing projects in a tree structure. The control also
opens a soft key menu in the project management that allows you to
create, select and manage projects. To reselect the standard directory
of the control, select the "TNC:\nc_prog" folder, or press the "Select
standard dir." soft key.
Open the alphabetic keyboard (see “Alphanumeric
keyboard” auf Seite 57)
Return to program selection dialog
Soft keys file manager
Soft keys project
Create new project
Copy marked project
Delete marked project following confirmation prompt
Rename marked project
Select marked project
Select standard directory
You can select any project names. The subfolders (dxf, gti,
gtz, ncps and Pictures) have predefined names which
must not be changed.
All existing project folders are displayed in the project
management. Use the file manager to change between
subfolders.
130 Machine mode of operation
3.13 Conversion into DIN format
3.13 Conversion into DIN format
The Convert to DIN function enables you to convert a Teach-in
program to a smart.Turn program with the same functionality. You can
then optimize, expand such a smart.Turn program, etc.
Making a conversion
Press the Cycle program --> DIN soft key (in the main
menu)
Select the program to be converted
Press the Cycle program --> DIN soft key (program
selection menu)
The generated DIN program has the same program name as the
Teach-in program.
Should the CNC PILOT encounter any errors during conversion, it
generates an error message and cancels conversion.
If a program with the name used is open in the smart.Turn editor, the
conversion must be confirmed with the Overwrite soft key. The CNC
PILOT
CONVERSION INTO DIN FORMAT
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 131
3.14 Units of measure
3.14 Units of measure
The CNC PILOT is operating in either the metric or inch system. The
units and decimal places in the displays are given and entries
interpreted according to the units of measure.
The inch/metric setting is also evaluated for the displays and entries in
Tool management.
Make the metric/inch setting in the user parameter "System/Definition
of unit of measure in effect for display" (Seite 545). Changed metric/
inch settings become effective immediately, with no need for a
restart.
The basic block display also switches to inches.
inch metric
Units
Coordinates, lengths, path data inch mm
Feed rate in./rev or in./min mm/rev or mm/
min
Cutting speed ft/min m/min
Number of decimal places in displays and input
Coordinate data and path data 4 3
Compensation values 5 3
The unit is defined in all NC programs. Metric programs
can be run with an active inch mode and vice versa.
New programs are made with the selected unit.
Refer to your machine manual if you want to know
whether and how the handwheel resolution can be set
to inches.
132 Machine mode of operation
3.14 Units of measure
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 133
Teach-in mode
134 Teach-in mode
4.1 Working with cycles
4.1 Working with cycles
Before you can use the cycles, you must set the workpiece zero point
and ensure that the tools you are going to use are described. You enter
the machine data (tool, feed rate, spindle speed) in Teach-in mode
together with the other cycle parameters. In Manual mode, you must
program these machine data before calling a cycle.
Define the individual cycles as follows:
Position the tool tip with the handwheel or the jog keys to the
starting point of the cycle (only in Manual mode)
Select and program a cycle
Graphically test the cycle
Execute the cycle
Save the cycle (only in Teach-in mode)
Cycle starting point
In Manual mode, cycles are executed from the "current tool position."
In Teach-in mode, you enter the starting point as one of the
parameters. The CNC PILOT moves to this position at rapid traverse
by the shortest path (diagonal) before executing the cycle.
The cutting data can be taken from the technology
database using the Proposed technology soft key. For this
database access, a type of operation is permanently
assigned to every cycle.
Danger of collision!
If the tool cannot approach the next starting point on the
shortest path without colliding with the workpiece, you
must define an auxiliary position with the Rapid traverse
positioning cycle.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 135
4.1 Working with cycles
Help graphics
The functions and parameters of the Teach-in cycles are illustrated in
the graphic support window. These graphics usually show an external
machining operation.
The Circle key allows you to switch between the
help graphics for internal and external machining.
Elements used in the graphic support window:
Broken line: Rapid traverse path
Continuous line: Feed path
Dimension line with arrow head on one side: "Directional
dimension"—the algebraic sign defines the direction
Dimension line with arrow head on both sides: "Directional
dimension"—the algebraic sign has no effect
DIN macros
DIN macros (DIN cycles) are DIN subprograms (see “DIN cycle” auf
Seite 370). You can integrate DIN macros in Teach-in programs. Make
sure that the DIN macros do not contain any zero point shifts.
Graphical test run (simulation)
Before executing a cycle, you can graphically test the contour details
and the machining sequence (see “Simulation mode of operation” auf
Seite 484).
Danger of collision!
Teach-in programming: With DIN macros, the zero point
shift is reset at the end of the cycle. Therefore, do not use
any DIN macros with zero point shifts in Teach-in
programming.
136 Teach-in mode
4.1 Working with cycles
Contour follow-up in Teach-in mode
The contour follow-up function updates the originally defined
workpiece blank with every machining step. The turning cycles take
the current contour of the workpiece blank into account for the
calculation of infeed and machining paths. Air cuts are avoided and
approach paths optimized.
In order to activate contour follow-up in Teach-in mode, program a
workpiece blank and select "With contour follow-up" in the RG input
parameter (siehe auch „Workpiece blank cycles” auf Seite 141).
Cycle run with active contour follow-up (RG: 1):
Pressing Cycle start initiates a search for the selected cycle for mid-
program startup.
The next Cycle start executes the M commands (e.g. direction of
rotation).
The next Cycle start positions the tool to the last programmed
coordinates (e.g. tool change point).
The next Cycle start runs the selected cycle.
Cycle keys
A programmed Teach-in cycle is not executed until Cycle start is
pressed. Cycle stop interrupts a running cycle. During thread cutting,
with a Cycle stop the tool is lifted off the contour and then stopped.
The cycle has to be restarted.
During a cycle interruption you can:
Resume cycle execution with Cycle start. The control will always
resume execution of the cycle at the point of interruption—even if
you have moved the axes in the meantime.
Move the axes with the manual direction keys or the handwheel.
Terminate the machining process with the Back soft key.
When contour follow-up is active, you can also use modal
functions, such as "Interrupted feed" or "Zero point shift."
Contour follow-up can only be used for turning operations.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 137
4.1 Working with cycles
Switching functions (M functions)
The CNC PILOT generates all switching functions that are necessary
for running a cycle.
The direction of spindle rotation must be defined in the tool
parameters. Using the tool parameters, the cycles generate spindle
trigger functions (M3 or M4).
Comments
You may assign a comment to an existing Teach-in cycle. The
comment is inserted in brackets "[...]" below the cycle.
Create/select a cycle
Press the Change text soft key
Press the Goto key to show the alphabetic keyboard
Enter the comment with the on-screen alphanumeric keyboard
Transfer the comment
Your machine manual provides further information on
automatically triggered switching functions.
ADDING OR EDITING COMMENTS
138 Teach-in mode
4.1 Working with cycles
Cycle menu
The main menu shows the cycle groups (see table below). Once a
cycle group has been selected, the soft keys for the individual cycles
appear.
You can use ICP cycles for complex contours, and DIN macros for
technologically sophisticated machining operations. In cycle
programs, the names of the ICP contours or DIN macros are at the end
of the line of the cycle.
Some cycles offer optional parameters. That means, specific
contour elements will only be machined if you set the corresponding
parameters. The identification letters for optional parameters and
parameters that are preassigned default values are displayed in gray.
The following parameters are only required in Teach-in mode:
Starting point X, Z
Machine data S, F, T and ID
Cycle groups Menu key
Workpiece blank
Defining standard workpiece blanks or workpiece
blanks with ICP.
Single cuts
Positioning in rapid traverse, linear and circular
single cuts, chamfers, and rounding arcs.
Turning cycles, longitudinal/transverse
Roughing and finishing cycles for turning and
facing.
Recessing and recess-turning cycles
Cycles for recessing, contour recessing,
undercuts and parting.
Thread cutting
Thread cycles, relief turns and thread repair.
Drilling
Drilling cycles and patterns for face and lateral-
surface machining.
Milling
Milling cycles and patterns for face and lateral-
surface machining.
DIN macros
Including DIN macros
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 139
4.1 Working with cycles
Soft keys in cycle programming: Depending on the type of cycle,
you define the variants of the cycle by soft key (see table below).
Soft keys in cycle programming
Call the interactive contour input
Move to the tool change position
Activate spindle positioning (M19)
On: Tool returns to starting point
Off: Tool remains at cycle end position
Switch to the finishing operation
Switch to the expanded mode
Open the turret list and tool list. You can load the tool
from the list.
Load the actual positions X and Z in Teach-in mode
Accept the proposed values for feed rate and cutting
velocity from the database
On: Constant speed [rpm]
Off: Constant surface speed [m/min]
Linear drilling or milling pattern on face or lateral surface
Circular drilling or milling pattern on face or lateral surface
Transfer entered/changed values
Cancel the current dialog
140 Teach-in mode
4.1 Working with cycles
Addresses used in many cycles
Safety clearance G47
Safety clearances are used for approaching and departing paths. If the
cycle run takes a safety clearance into account during execution you
will find the address "G47" in the dialog. Proposed value: See (safety
clearance G47) Seite 545.
Safety clearances SCI and SCK
The safety clearances SCI and SCK are considered for approach and
departure paths in drilling and milling cycles.
SCI = Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK = Safety clearance in infeed direction
Proposed value: See (safety clearance G147) Seite 545.
Tool change position G14
With the address G14, at the end of the cycle you program a
movement of the slide to the tool change position (see “Defining the
tool change position” auf Seite 97). You can influence the approach to
the tool change position as follows:
No axis (do not approach the tool change point)
0: Simultaneous (default)
1: First X, then Z
2: First Z, then X
3: Only X
4:Only Z
Cutting limit SX, SZ
With the addresses SX and SZ you limit the contour area to be
machined in the X and Z direction. Seen from the tool position at the
beginning of the cycle, the contour to be machined is truncated at
these positions.
Additive compensation Dxx
With the address Dxx you activate an additive compensation for the
entire cycle run. The xx stands for the compensation numbers 1 to 16.
The additive compensation is switched off again at the end of the
cycle.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 141
4.2 Workpiece blank cycles
4.2 Workpiece blank cycles
Workpiece blank Symbol
Bar/tube blank
Defining the standard blanks.
ICP workpiece blank contour
Free workpiece blank description with
ICP
The workpiece blank cycles describe the workpiece blank
and the setup used. The workpiece blank cycles do not
influence the machining process.
The contours of workpiece blanks are shown during the
simulation of the machining process.
142 Teach-in mode
4.2 Workpiece blank cycles
Bar/tube blank
Select define the blank
Select bar/tube blank
The cycle describes the workpiece blank and the setup used. This
information is evaluated during the simulation.
Cycle parameters
X Outside diameter
Z Length, including transverse allowance and clamping range
I Inside diameter for workpiece blank "tube"
K Right edge (transverse allowance)
BClamping range
JClamp type
0: Not clamped
1: Externally clamped
2: Internally clamped
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the cycle
(machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
RG Contour follow-up for Teach-in mode (siehe auch „Contour
follow-up in Teach-in mode” auf Seite 136):
0: Without contour follow-up
1: With contour follow-up
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 143
4.2 Workpiece blank cycles
ICP workpiece blank contour
Select define the blank
Select ICP workpiece blank contour
The cycle integrates the workpiece blank defined with ICP and
describes the setup used. This information is evaluated during the
simulation.
Cycle parameters
X Clamp diameter
Z Clamping position in Z
B Clamping range
JClamp type
0: Not clamped
1: Externally clamped
2: Internally clamped
RK ICP contour number
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the cycle
(machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
RG Contour follow-up for Teach-in mode
0: Without contour follow-up
1: With contour follow-up
144 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
4.3 Single cut cycles
Single cuts Symbol
Rapid traverse positioning
Move to the tool change position
Linear machining, longitudinal/
transverse
Single longitudinal/transverse cut
Linear machining at angle
Single oblique cut
Circular machining
Single circular cut (for cutting
direction, see menu key)
Machine a chamfer
Machine a rounding
Call an M function
In the single cut cycles you position the tool in rapid
traverse, perform linear or circular cuts, machine
chamfers or rounding arcs, and enter M functions.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 145
4.3 Single cut cycles
Rapid traverse positioning
Call the single-cut menu
Select rapid traverse positioning
The tool moves at rapid traverse from the starting point to the target
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Target point
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
BW Angle in the B axis (machine-dependent function)
If more axes are available on your machine, additional
input parameters will be displayed.
146 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Move to the tool change position
Call the single-cut menu
Select rapid traverse positioning
Activate the T-Change approach soft key
The tool moves at rapid traverse from the current position to the tool
change position (siehe Seite 140).
After reaching the tool change position, the control switches to the
tool indicated in "T."
Cycle parameters
G14 Sequence (default: 0)
0: Simultaneous (diagonal path of traverse)
1: First X, then Z direction
2: First Z, then X direction
3: X direction only
4: Z direction only
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 147
4.3 Single cut cycles
Linear machining, longitudinal
Call the single-cut menu
Select longitudinal linear machining
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Linear machining, longitudinal
The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point Z2 at
the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position.
Contour linear, longitudinal (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the longitudinal cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures).
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Move from the starting point to the contour starting point X1
2 Move to contour end point Z2 at the programmed feed rate
3 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
Z2 Contour end point
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
148 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Linear machining, transverse
Call the single-cut menu
Select transverse linear machining
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Linear machining, transverse
The tool moves from the starting point to the contour end point X2 at
the programmed feed rate and remains at the cycle end position.
Contour linear, transverse (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the transverse cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures).
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Move from the starting point to the contour starting point Z1
2 Move to contour end point X2 at the programmed feed rate
3 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
X2 Contour end point
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 149
4.3 Single cut cycles
Linear machining at angle
Call the single-cut menu
Select linear machining at angle
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Linear machining at angle
The CNC PILOT calculates the target position and moves the tool on a
straight line from the starting point to the target position at the
programmed feed rate. When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
150 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Contour linear, at angle (with return)
The CNC PILOT calculates the target position. The tool then
approaches the workpiece, executes the linear cut and returns to the
starting point at the end of cycle (see figures). Cutter radius
compensation is taken into account.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Parameter combinations for defining the target point: see help graphic
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Calculate the target position
2 Move on a linear path from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1, Z1
3 Move to target position at programmed feed rate
4 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Start angle (range: –180° < A < 180°)
G47 Safety clearance (if "With return" is active)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 151
4.3 Single cut cycles
Circular machining
Call the single-cut menu
Select circular machining (counterclockwise)
Select circular machining (clockwise)
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Circular machining
The tool moves on a circular path from the starting point X, Z to the
contour end point X2, Z2 at the programmed feed rate and remains
at the cycle end position.
152 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Contour circular (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, executes the circular cut and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle (see figures). Cutter
radius compensation is taken into account.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the contour starting
point X1, Z1
2 Move in circular arc to contour end point X2, Z2 at the
programmed feed rate
3 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of contour (if "With return" is active)
X2, Z2 Contour end point
R Radius of rounding
G47 Safety clearance (if "With return" is active)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 153
4.3 Single cut cycles
Chamfer
Call the single-cut menu
Select chamfer
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Chamfer
The cycle produces a chamfer that is dimensioned relative to the
corner of the workpiece contour. When the cycle is completed, the
tool remains at the cycle end position.
154 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Contour chamfer (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, machines the chamfer that is
dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle. Cutter radius
compensation is taken into account.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Parameter combinations for defining the chamfer:
I or K (45° chamfer)
I, K
I, A or K, A
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Calculate starting point and end point of chamfer
2 Move paraxially from the starting point to the "chamfer starting
point"
3 Move to end point of chamfer at the programmed feed rate
4 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
A Start angle (range of chamfer: 0°< A < 90°)
I, K Chamfer width (in X, Z)
J Element position (default: 1)—the algebraic sign
determines the cutting direction (see help graphic)
G47 Safety clearance (if "With return" is active)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 155
4.3 Single cut cycles
Rounding arc
Call the single-cut menu
Select rounding
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
Rounding arc
The cycle produces a rounding that is dimensioned relative to the
corner of the workpiece contour. When the cycle is completed, the
tool remains at the cycle end position.
156 Teach-in mode
4.3 Single cut cycles
Contour rounding (with return)
The tool approaches the workpiece, machines the rounding that is
dimensioned relative to the corner of the workpiece contour and
returns to the starting point at the end of cycle. Cutter radius
compensation is taken into account.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle execution if "With return" is active
1 Calculate "starting point and end point of arc"
2 Move paraxially from the starting point to the "arc starting point"
3 Move in circular arc to end point of rounding at programmed feed
rate
4 Retract and return on paraxial path to starting point
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
R Radius of rounding
J Element position (default: 1)—the algebraic sign
determines the cutting direction (see help graphic)
G47 Safety clearance (if "With return" is active)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (if "With return" is active)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 157
4.3 Single cut cycles
M functions
Machine commands (M functions) are not executed until Cycle start
has been pressed. With the M list soft key you can open an overview
of the available M functions. For the meaning of the M functions, refer
to your machine manual.
Call the single-cut menu
Select M function
Enter the number of the M function
Conclude entry
Press Cycle start
Call the single-cut menu
Select M function
Switch M19 on
Enter the stopping angle
Conclude entry
Press Cycle start
M FUNCTION
SPINDLE STOP M19 (SPINDLE POSITIONING)
158 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
4.4 Turning cycles
Cutting and infeed directions for turning cycles
The CNC PILOT automatically determines the cutting and infeed
directions from the cycle parameters.
Basic mode: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode:
current tool position) and contour starting point X1 / contour end
point Z2 determine these directions.
Expanded mode:The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1
and contour end point X2, Z2 determine these directions.
ICP cycles: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode:
current tool position) and contour starting point of the ICP contour
determine these directions.
Tu rn in g c ycl e s Symbol
Turning, longitudinal/transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for
simple contours
Plunge-cutting, longitudinal/
transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for
simple plunge-cut contours
ICP contour-parallel,
longitudinal/transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for
any type of contour (cutting paths
parallel to finished part)
ICP turning, longitudinal/
transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for
any type of contour
Turning cycles rough and finish simple contours in basic
mode and complex contours in expanded mode.
With ICP cutting cycles, you can machine contours
defined with ICP. See “ICP contours” auf Seite 374.
Proportioning of cuts: The CNC PILOT calculates an
infeed that is <=infeed depth P. An "abrasive cut" is
avoided.
Oversizes are considered in "expanded" mode.
Cutter radius compensation: Active
Safety clearance after each cut:
Basic mode: 1 mm
Expanded mode: The safety clearance is set
separately for internal and external machining (see
“List of user parameters” auf Seite 545).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 159
4.4 Turning cycles
Tool position
It is important that you observe the tool positions (starting point X, Z)
before executing any of the turning cycles in expanded mode. The
rules also apply for all cutting and infeed directions as well as for
roughing and finishing (see examples of linear cycles).
The starting point must not be located in the shaded area.
The area to be machined starts at the starting point X, Z if the
tool is positioned before the contour area. The control will otherwise
only machine the contour area defined.
If the starting point X, Z for internal machining is located above
the turning center, only the contour area defined will be machined.
(A = contour starting point X1, Z1; E = contour end point X2, Z2)
Contour elements
Contour elements in turning cycles
Basic mode
Machining a rectangular area
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour start
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour end
Expanded mode
Oblique cuts at contour start and end with
angles > 45°
Expanded mode
One oblique cut (by entering the starting point
of contour, end point of contour and starting
angle)
Expanded mode
Rounding arc
160 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding) at contour end
Basic mode
Machining with descending contour
Basic mode
Oblique cut at contour end
Expanded mode
Rounding in contour valley (in both corners)
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding) at contour start
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding) at contour end
Contour elements in turning cycles
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 161
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut longitudinal
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut longitudinal
The cycle roughs the rectangle described by the starting point and
the contour starting point X1/contour end point Z2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Contour starting point
Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
162 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point X1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on diagonal path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 163
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut transverse
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut transverse
The cycle roughs the rectangle described by the starting point and
the contour starting point Z1/contour end point X2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Contour starting point
X2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
164 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point Z1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on diagonal path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 165
4.4 Turning cycles
Roughing, longitudinal—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut longitudinal
Press the Expanded soft key
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle roughs the area described
by the starting point and the contour starting point X1/contour
end point Z2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversize X, Z
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
166 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
BP:Break duration
BF:Feed duration
WS:Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE:Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point X1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 167
4.4 Turning cycles
Roughing, transverse—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut transverse
Press the Expanded soft key
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle roughs the area described
by the starting point and the contour starting point Z1/contour
end point X2.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversize X, Z
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
168 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
BP:Break duration
BF:Feed duration
WS:Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE:Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
4 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the contour starting point Z1 is reached
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 169
4.4 Turning cycles
Finishing cut, longitudinal
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut longitudinal
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from contour starting point X1
to contour end point Z2.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move in transverse direction from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1
2 Finish first in longitudinal direction, then in transverse direction
3 Return in longitudinal direction to starting point
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to the starting
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1 Contour starting point
Z2 Contour end point
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
170 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Finishing cut, transverse
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut transverse
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from contour starting point Z1
to contour end point X2.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move in longitudinal direction from the starting point to the
contour starting point Z1
2 Finish first in transverse direction, then in longitudinal direction
3 Return in transverse direction to starting point
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to the starting
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
Z1 Contour starting point
X2 Contour end point
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 171
4.4 Turning cycles
Finishing cut, longitudinal—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut longitudinal
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point.
When the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle
end position.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
172 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
WS:Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE:Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
1 Move in transverse direction from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish contour area from contour starting point X1, Z1 to end
point X2, Z2, taking optional contour elements into account
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 173
4.4 Turning cycles
Finishing cut, transverse—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select cut transverse
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point.
When the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle
end position.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
174 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
WS: Angle of the chamfer at the contour starting point (not yet
implemented)
WE: Angle of the chamfer at the contour end point (not yet
implemented)
Cycle run
1 Move in longitudinal direction from the starting point to the
contour starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish contour area from contour starting point X1, Z1 to end
point X2, Z2, taking optional contour elements into account
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 175
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, longitudinal plunge
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, longitudinal
The cycle roughs the area described by the contour starting point,,
contour end point and plunge angle.
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
176 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Plunge-cut at plunge angle A with reduced feed
4 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2,
or to the oblique surface defined by the end angle W
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach again for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point X2 is reached
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 177
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, transverse plunge
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, transverse
The cycle roughs the area described by the contour starting point,,
contour end point and plunge angle.
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
178 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Plunge-cut at plunge angle A with reduced feed
4 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2
or to the oblique surface defined by the end angle W
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach again for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point Z2 is reached
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 179
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, longitudinal plunging—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, longitudinal
Press the Expanded soft key
The cycle roughs the area described by the contour starting point,,
contour end point and plunge angle, taking the oversizes into
consideration.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversize X, Z
R Rounding arc
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
180 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
BP:Break duration
BF:Feed duration
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Plunge-cut at plunge angle A with reduced feed
4 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point X2 is reached
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 181
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, transverse plunging—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, transverse
Press the Expanded soft key
The cycle roughs the area described by the contour starting point,,
contour end point and plunge angle, taking the oversizes into
consideration.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversize X, Z
R Rounding arc
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
182 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
BP:Break duration
BF:Feed duration
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Plunge-cut at plunge angle A with reduced feed
4 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until contour end point Z2 is reached
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 183
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, longitudinal
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point. At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to
the starting point.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
184 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move in transverse direction from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Return to starting point on paraxial path
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 185
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, transverse finishing plunge
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, transverse
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point. At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to
the starting point.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
186 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move in transverse direction from the starting point to the contour
starting point X1, Z1
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Return to starting point on paraxial path
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 187
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, longitudinal
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point. When the cycle is completed, the tool
remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
188 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the contour starting
point X1, Z1
2 Finish the defined contour area, taking optional contour elements
into account
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 189
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, transverse finishing plunge—expanded
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select plunge, transverse
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area from the contour starting point
to the contour end point. When the cycle is completed, the tool
remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
A Plunge angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°; default: 0°)
W End angle—oblique cut at contour end
(range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
190 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the contour starting
point X1, Z1
2 Finish the defined contour area, taking optional contour elements
into account
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 191
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
The cycle roughs the defined area on contour-parallel paths.
The cycle roughs contour parallel depending on the
workpiece blank oversize J and the type of cutting
lines H:
J=0: The area defined by X, Z and the ICP contour,
taking the oversizes into account.
J>0: The area defined by the ICP contour (plus
oversizes) and the workpiece blank oversize J.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Danger of collision!
Workpiece blank oversize J>0: Set the infeed depth P to
the smaller infeed, if the maximum infeed differs for the
longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting
geometry.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth—is determined taking J into account
J=0: P is the maximum infeed depth. The cycle reduces
the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not
possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to
the cutting geometry.
J>0: P is the infeed depth. This infeed is used in the
longitudinal and transverse directions.
H Type of cutting lines—the cycle machines
0: with constant cutting depth
1: with equidistant cutting lines
I, K Oversize X, Z
J Workpiece blank oversize—the cycle machines
J=0: From the current tool position
J>0: The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize
192 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
HR Specify primary machining direction
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel
to Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel to
Z axis)
XA, ZA Starting point of blank (only effective if no blank was
programmed):
XA, ZA not programmed: The workpiece blank contour
is calculated from the tool position and the ICP contour.
XA, ZA programmed: Definition of the corner point of
the workpiece blank.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 193
4.4 Turning cycles
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeed), taking the workpiece
blank oversize J and the type of cutting lines H into account
J=0: The cutting geometry is taken into account. This may result
in the use of different infeeds for the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
J>0: The same infeed is used for both the longitudinal and the
transverse direction.
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning
of cuts
4 Return and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
194 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP contour-parallel, transverse
The cycle roughs the defined area on contour-parallel paths.
The cycle roughs contour parallel depending on the
workpiece blank oversize J and the type of cutting
lines H:
J=0: The area defined by X, Z and the ICP contour,
taking the oversizes into account.
J>0: The area defined by the ICP contour (plus
oversizes) and the workpiece blank oversize J.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Danger of collision!
Workpiece blank oversize J>0: Set the infeed depth P to
the smaller infeed, if the maximum infeed differs for the
longitudinal and transverse directions due to the cutting
geometry.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth—is determined taking J into account
J=0: P is the maximum infeed depth. The cycle reduces
the infeed depth if the programmed infeed is not
possible in the transverse or longitudinal direction due to
the cutting geometry.
J>0: P is the infeed depth. This infeed is used in the
longitudinal and transverse directions.
H Type of cutting lines—the cycle machines
0: with constant cutting depth
1: with equidistant cutting lines
I, K Oversize X, Z
J Workpiece blank oversize—the cycle machines
J=0: From the current tool position
J>0: The area defined by the workpiece blank oversize
HR Specify primary machining direction
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 195
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeed), taking the workpiece
blank oversize J into account
J=0: The cutting geometry is taken into account. This may result
in the use of different infeeds for the longitudinal and transverse
directions.
J>0: The same infeed is used for both the longitudinal and the
transverse direction.
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning
of cuts
4 Return and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
XA, ZA Starting point of blank (only effective if no blank was
programmed):
XA, ZA not programmed: The workpiece blank contour
is calculated from the tool position and the ICP contour.
XA, ZA programmed: Definition of the corner point of
the workpiece blank.
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default:
perpendicular to Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel
to Z axis)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
196 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal finishing
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour. When
the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
DI Axis-parallel oversize X
DK Axis-parallel oversize Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 197
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the ICP contour starting
point
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
198 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse finishing
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP contour-parallel, transverse
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour. When
the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
DI Axis-parallel oversize X
DK Axis-parallel oversize Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 199
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the ICP contour starting
point
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
200 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
ICP cutting, longitudinal
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP cutting, longitudinal
The cycle machines the area defined by the starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversize X, Z
E Plunging behavior:
No input: Automatic feed-rate reduction
E=0: No plunging
E>0: Plunging feed rate in use
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel
to Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default:
perpendicular to Z axis)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 201
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 For sloping contours, plunge into the material at reduced feed rate
4 Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning
of cuts
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until the defined area has been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
XA, ZA Starting point of blank (only effective if no blank was
programmed):
XA, ZA not programmed: The workpiece blank contour
is calculated from the tool position and the ICP contour.
XA, ZA programmed: Definition of the corner point of
the workpiece blank.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
202 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
ICP cut transverse
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP cutting, transverse
The cycle machines the area defined by the starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
The steeper the tool plunges into the material, the
greater the feed rate decrease (max. 50%).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
H Contour smoothing
0: With every cut
1: With the last cut
2: No finishing cut
I, K Oversize X, Z
E Plunging behavior:
No input: Automatic feed-rate reduction
E=0: No plunging
E>0: Plunging feed rate in use
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
XA, ZA Starting point of blank (only effective if no blank was
programmed):
XA, ZA not programmed: The workpiece blank contour
is calculated from the tool position and the ICP contour.
XA, ZA programmed: Definition of the corner point of
the workpiece blank.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 203
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Roughing
Cycle run
1 calculates the proportioning of cuts (infeed)
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass on
paraxial path
3 For sloping contours, plunge into the material at reduced feed rate
4 Machine the workpiece according to the calculated proportioning
of cuts
5 The contour is machined depending on the contour smoothing H
6 Return and approach for next pass
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until the defined area has been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
A Approach angle (reference: Z axis)—(default:
perpendicular to Z axis)
W Departure angle (reference: Z axis)—(default: parallel
to Z axis)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
204 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
ICP longitudinal finishing cut
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP cutting, longitudinal
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour. When
the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
DI Axis-parallel oversize X
DK Axis-parallel oversize Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 205
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the ICP contour starting
point
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
206 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
ICP transverse finishing cut
Select cut, longitudinal/transverse
Select ICP cutting, transverse
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour. When
the cycle is completed, the tool remains at the cycle end position.
The tool plunges with the maximum possible angle,
leaving material remaining.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
DXX Additive compensation number: 1-16 (siehe Seite 140)
G58 Contour-parallel oversize
DI Axis-parallel oversize X
DK Axis-parallel oversize Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 207
4.4 Turning cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Move paraxially from the starting point to the ICP contour starting
point
2 Finish defined contour area
3 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
208 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Examples of turning cycles
Roughing and finishing an outside contour
The shaded area from AP (contour starting point) to EP (contour end
point) is rough-machined with the cycle Cut longitudinal—expanded,
taking oversizes into account. This contour area is to be finished
subsequently with the cycle Finishing cut longitudinal—expanded.
The rounding arc and the oblique cut at the contour end are also
machined in "expanded mode."
The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 and contour end
point X2, Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, external machining and infeed in negative X-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
TO = 1 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 209
4.4 Turning cycles
Roughing and finishing an inside contour
The shaded area from AP (contour starting point) to EP (contour end
point) is rough-machined with the cycle Cut longitudinal—expanded,
taking oversizes into account. This contour area is to be finished
subsequently with the cycle Finishing cut longitudinal—expanded.
The rounding arc and the chamfer at the contour end are also
machined in "expanded mode."
The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 and contour end
point X2, Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, internal machining and infeed in positive X-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for internal machining)
TO = 7 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
210 Teach-in mode
4.4 Turning cycles
Roughing (recess clearance) with plunge cycle
The tool to be used cannot plunge at the required angle of 15°. The
roughing process for the area therefore requires two steps.
First step:
The shaded area from AP (contour starting point) to EP (contour end
point) is rough-machined with the cycle Plunge longitudinal—
expanded, taking oversizes into account.
The starting angle A is defined with 15°, as specified in the
workpiece drawing. From the tool parameters, the CNC PILOT
automatically calculates the maximum plunging angle that can be
achieved with the programmed tool. The resulting contour will not be
complete and will be reworked in the second step.
The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also machined in "expanded
mode."
Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour
starting point X1, Z1 and contour end point X2, Z2. These
parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, external machining and infeed in negative X-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
TO = 1 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 211
4.4 Turning cycles
Second step:
The area that was left out in the first step (shaded area in the figure) is
machined with the cycle Plunge, longitudinal—expanded. Before
executing this step, you must change tools.
The rounding arcs in the contour valley are also machined in "expanded
mode."
The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1 and contour end
point X2, Z2 determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, external machining and infeed in negative X-axis direction.
The parameter for the contour starting point Z1 was determined
during simulation of the first step.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
TO = 3 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
212 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
4.5 Recessing cycles
Cutting and infeed directions for recessing
cycles
The CNC PILOT automatically determines the cutting and infeed
directions from the cycle parameters. The decisive ones are:
Basic mode: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode:
current tool position) and contour starting point X1 / contour end
point Z2
Expanded mode: The parameters for contour starting point X1, Z1
and contour end point X2, Z2.
ICP cycles: The parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode:
current tool position) and starting point of the ICP contour
The recessing cycle group comprises recessing, recess
turning, undercut and parting cycles. Simple contours are
machined in basic mode,, complex contours in
expanded mode. ICP recessing cycles machine contours
defined with ICP (see “ICP contours” auf Seite 374).
Proportioning of cuts: The CNC PILOT calculates a
constant recessing width that is <= P.
Oversizes are considered in "expanded" mode.
Cutter radius compensation is conducted (exception:
Undercut type K).
Recessing cycles Symbol
Recessing radial/axial
Recessing and finishing cycles for
simple contours
ICP recessing, radial/axial
Recessing and finishing cycles for
any contour
Recess turning, radial/axial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for simple contours and any type of
contour
Undercut H
Undercut type H
Undercut K
Undercut type K
Undercut U
Undercut type U
Parting
Cycle for parting the workpiece
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 213
4.5 Recessing cycles
Undercut position
The CNC PILOT determines the position of an undercut from the cycle
parameters for starting point X, Z (Manual mode: current tool
position) and corner point of contour X1, Z1.
Contour forms
Undercuts can only be executed in orthogonal, paraxial
contour corners along the longitudinal axis.
Contour elements in recessing cycles
Basic mode
Machining a rectangular area
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour start
Expanded mode
Oblique cut at contour end
Expanded mode
Rounding arc in both corners of contour valley
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding) at contour start
Expanded mode
Chamfer (or rounding) at contour end
214 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing, radial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for starting point and end point of contour define the
first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 215
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2
4 Remain at this position for dwell time EZ
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined
7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
216 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing, axial
Call the recessing cycles
Select axial recessing
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for starting point and end point of contour define the
first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 217
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2
4 Remain at this position for dwell time EZ
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined
7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
218 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing, radial—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial
Press the Expanded soft key
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for the contour starting point and contour end point
define the first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversize X, Z
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 219
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point X2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
4 Remain at this position for a dwell time of two revolutions
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined
7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
220 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing, axial—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select axial recessing
Press the Expanded soft key
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for the contour starting point and contour end point
define the first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
I, K Oversize X, Z
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 221
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Move at the programmed feed rate to the contour end point Z2,
or if defined, to one of the optional contour elements
4 Remain at this position for a dwell time of two revolutions
5 Retract and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 3 to 5 until the complete recess has been machined
7 Repeat 2 to 6 until all recesses have been machined
8 Return to starting point on paraxial path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
222 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing radial, finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for starting point and end point of contour define the
first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 223
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish first side and the contour valley up to position just before
recess end point
4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
5 Finish the second side and the remainder of the contour valley
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
224 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing axial, finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select axial recessing
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for starting point and end point of contour define the
first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 225
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish first side and the contour valley up to position just before
recess end point
4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
5 Finish the second side and the remainder of the contour valley
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
226 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing radial, finishing—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for the contour starting point and contour end point
define the first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 227
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish first side (taking the optional contour elements into account)
and the contour valley up to position just before recess end point
4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
5 Finish second side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish remainder of contour valley
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been finished
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
228 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recessing axial, finishing—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select axial recessing
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn. The
parameters for the contour starting point and contour end point
define the first recess (position, recess depth and recess width).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 229
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish first side (taking the optional contour elements into account)
and the contour valley up to position just before recess end point
4 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
5 Finish second side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish remainder of contour valley
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been finished
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
230 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recessing radial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial ICP
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn with
the ICP recessing contour. The starting point defines the position of
the first recess.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
I, K Oversize X, Z
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 231
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Machine along the defined contour
4 Return and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete recess has been machined
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
232 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recessing cycles, axial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, axial ICP
The cycle machines the number of recesses defined in number Qn with
the ICP recessing contour. The starting point defines the position of
the first recess.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Recessing width: Infeeds <= P (no input: P = 0.8 * cutting
width of the tool)
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
I, K Oversize X, Z
EZ Dwell time for chip breaking (default: length of time for
two revolutions)
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 233
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions and the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Machine along the defined contour
4 Return and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the complete recess has been machined
6 Repeat 2 to 5 until all recesses have been machined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
234 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recessing, radial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, radial ICP
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn with
the ICP recessing contour. The starting point defines the position of
the first recess.
At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to the starting
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 235
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish the recess
4 Repeat 2 to 3 until all recesses have been machined
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
236 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recessing, axial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recessing, axial ICP
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the number of recesses defined in number Qn with
the ICP recessing contour. The starting point defines the position of
the first recess.
At the end of the cycle, the tool returns to the starting
point.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
Qn Number of recess cycles (default: 1)
DX, DZ Distance to subsequent recess with respect to the
preceding recess
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 237
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Contour
recessing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the recess positions
2 Approach the workpiece for next recess from starting point or from
last recess on paraxial path
3 Finish the recess
4 Repeat 2 to 3 until all recesses have been machined
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
238 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning
The recess turning cycles machine by alternate recessing and
roughing movements. The machining process requires a minimum of
retraction and infeed movements.
To influence recess-turning operations, use the following parameters:
Recessing feed rate O: Feed rate for recessing movement
Turning operation, unidirectional/bidirectional U: You can
perform a unidirectional or bidirectional turning operation.
Offset width B: After the second infeed movement, during the
transition from turning to recessing, the path to be machined is
reduced by the offset width. Each time the system switches from
turning to recessing on this side, the path is reduced by the offset
width—in addition to the previous offset. The total offset is limited
to 80% of the effective cutting width (effective cutting width =
cutting width –2*cutting radius). If required, the CNC PILOT reduces
the programmed offset width. After precutting, the remaining
material is removed with a single cut.
Depth compensation RB: Depending on factors such as workpiece
material or feed rate, the tool tip is displaced during a turning
operation. The resulting infeed error can be compensated with
depth compensation during "finishing, expanded." The depth
compensation factor is usually determined empirically.
These cycles require the use of recess-turning tools.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 239
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, radial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
The cycle clears the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour end point.
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
240 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Recess turning, axial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial
The cycle clears the rectangle described by the starting point and
contour end point.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 241
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
242 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, radial—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
Press the Expanded soft key
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle clears the area described
by the starting point X / contour starting point Z1 and contour
end point (see also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
I, K Oversize X, Z
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 243
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached
6 Machine chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end if defined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
244 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, axial—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial
Press the Expanded soft key
Taking the oversizes into account, the cycle clears the area described
by the contour starting point X1 / starting point Z and contour
end point (see also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
I, K Oversize X, Z
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 245
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until contour end point X2, Z2 is reached
6 Machine chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end if defined
7 Return to starting point on paraxial path
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
246 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, radial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the starting point and
contour end point (see also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238).
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
I, K Oversize X, Z
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 247
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
2 Finish the first side, then finish the contour valley up to position
just before contour end point X2, Z2
3 Move paraxially to the starting point X / end point Z2
4 Finish second side, then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
248 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, axial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the starting point and
contour end point (see also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238).
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
I, K Oversize X, Z
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 249
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
2 Finish the first side, then finish the contour valley up to position
just before contour end point X2, Z2
3 Move paraxially to the starting point Z / end point X2
4 Finish second side, then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
250 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, radial finishing—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the contour starting
point and contour end point (see also “Recess turning” auf
Seite 238).
With oversizes I, K for the workpiece blank, you define
the material to be machined during the finishing cycle. For
this purpose, enter the oversizes for recess turning,
finishing.
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
RB Depth compensation
I, K Oversizes in X and Z are taken into account during finishing
in subsequent machining operations
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 251
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
2 Finish first side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish contour valley up to position just before end point X2/
Z2
3 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
4 Finish second side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Finish chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end, if defined
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z: Oversize before the
finishing operation for calculating the paths for approach/
departure and the finishing area
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
252 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess turning, axial finishing—expanded
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the contour starting
point and contour end point (see also “Recess turning” auf
Seite 238).
With oversizes I, K for the workpiece blank, you define
the material to be machined during the finishing cycle. For
this purpose, enter the oversizes for recess turning,
finishing.
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Contour starting point
X2, Z2 Contour end point
RB Depth compensation
I, K Oversizes in X and Z are taken into account during finishing
in subsequent machining operations
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z
A Start angle (range: 0° <= A < 90°)
W End angle (range: 0° <= W < 90°)
R Rounding arc
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 253
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
By setting the following optional parameters, you can define
additional contour elements:
A:Oblique cut at contour start
W:Oblique cut at contour end
R:Rounding arc (in both corners of contour valley)
B1:Chamfer/Rounding at contour start
B2:Chamfer/Rounding at contour end
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
2 Finish first side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish contour valley up to position just before end point X2/
Z2
3 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
4 Finish second side, taking optional contour elements into account;
then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Finish chamfer/rounding at contour start / contour end, if defined
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
B1, B2 Chamfer/rounding arc (B1 contour start; B2 contour end)
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z: Oversize before the
finishing operation for calculating the paths for approach/
departure and the finishing area
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
254 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recess turning, radial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial
The cycle clears the defined area (see also “Recess turning” auf
Seite 238).
If you are machining
descending contours, define the starting point—not
the starting point of the blank. The cycle clears the
area defined by the starting point and the ICP contour,
taking the oversizes into account.
inclining contours, define the starting point and the
starting point of the blank. The cycle clears the area
defined by the contour starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of blank
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
I, K Oversizes in X and Z are taken into account during finishing
in subsequent machining operations
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional (direction: see help graphic)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
A Starting angle defines the machining area at the contour
starting point
W End angle defines the machining area at the contour end
point
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 255
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
256 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recess turning, axial
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial
The cycle clears the defined area (see also “Recess turning” auf
Seite 238).
If you are machining
descending contours, define only the starting
point—not the contour starting point. The cycle
clears the area defined by the starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.
inclining contours, define the starting point and the
contour starting point. The cycle clears the area
defined by the contour starting point and the ICP
contour, taking the oversizes into account.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of blank
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
P Infeed depth: Maximum infeed depth
ET Recessing depth by which one cut is fed.
O Recessing feed rate (default: active feed rate)
I, K Oversize X, Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
B Offset width (default: 0)
U Unidirectional turning (default: 0)
0: Bidirectional
1: Unidirectional (direction: see help graphic)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
A Starting angle defines the machining area at the contour
starting point
W End angle defines the machining area at the contour end
point
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 257
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from starting point for first pass
3 Execute the first cut (recessing)
4 Machine perpendicularly to recessing direction (turning)
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the defined area has been machined
6 Return to starting point on paraxial path
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
258 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recess turning, radial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, radial ICP
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour (see
also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238). At the end of the cycle, the tool
returns to the starting point.
With oversizes I, K for the workpiece blank, you define
the material to be machined during the finishing cycle. For
this purpose, enter the oversizes for recess turning,
finishing.
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
RB Depth compensation
I, K Oversize X, Z
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
A Starting angle defines the machining area at the contour
starting point
W End angle defines the machining area at the contour end
point
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 259
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point on paraxial path
2 Finish first side and contour area up to position just before end
point X2, Z2
3 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
4 Finish second side, then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
260 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
ICP recess turning, axial finishing
Call the recessing cycles
Select recess turning
Select recess turning, axial ICP
Press the Finishing run soft key
The cycle finishes the contour area defined by the ICP contour (see
also “Recess turning” auf Seite 238). At the end of the cycle, the tool
returns to the starting point.
With oversizes I, K for the workpiece blank, you define
the material to be machined during the finishing cycle. For
this purpose, enter the oversizes for recess turning,
finishing.
With oversizes I, K, you define the material left
remaining after the finishing cycle.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
FK ICP finished part: Name of the contour to be machined
RB Depth compensation
I, K Oversize X, Z
RI, RK Workpiece blank oversizes in X and Z
SX, SZ Cutting limits (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
A Starting angle defines the machining area at the contour
starting point
W End angle defines the machining area at the contour end
point
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 261
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Recess turning
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point on paraxial path
2 Finish first side and contour area up to position just before end
point X2, Z2
3 Approach workpiece for finishing the second side on paraxial path
4 Finish second side, then finish remainder of contour valley
5 Return to starting point on paraxial path
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
262 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Undercutting type H
Call the recessing cycles
Select undercutting H
The contour depends on the parameters defined. If you do not define
an undercut radius R, the oblique cut will be executed up to contour
corner Z1 (tool radius = undercut radius).
If you do not define the plunge angle, it is calculated from the
undercut length and undercut radius. The final point of the undercut
is then located at the contour corner.
The end point of the undercut is determined from the plunge angle in
accordance with Undercut type H.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius (default: no circular element)
W Plunge angle (default: W is calculated)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 263
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Approach the workpiece from the starting point to the safety
clearance
2 Machine undercut according to cycle parameters
3 Return to starting point on diagonal path
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
264 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Undercutting type K
Call the recessing cycles
Select undercut K
This cycle performs only one cut at an angle of 45°. The resulting
contour geometry therefore depends on the tool that is used.
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Pre-position at an angle of 45° to safety clearance above the
contour corner point X1, Z1 at rapid traverse
2 Plunge by undercut depth I
3 Return the tool to the starting point on same path
4 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
I Undercut depth
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 265
4.5 Recessing cycles
Undercutting type U
Call the recessing cycles
Select undercutting U
This cycle machines an Undercut type U and, if programmed,
finishes the adjoining plane surface. The undercut is executed in
several passes if the undercut width is greater than the cutting width
of the tool. If the cutting width of the tool is not defined, the control
assumes that the tool’s cutting width equals the undercut width.
Either a chamfer or a rounding arc can be machined.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
X2 End point on plane surface
I Undercut diameter
K Width of undercut
B Chamfer/Rounding
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
266 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Approach the workpiece from the starting point to the safety
clearance
3 Move at feed rate to undercut diameter I and dwell at this
position (for two revolutions)
4 Retract and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the corner point Z1 is reached
6 After the last pass, finish the adjoining plane surface, starting from
end point X2, if defined
7 Machine chamfer/rounding, if defined
8 Return to starting point on diagonal path
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 267
4.5 Recessing cycles
Parting
Call the recessing cycles
Select parting
The cycle parts the workpiece. If programmed, a chamfer or rounding
arc is machined on the outside diameter.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Corner point of contour
I Diameter for feed-rate reduction
B Chamfer/Rounding
B>0: Radius of rounding
B<0: Width of chamfer
E Reduced feed rate
D Maximum speed
K Retraction distance after parting: Lift off the tool laterally
from the plane surface before retraction
SD Speed limitation from the diameter I up
U Diameter from which the part catcher is activated
(machine-dependent function)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
268 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Parting
Cycle run
1 Approach the workpiece from the starting point to the safety
clearance
2 Cut to depth of chamfer or rounding and machine the chamfer/
rounding if defined
3 Depending on the cycle parameters, move at feed rate to
The turning center, or
The inside diameter (tube) XE
If you have programmed a feed rate reduction, the CNC PILOT
switches to the reduced feed E as soon as the tool reaches the
diameter for feed-rate reduction I.
4 Retract at end face and return to starting point
5 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
The limit to the maximum speed "D" is only effective in the
cycle. After the cycle ends, the speed limit before the
cycle become effective.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 269
4.5 Recessing cycles
Examples of recessing cycles
Recess outside
The machining operation is to be executed first with the Recessing,
radial—expanded cycle, taking oversizes into account. This contour
area is to be finished subsequently with Recessing radial,
finishing—expanded.
The rounding arcs in the corners of the contour valley and the oblique
surfaces at the contour start and end are also machined in "expanded
mode."
Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour
starting point X1, Z1 and contour end point X2, Z2. These
parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, external machining and infeed in negative Z-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
TO = 1 (tool orientation)
SB = 4 (cutting width 4 mm)
270 Teach-in mode
4.5 Recessing cycles
Recess inside
The machining operation is to be executed first with the Recessing,
radial—expanded cycle, taking oversizes into account. This contour
area is to be finished subsequently with Recessing radial,
finishing—expanded.
Since the recessing width P is not entered, the CNC PILOT plunge-
cuts with 80 % of the recessing width of the tool.
In expanded mode, the chamfers are machined at the start/end of the
contour.
Be sure to enter the correct values for the parameters contour
starting point X1, Z1 and contour end point X2, Z2. These
parameters determine the cutting and infeed directions—in this
example, internal machining and infeed in negative Z-axis direction.
Tool data
Turning tool (for internal machining)
TO = 7 (tool orientation)
SB = 2 (cutting width 2 mm)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 271
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Thread position, undercut position
Thread position
The CNC PILOT determines the direction of the thread from the
parameters for starting point Z (or current tool position in Manual
mode) and end point Z2. You select internal or external thread by soft
key.
Undercut position
The CNC PILOT determines the position of an undercut from the
parameters starting point X, Z (Manual mode: current tool position)
and cylinder starting point X1/end point Z2 on plane surface.
The thread and undercut cycles machine single or multi-
start longitudinal and tapered threads, as well as thread
undercuts.
In Cycle mode you can
Repeat the last cut to compensate for tool inaccuracies.
Use the Recut function to rework damaged threads
(only in Manual mode).
Threads are cut with constant rotational speed.
At a cycle stop, the tool retracts with the spindle still
rotating. The cycle then has to be restarted.
Feed rate override is not effective during cycle
execution.
Thread and undercut cycles Symbol
Thread cycle
Longitudinal single or multi-start
thread
Tapered thread
Tapered single or multi-start thread
API thread
Single or multi-start API thread (API:
American Petroleum Institute)
Undercut DIN 76
Thread undercut and thread chamfer
Undercut DIN 509 E
Undercut and cylinder chamfer
Undercut DIN 509 F
Undercut and cylinder chamfer
An undercut can only be machined in a right-angled
paraxial contour corner in the linear axis.
272 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Handwheel superimposition
If your machine features handwheel superimposition, you can overlap
axis movements during thread cutting in a limited area:
X direction: Maximum programmed thread depth depending on the
current cutting depth
Z direction: +/- a fourth of the thread pitch
Machine and control must be specially prepared by the
machine tool builder for use of this cycle. Refer to your
machine manual.
Remember that position changes resulting from
handwheel superimposition are no longer effective after
the cycle end or the "last cut" function.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 273
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Feed angle, thread depth, proportioning of cuts
With some thread cycles, you can indicate the angle of infeed (thread
angle). The figures show the operating sequence at an angle of infeed
of –30° and an angle of infeed of 0°.
The thread depth is programmed for all thread cycles. The CNC PILOT
reduces the cutting depth with each cut (see figures).
Thread run-in / thread run-out
The slide requires a run-in distance to accelerate to the programmed
feed rate before starting the actual thread, and a run-out distance at
the end of the thread to decelerate again.
If the run-in / run-out length is too short, the thread may not attain the
expected quality. In this case, the CNC PILOT displays a warning.
274 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Last cut
After the cycle is finished, the CNC PILOT presents the Last cut
option. In this way you can enter a tool compensation value and repeat
the last thread cut.
Initial situation: The thread cut cycle has been run, and the thread
depth is not correct.
Perform the tool compensation
Press the Last cut soft key
Activate Cycle Start
Check the thread
SEQUENCE OF THE "LAST CUT" FUNCTION
The tool compensation and the last cut can be repeated
as often as necessary until the thread is correct.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 275
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Thread cycle (longitudinal)
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select thread cycle
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This cycle cuts a single external or internal thread with a thread angle
of 30°. Tool infeed is performed in the X axis only.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I; further cuts: reduction
of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: I is calculated from U and F1
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
GV Type of infeed
0: Constant mach. X-section
1: Constant infeed
2: W/ remaining cutting (with distribution of remaining
cuts)
3: W/o remaining cutting (without distribution of
remaining cuts)
4: Same as MANUALplus 4110
5: Constant infeed (same as 4290)
6: Constant with distribute. (same as 4290)
276 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Thread cutting
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Start first pass at starting point Z
3 Move at the feed rate to end point Z2
4 Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass
5 Repeat 3 to 4 until the thread depth U is reached
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
3: Alternately left/right
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
IC Number of cuts—the infeed is calculated from IC and U.
Usable with:
GV=0: Constant chip cross section
GV=1: Constant infeed
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 277
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select thread cycle
Press the Expanded soft key
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This cycle cuts a single or multi-start external or internal thread. The
thread starts at the starting point and ends at the end point of
thread (without a thread run-in or run-out).
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D Threads per unit (default: 1 single-start thread)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I; further cuts: reduction
of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: I is calculated from U and F1
GK Run-out length
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
3: Alternately left/right
278 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Thread cutting
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Start the first thread groove at starting point Z
3 Move at the feed rate to end point Z2
4 Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove
5 Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves
6 Approach for next pass, taking the reduced cutting depth and the
feed angle A into account
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and thread depth U are reached
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
GV Type of infeed
0: Constant mach. X-section
1: Constant infeed
2: W/ remaining cutting (with distribution of remaining
cuts)
3: W/o remaining cutting (without distribution of
remaining cuts)
4: Same as MANUALplus 4110
5: Constant infeed (same as 4290)
6: Constant with distribute. (same as 4290)
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
E Variable thread pitch (e.g. for manufacturing spiral
conveyors or extrusion shafts)
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
IC Number of cuts—the infeed is calculated from IC and U.
Usable with:
GV=0: Constant chip cross section
GV=1: Constant infeed
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 279
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Tapered thread
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select tapered thread
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This cycle cuts a single or multi-start tapered external or internal
thread.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of thread
X2, Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D Threads per unit (default: 1 single-start thread)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I; further cuts: reduction
of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: I is calculated from U and F1
W Taper angle (range: –60° < A < 60°)
GK Run-out length
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
GV Type of infeed
0: Constant mach. X-section
1: Constant infeed
2: W/ remaining cutting (with distribution of remaining
cuts)
3: W/o remaining cutting (without distribution of
remaining cuts)
4: Same as MANUALplus 4110
5: Constant infeed (same as 4290)
6: Constant with distribute. (same as 4290)
280 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Thread cutting
Parameter combinations for the taper angle:
X1/Z1, X2/Z2
X1/Z1, Z2, W
Z1, X2/Z2, W
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Move to thread starting point X1, Z1
3 Move at the feed rate to end point Z2
4
Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove
5 Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves
6 Approach for next pass, taking the reduced cutting depth and the
feed angle A into account
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and thread depth U are reached
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
3: Alternately left/right
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
E Variable thread pitch (e.g. for manufacturing spiral
conveyors or extrusion shafts)
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
IC Number of cuts—the infeed is calculated from IC and U.
Usable with:
GV=0: Constant chip cross section
GV=1: Constant infeed
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 281
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
API thread
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select API thread
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This cycle cuts a single or multi-start API external or internal thread.
The depth of thread decreases at the overrun at the end of thread.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of thread
X2, Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D Threads per unit (default: 1 single-start thread)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I 1st cutting depth
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I—further cuts:
reduction of cutting depth down to J
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
WE Run-out angle (range: 0° <= WE < 90°)
W Taper angle (range: –60° < A < 60°)
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
GV Type of infeed
0: Constant mach. X-section
1: Constant infeed
2: W/ remaining cutting (with distribution of remaining
cuts)
3: W/o remaining cutting (without distribution of
remaining cuts)
4: Same as MANUALplus 4110
5: Constant infeed (same as 4290)
6: Constant with distribute. (same as 4290)
282 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Thread cutting
Parameter combinations for the taper angle:
X1/Z1, X2/Z2
X1/Z1, Z2, W
Z1, X2/Z2, W
Cycle run
1 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
2 Move to thread starting point X1, Z1
3 Move to end point Z2 at programmed feed rate, taking the run-
out angle WE into account
4
Return on paraxial path and approach for next thread groove
5 Repeat 3 and 4 for all thread grooves
6 Approach for next pass, taking the reduced cutting depth and the
feed angle A into account
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until no. threads D and thread depth U are reached
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
GH Type of offset
0: Without offset
1: From left
2: From right
3: Alternately left/right
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 283
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Recut (longitudinal) thread
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select thread cycle
Press the Recut soft key
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This optional cycle reworks a single-start thread. Since you have
already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC PILOT needs to know the
exact position of the thread. Place the cutting tip of the tap drill in the
center of a groove and transfer the positions to the parameters
measured angle and measured position by pressing the Take over
position soft key. From these values the cycle then calculates the
angle of the spindle at the starting point.
This function is available only in manual operation.
Cycle parameters
X1 Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I — further cuts:
reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
C Measured angle
ZC Measured position
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
284 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Cycle run
1 Pre-position threading tool to center of thread groove
2 Use the Take over position soft key to transfer the tool position
and spindle angle to the parameters measured position ZC and
measured angle C
3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove
4 Position the tool to the starting point
5 Start cycle with the Input finished soft key, then press Cycle
Start
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 285
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Recut (longitudinal) thread—expanded
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select thread cycle
Press the Expanded soft key
Press the Recut soft key
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal
thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC
PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
cutting tip of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the
positions to the parameters measured angle and measured position
by pressing the Take over position soft key. From these values the
cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point.
This function is available only in manual operation.
Cycle parameters
X1 Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D No. of gears (threads per unit)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I — further cuts:
reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
GK Run-out length
C Measured angle
ZC Measured position
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
286 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Cycle run
1 Pre-position threading tool to center of thread groove
2 Use the Take over position soft key to transfer the tool position
and spindle angle to the parameters measured position ZC and
measured angle C
3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove
4 Position the tool to the starting point
5 Start cycle with the Input finished soft key, then press Cycle
Start
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 287
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Recut tapered thread
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select tapered thread
Press the Recut soft key
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal
taper thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the
CNC PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
cutting tip of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the
positions to the parameters measured angle and measured position
by pressing the Take over position soft key. From these values the
cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point.
This function is available only in manual operation.
Cycle parameters
X1, Z1 Starting point of thread
X2, Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D No. of gears (threads per unit)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I — further cuts:
reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
W Taper angle (range: –60° < A < 60°)
GK Run-out length
C Measured angle
ZC Measured position
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
288 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Cycle run
1 Pre-position threading tool to center of thread groove
2 Use the Take over position soft key to transfer the tool position
and spindle angle to the parameters measured position ZC and
measured angle C
3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove
4 Position the tool in front of the workpiece
5 Start cycle with the Input finished soft key, then press Cycle
Start
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 289
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Recut API thread
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select API thread
Press the Recut soft key
On: Inside thread
Off: Outside thread
This optional cycle recuts a single or multi-start external or internal API
thread. Since you have already unclamped the workpiece, the CNC
PILOT needs to know the exact position of the thread. Place the
cutting tip of the tap drill in the center of a groove and transfer the
positions to the parameters measured angle and measured position
by pressing the Take over position soft key. From these values the
cycle then calculates the angle of the spindle at the starting point.
This function is available only in manual operation.
Cycle parameters
X1, Z1 Starting point of thread
X2, Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
D No. of gears (threads per unit)
U Thread depth – No input:
Outside thread: U=0.6134*F1
Inside thread: U=–0.5413*F1
I Maximum infeed
I<U: First cut with cutting depth I — further cuts:
reduction of cutting depth
I=U: One cut
No input: Calculation from U and F1
WE Run-out angle (range: 0° <= WE < 90°)
W Taper angle (range: –60° < A < 60°)
C Measured angle
ZC Measured position
A Infeed angle (range: -60° <= A < 60°; default: 30°)
A<0: Infeed on left thread flank
A>0: Infeed on left right flank
R Remaining cutting depth—only with GV=4 (default:
1/100 mm)
290 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Cycle run
1 Pre-position threading tool to center of thread groove
2 Use the Take over position soft key to transfer the tool position
and spindle angle to the parameters measured position ZC and
measured angle C
3 Move the tool manually out of the thread groove
4 Position the tool in front of the workpiece
5 Start cycle with the Input finished soft key, then press Cycle
Start
Q No. no load (number of dry runs)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 291
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Undercut DIN 76
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select Undercut DIN 76.
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 76, a thread
chamfer, then the cylinder, and finishes with the plane surface. The
thread chamfer is executed when you enter at least one of the
parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of cylinder
X2, Z2 End point on plane surface
FP Thread pitch (default: value from standard table)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the thread
chamfer (default: feed rate F)
I Undercut depth (default: value from standard table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius on both sides of the undercut (default:
value from standard table)
P1 Undercut oversize
No input: Machining in one cut
P>0: Division into pre-turning and finish-turning. P is
longitudinal oversize; the transverse oversize is preset
to 0.1 mm
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
292 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
All parameters that you enter will be accounted for—even if the
standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W and
R are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters from
"FP" in the standard table (see “DIN 76—undercut parameters” auf
Seite 615).
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
to the cylinder starting point X1, or
for the thread chamfer
2 Machine thread chamfer, if defined
3 Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut
4 Pre-machine undercut, if defined
5 Machine undercut
6 Finish to end point X2 on plane surface
7 Return
Without return: the tool remains at end point on plane
surface
With return: Retract and return diagonally back to starting point
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
B Cylinder start chamfer (default: no start chamfer)
WB First-cut angle (default: 45 °)
RB First-cut radius (default: no input = no element): Positive
value = first-cut radius, negative value = chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)—evaluated only if "With
return" is active
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 293
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Undercut DIN 509 E
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select undercut DIN 509 E.
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type E, a
cylinder start chamfer, then the adjoining cylinder, and finishes with
the plane surface. You can define a finishing oversize for the area of
the cylinder. The cylinder chamfer is executed when you enter at least
one of the parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of cylinder
X2, Z2 End point on plane surface
U Grinding oversize for the area of the cylinder (default: 0)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the cylinder start
chamfer (default: feed rate F)
I Undercut depth (default: value from standard table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius on both sides of the undercut (default:
value from standard table)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B Cylinder start chamfer (default: no start chamfer)
WB First-cut angle (default: 45 °)
RB First-cut radius (default: no input = no element): Positive
value = first-cut radius, negative value = chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)—evaluated only if "With
return" is active
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
294 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
All parameters that you enter will be accounted for—even if the
standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W and
R are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters from
the cylinder diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 E – undercut
parameters” auf Seite 617).
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
to the cylinder starting point X1, or
for the thread chamfer
2 Machine thread chamfer, if defined
3 Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut
4 Machine undercut
5 Finish to end point X2 on plane surface
6 Return
Without return: the tool remains at end point on plane
surface
With return: Retract and return diagonally back to starting point
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 295
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Undercut DIN 509 F
Call the thread-cutting menu
Select undercut DIN 509 F.
Off: When the cycle is completed, the tool remains
at the cycle end position.
On: Tool returns to the starting point
The cycle machines a thread undercut according to DIN 509 type F, a
cylinder start chamfer, then the adjoining cylinder, and finishes with
the plane surface. You can define a finishing oversize for the area of
the cylinder. The cylinder chamfer is executed when you enter at least
one of the parameters cylinder 1st cut length or 1st cut radius.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
X1, Z1 Starting point of cylinder
X2, Z2 End point on plane surface
U Grinding oversize for the area of the cylinder (default: 0)
E Reduced feed rate for the plunge cut and the cylinder start
chamfer (default: feed rate F)
I Undercut depth (default: value from standard table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius on both sides of the undercut (default:
value from standard table)
P2 Face depth (default: value from standard table)
A Face angle (default: value from standard table)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
B Cylinder start chamfer (default: no start chamfer)
WB First-cut angle (default: 45 °)
RB First-cut radius (default: no input = no element): Positive
value = first-cut radius, negative value = chamfer
G47 Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)—evaluated only if "With
return" is active
296 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Finishing
All parameters that you enter will be accounted for—even if the
standard table prescribes other values. If the parameters I, K, W, R, P
and A are not defined, the CNC PILOT determines these parameters
from the cylinder diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 F –
undercut parameters” auf Seite 617).
Cycle run
1 Approach workpiece from starting point
to the cylinder starting point X1, or
for the thread chamfer
2 Machine thread chamfer, if defined
3 Finish cylinder up to beginning of undercut
4 Machine undercut
5 Finish to end point X2 on plane surface
6 Return
Without return: the tool remains at end point on plane
surface
With return: Retract and return diagonally back to starting point
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 297
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Examples of thread and undercut cycles
External thread and thread undercut
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. The thread
undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer. In the
second step, the thread cycle cuts the thread.
First step
The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer are programmed
in two superimposed input windows.
Tool data
Turning tool (for external machining)
TO = 1 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
Second step
The thread cycle (longitudinal)—expanded cuts the thread. The
cycle parameters define the thread depth and the proportioning of
cuts.
Tool data
Threading tool (for external machining)
TO = 1 (tool orientation)
298 Teach-in mode
4.6 Thread and undercut cycles
Internal thread and thread undercut
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. The thread
undercut DIN 76 produces the undercut and thread chamfer. In the
second step, the thread cycle cuts the thread.
First step
The parameters for the undercut and thread chamfer are programmed
in two superimposed input windows.
The CNC PILOT determines the undercut parameters from the
standard table.
For the thread chamfer, you only need to enter the chamfer width. The
angle of 45° is the default value for the 1st cut angle WB.
Tool data
Turning tool (for internal machining)
TO = 7 (tool orientation)
A = 93° (tool angle)
B = 55° (point angle)
Second step
The thread cycle (longitudinal) cuts the thread. The thread pitch is
defined. The CNC PILOT automatically determines all other values
from the standard table.
You must pay attention to the setting of the Inner thread soft key.
Tool data
Threading tool (for internal machining)
TO = 7 (tool orientation)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 299
4.7 Drilling cycles
4.7 Drilling cycles
Drilling cycles Symbol
Axial/radial drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and
patterns
Axial/radial deep-hole drilling
cycle
For drilling single holes and
patterns
Axial/radial tapping cycle
For drilling single holes and
patterns
Thread milling
For milling threads in existing holes
The drilling cycles allow you to machine axial and radial
holes.
For pattern machining, see “Drilling and milling patterns”
auf Seite 350.
300 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Drilling, axial
Select drilling
Select drilling, axial
This cycle drills a hole on the face of the workpiece.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
Z1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from Z)
Z2 End point drill (end point of hole)
E Dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole
(default:0)
D Retraction type
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
AB Drilling lengths (default: 0)
V Through drilling variants (default: 0)
0: No feed rate reduction
1: Feed rate reduction at the end of the hole
2: Feed rate reduction at the beginning of the hole
3: Feed rate reduction at the beginning and end of the
hole
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation
0: Active
1: Inactive
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 301
4.7 Drilling cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Twist drill: Drilling
Indexable insert drill: Predrilling
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point Z1
3 If defined, spot drill at reduced feed rate
4 Depending on through drilling variants V:
Through-drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point Z2
No through drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point Z2
– Remain at end of hole for dwell time E, if defined
5 Retract
If Z1 is programmed, to hole starting point Z1
If Z1 is not programmed, to starting point Z
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
If "AB" and "V" are programmed, the feed rate is reduced
by 50% during both pre-drilling and through-boring.
The CNC PILOT uses the tool parameter driven tool to
determine whether the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool.
302 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Drilling, radial
Select drilling
Select drilling, radial
This cycle drills a hole on the lateral surface of the workpiece.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from X)
X2 End point drill (end point of hole)
E Dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole
(default:0)
D Retraction type
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
AB Drilling lengths (default: 0)
V Through drilling variants (default: 0)
0: No feed rate reduction
1: Feed rate reduction at the end of the hole
2: Feed rate reduction at the beginning of the hole
3: Feed rate reduction at the beginning and end of the
hole
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 303
4.7 Drilling cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Twist drill: Drilling
Indexable insert drill: Predrilling
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point X1
3 If defined, spot drill at reduced feed rate
4 Depending on through drilling variants V:
Through-drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position X2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point X2
No through drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point X2
– Remain at end of hole for dwell time E, if defined
5 Retract
If X1 is programmed, to hole starting point X1
If X1 is not programmed, to starting point X
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
If "AB" and "V" are programmed, the feed rate is reduced
by 50% during both pre-drilling and through-boring.
304 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Deep-hole drilling, axial
Select drilling
Select deep-hole drilling, axial
The cycle produces a bore hole on the face in several passes. After
each pass, the drill retracts and, after a dwell time, advances again to
the first pecking depth, minus the safety clearance. You define the
first pass with 1st hole depth P. The drilling depth is reduced with
each subsequent pass by the reduction value, however, without
falling below the minimum drilling depth.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
Z1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from Z)
Z2 End point drill (end point of hole)
P 1st drilling depth (default: hole will be drilled in one pass)
IB Hole depth reduction value (default: 0)
JB Minimum hole depth (default: 1/10 of P)
B Retraction length (default: retract to starting point of hole)
E Dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole
(default:0)
D Retraction—retraction speed and infeed within the hole
(default: 0)
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
AB Drilling lengths (default: 0)
V Through drilling variants (default: 0)
0: No feed rate reduction
1: Feed rate reduction at the end of the hole
2: Feed rate reduction at the beginning of the hole
3: Feed rate reduction at the beginning and end of the
hole
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation
0: Active
1: Inactive
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 305
4.7 Drilling cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Twist drill: Drilling
Indexable insert drill: Predrilling
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
If "AB" and "V" are programmed, the feed rate is reduced
by 50 % during both pre-drilling and through-boring.
The CNC PILOT uses the tool parameter driven tool to
determine whether the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool.
306 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point Z1
3 First pass (pecking depth: P)—drill with reduced feed rate, if
defined
4 Retract by retraction length B—or to the hole starting point
and advance again to last pecking depth minus safety clearance
5 Next pass (pecking depth: "last depth – IB" or JB)
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until hole end point Z2 is reached
7 Last drilling pass—depending on through drilling variants V:
Through-drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position Z2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point Z2
No through drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point Z2
– Remain at end of hole for dwell time E, if defined
8 Retract
If Z1 is programmed, to hole starting point Z1
If Z1 is not programmed, to starting point Z
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 307
4.7 Drilling cycles
Deep-hole drilling, radial
Select drilling
Select deep-hole drilling, radial
The cycle produces a bore hole on the lateral surface in several
passes. After each pass, the drill retracts and, after a dwell time,
advances again to the first pecking depth, minus the safety clearance.
You define the first pass with 1st hole depth P. The drilling depth is
reduced with each subsequent pass by the reduction value,
however, without falling below the minimum drilling depth.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from X)
X2 End point drill (end point of hole)
P 1st drilling depth (default: hole will be drilled in one pass)
IB Hole depth reduction value (default: 0)
JB Minimum hole depth (default: 1/10 of P)
B Retraction length (default: retract to starting point of hole)
E Dwell time for chip breaking at end of hole
(default:0)
D Retraction—retraction speed and infeed within the hole
(default: 0)
0: Rapid traverse
1: Feed rate
AB Drilling lengths (default: 0)
V Through drilling variants (default: 0)
0: No feed rate reduction
1: Feed rate reduction at the end of the hole
2: Feed rate reduction at the beginning of the hole
3: Feed rate reduction at the beginning and end of the
hole
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
BP Break duration: Time span for interruption of the feed. The
chip is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
BF Break duration: Time interval until the next break. The chip
is broken by the (intermittent) interruption of the feed.
308 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Twist drill: Drilling
Indexable insert drill: Predrilling
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point X1
3 First pass (pecking depth: P)—drill with reduced feed rate, if
defined
4 Retract by retraction length B—or to the hole starting point
and advance again to last pecking depth minus safety clearance
5 Next pass (pecking depth: "last depth – IB" or JB)
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until hole end point X2 is reached
7 Last drilling pass—depending on through drilling variants V:
Through-drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to position X2 – AB
– Drill at reduced feed rate to hole end point X2
No through drilling reduction:
– Drill at programmed feed rate to hole end point X2
– Remain at end of hole for dwell time E, if defined
8 Retract
If X1 is programmed, to hole starting point X1
If X1 is not programmed, to starting point X
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
If "AB" and "V" are programmed, the feed rate is reduced
by 50 % during both pre-drilling and through-boring.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 309
4.7 Drilling cycles
Tapping, axial
Select drilling
Select tapping, axial
This cycle is used to tap a thread on the face of a workpiece.
Meaning of the retraction length: Use this parameter for floating tap
holders. The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the
thread depth, the programmed pitch, and the retraction length. The
nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap. During
tapping, the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length.
With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Z1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from Z)
Z2 End point drill (end point of hole)
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate) (default: feed rate from tool
definition)
B Run-in length to reach the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate (default: 2 * thread pitch F1)
SR Return speed for enabling rapid retraction (default: same
spindle speed as for tapping)
L
Retraction length when using floating tap holders (default: 0)
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G60 Deactivate the protective zone for the drilling operation
0: Active
1: Inactive
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
SP Chip breaking depth
SI Retraction distance
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
310 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Tapping
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point Z1
3 Tap thread to hole end point Z2
4 Retract at return speed SR
If Z1 is programmed, to hole starting point Z1
If Z1 is not programmed, to starting point Z
5 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
The CNC PILOT uses the tool parameter driven tool to
determine whether the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate apply to the spindle or the driven tool.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 311
4.7 Drilling cycles
Tapping, radial
Select drilling
Select tapping, radial
This cycle is used to tap a thread on the lateral surface of a workpiece.
Meaning of the retraction length: Use this parameter for floating tap
holders. The cycle calculates a new nominal pitch on the basis of the
thread depth, the programmed pitch, and the retraction length. The
nominal pitch is somewhat smaller than the pitch of the tap. During
tapping, the drill is pulled away from the chuck by the retraction length.
With this method you can achieve higher service life from the taps.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
X1 Start point drill (starting point of hole; default: drilling starts
from X)
X2 End point drill (end point of hole)
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate) (default: feed rate from tool
definition)
B Run-in length to reach the programmed spindle speed and
feed rate (default: 2 * thread pitch F1)
SR Return speed for enabling rapid retraction (default: same
spindle speed as for tapping)
L
Retraction length when using floating tap holders (default: 0)
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G60 Protection zone—deactivates the protection zone for the
drilling process
0: Active
1: Inactive
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
SP Chip breaking depth
SI Retraction distance
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
312 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Tapping
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 If defined, move at rapid traverse to hole starting point X1
3 Tap thread to hole end point X2
4 Retract at return speed SR
If X1 is programmed, to hole starting point X1
If X1 is not programmed, to starting point X
5 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 313
4.7 Drilling cycles
Thread milling, axial
Select drilling
Select thread milling, axial
The cycle mills a thread in existing holes.
Use threading tools for this cycle.
Danger of collision!
Be sure to consider the hole diameter and the diameter of
the milling cutter when programming approach radius R.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Z1 Starting point of thread (default: drilling starts from Z)
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch (= feed rate)
J Direction of thread
0: Right
1: Left
I Thread diameter
R Approach radius (default: milling diameter)/2)
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
V Milling method
0: The thread is milled in a 360-degree helix
1: The thread is milled in several helical paths (single-
point tool)
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
314 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
Cycle run
1 Position spindle to spindle angle C (in Manual mode, machining
starts from the current spindle angle)
2 Position the tool to thread end point Z2 (milling floor) inside the
hole
3 Approach on approach radius R
4 Mill the thread in a rotation of 360°, while advancing by the thread
pitch F1
5 Retract the tool and return it to the starting point
6 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 315
4.7 Drilling cycles
Examples of drilling cycles
Centric drilling and tapping
The machining operation is to be performed in two steps. In the first
step, the Drilling, axial cycle drills the hole. In the second, the
Tapping, axial cycle taps the thread.
The drill is positioned at the safety clearance to the workpiece surface
(starting point X, Z). The hole starting point Z1 is therefore not
programmed. In the parameters "AB" and "V," you program a feed
reduction.
The thread pitch is not programmed. The CNC PILOT uses the thread
pitch of the tool. The return speed SR ensures that the tool is
retracted quickly.
Tool data (drill)
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
I = 8.2 (drilling diameter)
B = 118 (point angle)
H = 0 (the tool is not a driven tool)
Tool data (tap)
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
I = 10 (thread diameter M10)
F = 1.5 (thread pitch)
H = 0 (the tool is not a driven tool)
316 Teach-in mode
4.7 Drilling cycles
Deep-hole drilling
A hole is to be bored through the workpiece outside the turning center
with the cycle Deep-hole drilling, axial. This machining operation
requires a traversable spindle and driven tools.
1st hole depth P and the depth reduction value IB define the
individual passes, and the minimum hole depth JB limits the hole
reduction value.
As the retraction length B is not defined, the drill therefore retracts
to the starting point after each pass, remains there for the
programmed dwell time, and then advances again to the safety
clearance for the next pass.
Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole, the hole
end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way
through the workpiece before it reaches the end point.
The parameters "AB" and "V" define a feed reduction for both pre-
drilling and through-boring.
Tool data
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
I = 12 (drilling diameter)
B = 118 (point angle)
H = 1 (the tool is a driven tool)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 317
4.8 Milling cycles
4.8 Milling cycles
In Teach-in mode these cycles include the activation/deactivation of
the C axis and the positioning of the spindle.
In Manual mode you can activate the C axis with Rapid traverse
positioning and position the spindle before the actual milling cycle.
The milling cycles then automatically deactivate the C axis.
Milling cycles Symbol
Rapid traverse positioning
Activate C axis; position tool and
spindle
Slot axial/radial
For milling single slots or slot
patterns
Figure axial/radial
For milling a single figure
Radial/axial ICP contour
For milling single ICP contours or
contour patterns
Face milling
For milling surfaces or polygons
Helical-slot milling, radial
For milling a helical slot
Engraving, axial/radial
Engraves characters and character
strings
Milling cycles are used to machine axial and radial slots,
contours, pockets, surfaces and polygons.
For pattern machining, see “Drilling and milling patterns”
auf Seite 350.
318 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Rapid positioning milling
Select milling
Select rapid traverse positioning
The cycle activates the C axis and positions the spindle (C axis) and the
tool.
Cycle run
1 Activate C axis
2 Insert the current tool
3 Position the tool at rapid traverse to the target point X2, Z2 and
the end angle C2
Rapid traverse positioning is only required in Manual
mode.
The C axis is deactivated by a subsequent manual
milling cycle.
Cycle parameters
X2, Z2 Target point
C2 End angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 319
4.8 Milling cycles
Slot, axial
Select milling
Select slot, axial
This cycle mills a slot on the face of the workpiece. The slot width
equals the diameter of the milling cutter.
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot:
X1, C1
L, A1
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Slot target point in X (diameter value)
C1 Angle of slot target point (default: spindle angle C)
L Slot length
A1 Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Z1 Milling top edge (default: starting point Z)
Z2 Milling floor
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
320 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
3 Approach at infeed rate FZ
4 Machine to end point of slot
5 Approach at infeed rate FZ
6 Machine to starting point of slot
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
8 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 321
4.8 Milling cycles
Figure, axial
Select milling
Select figure, axial
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills one of the following
contours or roughs/finishes a pocket on the face:
Rectangle (Q=4, L<>B)
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Circle (Q=0, RE>0, L and B: No input)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 oder Q>4, L<>0)
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
X1 Diameter of figure center
C1 Angle of figure center (default: spindle angle C)
Q Number of edges (default: 0)
Q=0: Circle
Q=4: Rectangle, square
Q=3: Triangle
Q>4: Polygon
L Edge length
Rectangle: Rectangle length
Square, polygon: Edge length
Polygon: L<0 inscribed circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Rectangle width
Rectangle: Rectangle width
Square: L=B
Polygon, circle: No input
RE Rounding radius (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: rounding radius
Circle: circle radius
RB Retraction plane
A Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: position of figure
Circle: No input
Z1 Milling top edge (default: starting point Z)
P2 Milling depth
322 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Cycle parameters (second input window)
I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
O Roughing or finishing—only for pocket milling
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1)
U=0 or no input: contour milling
U>0: Pocket milling—minimum overlap of milling paths
= U*milling diameter
JK Contour milling (input is evaluated only for contour milling)
0: On the contour
1: Within the contour
2: Outside the contour
JT Pocket milling (input is evaluated only for pocket milling)
0: From the inside out (from the inside towards the
outside)
1: From the outside in (from the outside towards the
inside)
R Approach radius (default: 0)
R=0: Contour element is approached directly; infeed to
starting point above the milling plane—then vertical
plunge
R>0: Tool moves on approaching/departing arc that
connects tangentially to the contour element
R<0 for inside corners: Tool moves on approaching/
departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour
element
R<0 for outside corners: Length of linear approaching/
departing element; contour element is approached/
departed tangentially
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 323
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
Cycle parameters (third input window)
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
Notes on parameters/functions:
Machining of contour or pocket: Defined with overlap
factor U.
Milling direction: Depends on definition of cutting
direction H and the direction of tool rotation (siehe
„Milling direction for contour milling” auf Seite 342).
Milling cutter radius compensation: effective (except
for contour milling with J=0).
Approach and departure: For closed contours, the
starting point of the first element (in rectangles, the
longer element) is the point of approach and departure.
The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to
approach radius R.
Contour milling JK defines whether the milling cutter
is to machine on the contour (center of milling cutter on
the contour) or on the inside/outside of the contour.
Pocket milling – roughing (O=0): Use JT to define
whether a pocket is machined from the inside toward
the outside, or vice versa.
Pocket milling—finishing (O=1): First, the edge of the
pocket is machined; then the pocket floor is machined.
With JT you define whether a pocket floor is to be
finished from the inside towards the outside, or vice
versa.
324 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
Contour milling:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Mill the first plane
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—roughing:
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Depending on pocket milling JT, machine the milling plane
either from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—finishing:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Finish-machine the edge of the pocket—one working plane after
the other
5 Depending on pocket milling JT, finish the pocket floor either
from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
6 Finish-machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate
All versions:
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 325
4.8 Milling cycles
ICP contour, axial
Select milling
Select ICP contour, axial
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills a contour or roughs/
finishes a pocket on the face.
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
Z1 Milling top edge (default: starting point Z)
P2 Milling depth
I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
FK ICP contour number
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Cycle parameters (second input window)
O Roughing or finishing—only for pocket milling
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
2: Deburring
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1)
U=0 or no input: contour milling
U>0: Pocket milling—minimum overlap of milling paths
= U*milling diameter
JK Contour milling (input is evaluated only for contour milling)
0: On the contour
1: Within the contour
2: Outside the contour
326 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
JT Pocket milling (input is evaluated only for pocket milling)
0: From the inside out (from the inside towards the
outside)
1: From the outside in (from the outside towards the
inside)
R Approach radius (default: 0)
R=0: Contour element is approached directly; infeed to
starting point above the milling plane—then vertical
plunge
R>0: Tool moves on approaching/departing arc that
connects tangentially to the contour element
R<0 for inside corners: Tool moves on approaching/
departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour
element
R<0 for outside corners: Length of linear approaching/
departing element; contour element is approached/
departed tangentially
RB Retraction plane
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
BG Chamfer width for deburring
JG Preparation diameter
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
Notes on parameters/functions:
Machining of contour or pocket: Defined with overlap
factor U.
Milling direction: Depends on definition of cutting
direction H and the direction of tool rotation (siehe
„Milling direction for contour milling” auf Seite 342).
Milling cutter radius compensation: effective (except
for contour milling with JK=0).
Approach and departure: For closed contours, the
starting point of the first element (in rectangles, the
longer element) is the point of approach and departure.
The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to
approach radius R.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 327
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
Contour milling:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Mill the first plane
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—roughing:
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Depending on pocket milling JT, machine the milling plane
either from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—finishing:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Finish-machine the edge of the pocket—one working plane after
the other
5 Depending on pocket milling JT, finish the pocket floor either
from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
6 Finish-machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate
All versions:
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Notes on parameters/functions:
Contour milling JK defines whether the milling cutter
is to machine on the contour (center of milling cutter on
the contour) or on the inside/outside of the contour.
Open contours are machined in direction of contour
definition. JK defines whether to move to the left or right
of the contour.
Pocket milling – roughing (O=0): Use JT to define
whether a pocket is machined from the inside toward
the outside, or vice versa.
Pocket milling—finishing (O=1): First, the edge of the
pocket is machined; then the pocket floor is machined.
With JT you define whether a pocket floor is to be
finished from the inside towards the outside, or vice
versa.
328 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Face milling
Select milling
Select the "Face milling" cycle
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills the following contours
on the face.
One or two surfaces (Q=1 or Q=2, B>0)
Rectangle (Q=4, L<>B)
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 oder Q>4, L<>0)
Circle (Q=0, RE>0, L and B: No input)
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Diameter of figure center
C1 Angle of figure center (default: spindle angle C)
Z1 Milling top edge (default: starting point Z)
Z2 Milling floor
Q Number of edges
Q=0: Circle
Q=1: One surface
Q=2: Two surfaces offset by 180°
Q=3: Triangle
Q=4: Rectangle, square
Q>4: Polygon
L Edge length
Rectangle: Rectangle length
Square, polygon: Edge length
Polygon: L<0: Inscribed circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Width across flats:
For Q=1, Q=2: Remaining thickness (remaining
material)
Rectangle: Rectangle width
Square, polygon (Q>=4): Width across flats (use only for
even number of surfaces; program "B" as an alternative
to "L")
Circle: No input
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 329
4.8 Milling cycles
RE Rounding radius (default: 0)
Polygon (Q>2): Rounding radius
Circle (Q=0): circle radius
A Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Polygon (Q>2): Position of figure
Circle: No input
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Cycle parameters (second input window)
I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
X2 Limit diameter
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1; default 0.5)
O Roughing or finishing
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
330 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
Roughing
4 Machine the milling plane, taking milling direction J
(unidirectional or bidirectional) into account
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached
Finishing:
4 Finish-machine the edge of the island—one working plane after
the other
5 Finish-machine the floor from the outside towards the inside
All versions:
6 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 331
4.8 Milling cycles
Slot, radial
Select milling
Select "Slot, radial"
This cycle mills a slot on the lateral surface. The slot width equals the
diameter of the milling cutter.
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
Parameter combinations for the position and orientation of the slot:
X1, C1
L, A1
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
Z1 Slot target point
C1 Angle of slot target point (default: spindle angle C)
L Slot length
A Angle to Z axis (default: 0)
X1 Milling top edge (diameter)—(default: starting point X)
X2 Milling floor
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
332 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts
3 Approach at infeed rate FZ
4 Mill to slot end point at programmed feed rate
5 Approach at infeed rate FZ
6 Machine to starting point of slot
7 Repeat 3 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
8 Position to starting point X and deactivate C axis
9 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 333
4.8 Milling cycles
Figure, radial
Select milling
Select "Figure, radial"
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills one of the following
contours or roughs/finishes a pocket on the lateral surface:
Rectangle (Q=4, L<>B)
Square (Q=4, L=B)
Circle (Q=0, RE>0, L and B: No input)
Triangle or polygon (Q=3 or Q>4, L>0 or L<0)
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Z1 Figure center
C1 Angle of figure center (default: spindle angle C)
Q Number of edges (default: 0)
Q=0: Circle
Q=4: Rectangle, square
Q=3: Triangle
Q>4: Polygon
L Edge length
Rectangle: Rectangle length
Square, polygon: Edge length
Polygon: L<0 inscribed circle diameter
Circle: No input
B Rectangle width
Rectangle: Rectangle width
Square: L=B
Polygon, circle: No input
RE Rounding radius (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: rounding radius
Circle: circle radius
A Angle to X axis (default: 0)
Rectangle, square, polygon: position of figure
Circle: No input
X1 Milling top edge (diameter)—(default: starting point X)
P2 Milling depth
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
334 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Cycle parameters (second input window)
I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
O Roughing or finishing—only for pocket milling
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1)
No input: Contour milling
U>0: Pocket milling—minimum overlap of milling paths
= U*milling diameter
JK Contour milling (input is evaluated only for contour milling)
0: On the contour
1: Within the contour
2: Outside the contour
JT Pocket milling (input is evaluated only for pocket milling)
0: From the inside out (from the inside towards the
outside)
1: From the outside in (from the outside towards the
inside)
R Radius of approaching/departing arc (default: 0)
R=0: Contour element is approached directly; infeed to
starting point above the milling plane—then vertical
plunge
R>0: Tool moves on approaching/departing arc that
connects tangentially to the contour element
R<0 for inside corners: Tool moves on approaching/
departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour
element
R<0 for outside corners: Length of linear approaching/
departing element; contour element is approached/
departed tangentially
RB Retraction plane
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 335
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
Cycle parameters (third input window)
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
Notes on parameters/functions:
Machining of contour or pocket: defined with overlap
factor U.
Milling direction: depends on definition of cutting
direction H and the direction of tool rotation (siehe
„Milling direction for contour milling” auf Seite 342).
Milling cutter radius compensation: effective (except
for contour milling with JK=0).
Approach and departure: For closed contours, the
starting point of the first element (in rectangles, the
longer element) is the point of approach and departure.
The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to
approach radius R.
Contour milling JK defines whether the milling cutter
is to machine on the contour (center of milling cutter on
the contour) or on the inside/outside of the contour.
Pocket milling – roughing (O=0): Use JT to define
whether a pocket is machined from the inside toward
the outside, or vice versa.
Pocket milling—finishing (O=1): First, the edge of the
pocket is machined; then the pocket floor is machined.
With JT you define whether a pocket floor is to be
finished from the inside towards the outside, or vice
versa.
336 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
Contour milling:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Mill the first plane
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—roughing:
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Depending on JT, machine a milling plane either from the inside
towards the outside, or vice versa
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—finishing:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Finish-machine the edge of the pocket—one working plane after
the other
5 Depending on JT, finish the pocket floor either from the inside
towards the outside, or vice versa
6 Finish-machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate
All versions:
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 337
4.8 Milling cycles
ICP contour, radial
Select milling
Select ICP contour, radial
Depending on the parameters, the cycle mills a contour or roughs/
finishes a pocket on the lateral surface.
Cycle parameters (first input window)
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Milling top edge (diameter)—(default: starting point X)
P2 Milling depth
I Contour-parallel oversize
K Infeed-direction oversize
P Infeed depth (default: total depth of one infeed)
FZ Approach feed (infeed rate) (default: active feed rate)
E Reduced feed rate for circular elements (default: active
feed rate)
FK ICP contour number
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
Cycle parameters (second input window)
O Roughing or finishing—only for pocket milling
0: Roughing
1: Finishing
2: Deburring
H Cutting direction
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
U Overlap factor (range: 0 < U < 1)
No input: Contour milling
U>0: Pocket milling—minimum overlap of milling paths
= U*milling diameter
JK Contour milling (input is evaluated only for contour milling)
0: On the contour
1: Within the contour
2: Outside the contour
338 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
JT Pocket milling (input is evaluated only for pocket milling)
0: From the inside out (from the inside towards the
outside)
1: From the outside in (from the outside towards the
inside)
R Radius of approaching/departing arc (default: 0)
R=0: Contour element is approached directly; infeed to
starting point above the milling plane—then vertical
plunge
R>0: Tool moves on approaching/departing arc that
connects tangentially to the contour element
R<0 for inside corners: Tool moves on approaching/
departing arc that connects tangentially to the contour
element
R<0 for outside corners: Length of linear approaching/
departing element; contour element is approached/
departed tangentially
RB Retraction plane
SCI Safety clearance in the working plane
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
BG Chamfer width for deburring
JG Preparation diameter
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
Notes on parameters/functions:
Machining of contour or pocket: defined with overlap
factor U.
Milling direction: depends on definition of cutting
direction H and the direction of tool rotation (siehe
„Milling direction for contour milling” auf Seite 342).
Milling cutter radius compensation: effective (except
for contour milling with JK=0).
Approach and departure: For closed contours, the
starting point of the first element (in rectangles, the
longer element) is the point of approach and departure.
The tool approaches directly or on an arc according to
approach radius R.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 339
4.8 Milling cycles
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate the proportioning of cuts (infeeds to the milling planes,
infeeds in the milling planes)
Contour milling:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Mill the first plane
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 5 to 6 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—roughing:
3 Move to the safety clearance and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Depending on pocket milling JT, machine the milling plane
either from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
5 Plunge to the next milling plane
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the milling depth is reached
Pocket milling—finishing:
3 Depending on the approach radius R, approach the workpiece
and plunge to the first milling plane
4 Finish-machine the edge of the pocket—one working plane after
the other
5 Depending on pocket milling JT, finish the pocket floor either
from the inside towards the outside, or vice versa
6 Finish-machine the pocket at the programmed feed rate
All versions:
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
Notes on parameters/functions:
Contour milling JK defines whether the milling cutter
is to machine on the contour (center of milling cutter on
the contour) or on the inside/outside of the contour.
Open contours are machined in direction of contour
definition. JK defines whether to move to the left or right
of the contour.
Pocket milling – roughing (O=0): Use JT to define
whether a pocket is machined from the inside toward
the outside, or vice versa.
Pocket milling—finishing (O=1): First, the edge of the
pocket is machined; then the pocket floor is machined.
With JT you define whether a pocket floor is to be
finished from the inside towards the outside, or vice
versa.
340 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Helical-slot milling, radial
Select milling
Select helical-slot milling, radial
The cycle mills a helical slot from the thread starting point to the
thread end point. The starting angle defines the starting position
for the slot. The slot width equals the diameter of the milling cutter.
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)
X1 Thread diameter
C1 Starting angle
Z1 Starting point of thread
Z2 End point of thread
F1 Thread pitch
F1 positive: Right-hand thread
F1 negative: Left-hand thread
U Thread depth
I Maximum infeed. The infeed movements are reduced
down to >= 0.5 mm according to the following calculation.
Following that, each infeed movement will amount to
0.5 mm.
Infeed 1:"l"
Infeed n: I * (1 – (n–1) * E)
E Cutting depth reduction
P Run-in length (ramp at the beginning of the slot)
K Run-out length (ramp at the end of the slot)
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
D No. of gears (threads per unit)
SCK Safety clearance in infeed direction (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 341
4.8 Milling cycles
Type of machining for technology database access: Milling
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse (only in Teach-in mode)
2 Calculate current infeed
3 Position the tool for the first pass
4 Machine up to the thread end point Z2 at the programmed feed
rate, taking the ramps at the beginning and end of the slot into
account
5 Return on paraxial path and approach for next pass
6 Repeat 4 to 5 until the slot depth is reached
7 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the
cycle (machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
342 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Milling direction for contour milling
Milling direction for contour milling
Cycle type Cutting direction Direction of tool rotation MCRC Execution
Inside (JK=1) Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx03 Right
Inside Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx04 Left
Inside Climb milling (H=1) Mx03 Left
Inside Climb milling (H=1) Mx04 Right
Outside (JK=2) Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx03 Right
Outside Up-cut milling (H=0) Mx04 Left
Outside Climb milling (H=1) Mx03 Left
Outside Climb milling (H=1) Mx04 Right
Right (JK=2) For open contours without
function. Machining in
direction of contour
definition
Without effect Right
Left (JK=1) For open contours without
function. Machining in
direction of contour
definition
Without effect Left
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 343
4.8 Milling cycles
Milling direction for pocket milling
Milling direction for pocket milling
Machining Cutting direction Machining direction
Direction of tool
rotation
Execution
Roughing
Finishing
Up-cut milling (H=0) From inside toward the outside
(JT=0)
Mx03
Roughing
Finishing
Up-cut milling (H=0) From inside toward the outside
(JT=0)
Mx04
Roughing Climb milling (H=0) From outside toward inside
(JT=1)
Mx03
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=0) From outside toward inside
(JT=1)
Mx04
Roughing
Finishing
Climb milling (H=1) From inside toward the outside
(JT=0)
Mx03
Roughing
Finishing
Climb milling (H=1) From inside toward the outside
(JT=0)
Mx04
Roughing Climb milling (H=1) From outside toward inside
(JT=1)
Mx03
Roughing Up-cut milling (H=1) From outside toward inside
(JT=1)
Mx04
344 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Example of milling cycle
Milling on the face
In this example, a pocket is milled. The milling example in "9.8 ICP
Example, Milling Cycle" illustrates the complete machining process on
the face, including contour definition.
The machining process is performed with the cycle ICP contour,
axial. To describe a contour, define the basic contour first. Then
superimpose the rounding arcs.
Tool data (milling cutter)
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
I = 8 (milling diameter)
K = 4 (number of teeth)
TF = 0.025 (feed per tooth)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 345
4.8 Milling cycles
Engraving, axial
The "Radial engraving" cycle engraves character strings in linear or
polar layout on the face of the workpiece. For character set and more
information, siehe Seite 349
You define the starting point of the character string in the cycle. If you
do not define a starting point, the cycle starts at the current tool
position.
You can also engrave a logotype with several calls. For this purpose,
specify the starting point with the first call. All other calls are
programmed without a starting point.
Parameters:
X Starting point (diameter): Pre-positioning the tool
Z Starting point: Pre-positioning the tool
C Spindle angle: Pre-positioning the workpiece spindle
TX Text to be engraved
NF Character number: ASCII code of the character to be engraved
Z2 End point Z position, infeed depth during engraving.
X1 Starting point (polar), first character
C1 Start angle (polar), first character
XK Starting point (Cartesian), first character
YK Starting point (Cartesian), first character
H Font height
E Distance factor (for calculation see figure)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
W Inclination angle of character string
FZ Plunging feed rate factor (plunging feed rate = current feed
rate * F)
V Execution linear, curved above or below
D Reference diameter
346 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Parameters:
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse, starting point X and Z
2 Position to starting point if defined
3 Approach at plunging feed rate FZ
4 Engrave with programmed feed rate
5 Position tool to retraction plane RB or if no RB is defined, to
starting point Z
5 Position tool to the next character
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 until all characters are engraved
7 Position to starting point X, Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
RB Retraction plane. Z position retracted to for positioning.
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the beginning of
the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the cycle
(machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
The engraving cycles are not available in manual operation.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 347
4.8 Milling cycles
Engraving, radial
The "Radial engraving" cycle engraves character strings in linear layout
on the lateral surface of the workpiece. For character set and more
information, siehe Seite 349
You define the starting point of the character string in the cycle. If you
do not define a starting point, the cycle starts at the current tool
position.
You can also engrave a logotype with several calls. For this purpose,
specify the starting point with the first call. All other calls are
programmed without a starting point.
Parameters:
X Starting point (diameter): Pre-positioning the tool
Z Starting point: Pre-positioning the tool
C Spindle angle: Pre-positioning the workpiece spindle
TX Text to be engraved
NF Character number: ASCII code of the character to be engraved
X2 End point (diameter): X position, infeed depth during engraving.
Z1 Starting point, first character
C1 Start angle, first character
CY Starting point, first character
D Reference diameter
H Font height
E Distance factor (for calculation see figure)
T Turret pocket number
G14 Tool change point (siehe Seite 140)
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
W Inclination angle of character string
FZ Plunging feed rate factor (plunging feed rate = current feed
rate * F)
RB Retraction plane. X position retracted to for positioning.
348 Teach-in mode
4.8 Milling cycles
Parameters:
Cycle run
1 Activate the C axis and position to spindle angle C at rapid
traverse, starting point X and Z
2 Position to starting point if defined
3 Approach at plunging feed rate FZ
4 Engrave with programmed feed rate
5 Position tool to retraction plane RB or if no RB is defined, to
starting point X
5 Position tool to the next character
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 until all characters are engraved
7 Position to starting point X, Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
SCK Safety clearance (siehe Seite 140)
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the beginning of
the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
WP Displays which workpiece spindle is used to process the cycle
(machine-dependent)
Main drive
Opposing spindle for rear-face machining
The engraving cycles are not available in manual operation.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 349
4.8 Milling cycles
Engraving, axial/radial
The CNC PILOT can realize the characters listed in the following table.
The text to be engraved is entered as a character string. Diacritics and
special characters that you cannot enter in the editor can be defined,
character by character, in NF. If text is defined in ID and a character is
defined in NF, the text is engraved before the character.
The engraving cycles are not available in manual operation.
Small letters Capital letters
Numerals,
diacritics
Special
characters
NF Character NF Character NF Character NF Character Meaning
97 a 65 A 48 0 32 Space
98 b 66 B 49 1 37 % Per cent sign
99 c 67 C 50 2 40 ( Opening parenthesis
100 d 68 D 51 3 41 ) Closing parenthesis
101 e 69 E 52 4 43 + Plus character
102 f 70 F 53 5 44 , Comma
103 g 71 G 54 6 45 – Minus sign
104 h 72 H 55 7 46 . Point
105 i 73 I 56 8 47 / Forward slash
106 j 74 J 57 9 58 : Colon
107 k 75 K 60 < Less than character
108 l 76 L 196 Ä 61 = Equal sign
109 m 77 M 214 Ö 62 > Greater than character
110 n 78 N 220 Ü 64 @ at
111 o 79 O 223 ß 91 [ Opening brackets
112 p 80 P 228 ä 93 ] Closing brackets
113 q 81 Q 246 ö 95 _ Underscore
114 r 82 R 252 ü 8364 Euro sign
115 s 83 S 181 µ Micro
116 t 84 T 186 ° Degrees
117 u 85 U 215 * Multiplication sign
118 v 86 V 33 ! Exclamation point
119 w 87 W 38 & Ampersand and
120 x 88 X 63 ? Question mark
121 y 89 Y 174 ® Trademark
122 z 90 Z 216 Ø Diameter sign
350 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Note on using drilling/milling patterns:
Hole pattern: The CNC PILOT generates the machine
commands M12, M13 (apply/release block brake) under
the following conditions: the drill/tap must be entered as
driven tool (parameters driven tool AW, direction of
rotation MD must be defined).
ICP milling contours: If the contour starting point is
outside the coordinate datum, the distance between
contour starting point and coordinate datum is added to
the pattern position (see “Examples of pattern
machining” auf Seite 367).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 351
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Drilling pattern linear, axial
Select drilling
Select drilling, axial
Select deep-hole drilling, axial
Select tapping, axial
Press the Pattern linear soft key
Press Pattern linear to machine drilling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a straight line
on the face.
The parameters of the hole are also requested.
Use the following parameter combinations to define the:
Starting point of pattern:
X1, C1 or
XK, YK
Pattern positions:
Ii, Ji and Q
I, J and Q
DRILLING PATTERN LINEAR, AXIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of holes
X1, C1 Starting point of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Starting point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
I, J End point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
Ii, Ji: Pattern spacing (incremental)
352 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute drilling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Return to starting point
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 353
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Milling pattern linear, axial
Select milling
Press the Pattern linear soft key
Select slot, axial
Select ICP contour, axial
Press Pattern linear to machine milling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a straight line
on the face.
The parameters of the milling operation are also requested.
Use the following parameter combinations to define the:
Starting point of pattern:
X1, C1 or
XK, YK
Pattern positions:
Ii, Ji and Q
I, J and Q
LINEAR MILLING PATTERN, AXIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of slots
X1, C1 Starting point of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Starting point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
I, J End point of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
Ii, Ji: Pattern spacing (incremental)
354 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute the milling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Return to starting point
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 355
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Drilling pattern circular, axial
Select drilling
Select drilling, axial
Select deep-hole drilling, axial
Select tapping, axial
Press the Pattern circular soft key
Press Pattern circular to machine drilling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or
circular arc on the face.
The parameters for creating the hole are also requested.
Use the following parameter combinations to define the center of the
pattern:
XM, CM or
XK, YK
CIRCULAR DRILLING PATTERN, AXIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of holes
XM, CM Center of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Center of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st hole (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: holes are
arranged at a regular spacing in a circle)
356 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute drilling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Return to starting point
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 357
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Milling pattern circular, axial
Call the milling menu
Select slot, axial
Select ICP contour, axial
Press the Pattern circular soft key
Press Pattern circular to machine milling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or
circular arc on the face.
The parameters for creating the milling operation are also requested.
Use the following parameter combinations to define the center of the
pattern:
XM, CM or
XK, YK
CIRCULAR MILLING PATTERN, AXIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of slots
XM, CM Center of pattern in polar coordinates
XK, YK Center of pattern in Cartesian coordinates
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st slot (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: milling
operations are regularly spaced in a circle)
358 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute the milling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Return to starting point
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 359
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Drilling pattern linear, radial
Select drilling
Select drilling, radial
Select deep-hole drilling, radial
Select tapping, radial
Press the Pattern linear soft key
Press Pattern linear during drilling cycles to machine drilling patterns
in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a
straight line on the lateral surface.
You define the pattern position with end point of pattern and angle
increment or angle increment and number of holes.
The parameters of the hole are also requested.
DRILLING PATTERN LINEAR, RADIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of holes
Z1 Starting point of pattern (position of 1st hole)
ZE End point of pattern (default: Z1)
C1 Angle of 1st hole (starting angle)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: holes are
regularly spaced on the lateral surface)
360 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute drilling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 361
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Milling pattern linear, radial
Select milling
Press the Pattern linear soft key
Select slot, radial
Select ICP contour, radial
Press Pattern linear during milling cycles to machine milling patterns
in which the individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a
straight line on the lateral surface.
You define the pattern position with end point of pattern and angle
increment or angle increment and number of slots.
The parameters of the milling operation are also requested.
MILLING PATTERN LINEAR, RADIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of slots
Z1 Starting point of pattern (position of 1st slot)
ZE End point of pattern (default: Z1)
C1 Angle of 1st slot (starting angle)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: milling
operations are regularly spaced on the lateral surface)
362 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute the milling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 363
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Drilling pattern circular, radial
Select drilling
Select drilling, radial
Select deep-hole drilling, radial
Select tapping, radial
Press the Pattern circular soft key
Press Pattern circular to machine drilling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or
circular arc on the lateral surface.
The parameters that are required for machining the respective
elements are also requested (see corresponding cycle descriptions).
CIRCULAR DRILLING PATTERN, RADIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of slots
ZM, CM Center of pattern: position, angle
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st hole (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: holes are
arranged at a regular spacing in a circle)
364 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute drilling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 365
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Milling pattern circular, radial
Select milling
Select slot, radial
Select ICP contour, radial
Press the Pattern circular soft key
Press Pattern circular to machine milling patterns in which the
individual features are arranged at a regular spacing in a circle or
circular arc on the lateral surface.
The parameters for programming the milling operation are also
requested (see corresponding cycle descriptions).
MILLING PATTERN CIRCULAR, RADIAL
Cycle parameters
X, Z Starting point
C Spindle angle (C-axis position)—(default: current spindle
angle)
Q Number of slots
ZM, CM Center of pattern: position, angle
K Pattern diameter
A Angle of 1st slot (default: 0°)
Wi Angle increment (pattern spacing)—(default: milling
operations are regularly spaced in a circle)
The starting point of a pattern to be assigned to an ICP
contour must lie on the positive XK axis.
366 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Cycle run
1 Positioning (depending on the machine configuration):
Without C axis: Position to spindle angle C
With C axis: Activate C axis and position to spindle angle C at
rapid traverse
Manual operation: Machining starts from the current spindle
angle
2 Calculate the pattern positions
3 Position to starting point of pattern
4 Execute the milling operation
5 Position for the next machining operation
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining operations have been
completed
7 Position to starting point Z and deactivate C axis
8 Move to the tool change point according to the G14 setting
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 367
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Examples of pattern machining
Linear hole pattern on face
A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece
with the Drilling, axial cycle. This machining operation requires a
traversable spindle and driven tools.
The pattern is programmed by entering the coordinates of the first and
last hole, and the number of holes. Only the depth is indicated for the
drilling cycle.
Tool data
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
DV = 5 (drilling diameter)
BW = 118 (point angle)
AW = 1 (The tool is a driven tool)
368 Teach-in mode
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Circular hole pattern on face
A circular hole pattern is to be machined on the face of the workpiece
with the Drilling, axial cycle. This machining operation requires a
traversable spindle and driven tools.
The center of the pattern is entered in Cartesian coordinates.
Since this example is to illustrate how you drill a through hole, the hole
end point Z2 is programmed such that the tool has to drill all the way
through the workpiece before it reaches the end point. The
parameters "AB" and "V" define a feed reduction for both pre-drilling
and through-boring.
Tool data
TO = 8 (tool orientation)
DV = 5 (drilling diameter)
BW = 118 (point angle)
AW = 1 (The tool is a driven tool)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 369
4.9 Drilling and milling patterns
Linear hole pattern on lateral surface
A linear hole pattern is to be machined on the lateral surface of the
workpiece with the Drilling, radial cycle. This machining operation
requires a traversable spindle and driven tools.
The drilling pattern is defined by the coordinates of the first hole, the
number of holes, and the spacing between the holes. Only the depth
is indicated for the drilling cycle.
Tool data
TO = 2 (tool orientation)
DV = 8 (drilling diameter)
BW = 118 (point angle)
AW = 1 (The tool is a driven tool)
370 Teach-in mode
4.10 DIN cycles
4.10 DIN cycles
DIN cycle
Select DIN cycle
This function allows you to select a DIN cycle (DIN subprogram) and
integrate it in a cycle program. The dialogs of the parameters defined in
the subprogram are then shown in the form.
The technology data that are programmed in the DIN cycle (in Manual
mode, the currently active technology data) become effective as soon
as you start the DIN subprogram. You can change the machine data
(T, S, F) at any time by editing the DIN subprogram.
Cycle parameters
L DIN macro number
Q Number of repetitions (default: 1)
LA-LF Transfer values
LH-LK Transfer values
LO-LP Transfer values
LR-LS Transfer values
LU Transfer value
LW-LZ Transfer values
LN Transfer value
T Turret pocket number
ID Tool ID number
S Spindle speed/cutting speed
F Feed per revolution
MT M after T: M function that is executed after the tool call T.
MFS M at beginning: M function that is executed at the
beginning of the machining step.
MFE M at end: M function that is executed at the end of the
machining step.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 371
4.10 DIN cycles
Operating mode for technology database access depends on the tool
type:
Turning tool: Roughing
Button tool: Roughing
Threading tool: Thread cutting
Recessing tool: Contour recessing
Twist drill: Drilling
Indexable insert drill: Predrilling
Tap: Tapping
Milling cutter: Milling
In the DIN subprogram you can assign texts and help
graphics to the transfer values (see "Subprograms"
chapter in the "smart.Turn and DIN Programming" User's
Manual).
Danger of collision!
Cycle programming: With DIN subprograms, the zero
point shift is reset at the end of the cycle. Therefore, do
not use any DIN subprograms with zero point shifts in
cycle programming.
In the DIN cycle, no starting point is defined. Please
keep in mind that the tool moves on a diagonal path
from the current position to the first position that is
programmed in the DIN subprogram.
372 Teach-in mode
4.10 DIN cycles
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 373
ICP programming
374 ICP programming
5.1 ICP contours
5.1 ICP contours
The Interactive Contour Programming (ICP) feature provides graphic
support when you are defining the workpiece contours. (ICP is the
abbreviation of "Interactive Contour Programming".) Contours created
with ICP are used in the following:
In ICP cycles (Teach-in, Manual Operation)
In smart.Turn
Each contour begins with a starting point. The following contours are
defined using linear and circular contour elements as well as form
elements like chamfers, rounding arcs, and undercuts.
ICP is called from smart.Turn and cycle dialogs.
ICP contours created in cycle mode are saved by the CNC PILOT in
independent files. You can enter file names (contour names) with up
to 40 characters. The ICP contours are integrated in ICP cycles. The
following contour types are possible:
Turning contours: *.gmi
Contours of workpiece blanks: *.gmr
Milling contours on face: *.gms
Milling contours on lateral surface: *.gmm
The CNC PILOT integrates ICP contours created in smart.Turn into
the respective NC program. Contour descriptions are saved as G
commands.
Loading contours
ICP contours that you have created for cycle programs can be
loaded in smart.Turn. ICP converts the contours into G commands and
integrates them in the smart.Turn program. The contour is now part of
the smart.Turn program.
Contours that exist in DXF format can be imported with the ICP
editor. While they are imported, the contours are converted from DXF
format to ICP format. You can use DXF contours both for cycle
operation and for smart.Turn.
In cycle mode, ICP contours created are managed in
independent files. These contours can only be edited
with ICP.
In smart.Turn, contours are part of the NC program.
They can be edited with the ICP editor or smart.Turn
editor.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 375
5.1 ICP contours
Form elements
Chamfers and rounding arcs can be inserted at each corner of the
contour.
Undercuts according to DIN 76, DIN 509 E, and DIN 509 F can be
inserted at paraxial, orthogonal contour corners. Small deviations are
tolerated in elements in the X direction.
You can insert chamfers and rounding arcs at each corner of the
contour. Undercuts according to DIN 76, DIN 509 E, DIN 509 F are
only possible at paraxial, orthogonal contour corners, and small
deviations in horizontal elements (X direction) are tolerated.
You have the following alternatives for entering form elements:
Enter all contour elements, including the form elements, in the
sequence in which they are given in the workpiece drawing.
First define the rough contour without form elements. Then you
superimpose the form elements (see also “Superimposing form
elements” auf Seite 392).
Machining attributes
You can assign the following attributes to the contour elements:
Parameters
U Oversize (additive to other oversizes)
The ICP generates a G52 Pxx H1.
F Special feed rate for finishing.
The ICP generates a G95 Fxx.
D Number of the additive D compensation for the finishing
operation (D = 01 to 16).
The ICP generates a G149 D9xx.
FP Edit element during automatic program generation with
TURN PLUS (not available in Teach-in mode)
0: No
1: Yes
IC Oversize for measuring cut (not available in Teach-in
mode)
KC Length of measuring cut (not available in Teach-in mode)
HC Measuring cut counter: Number of workpieces after which
a measurement is performed (not available in Teach-in
mode)
The machining attributes are effective only for the element
in which the attributes have been entered in ICP.
376 ICP programming
5.1 ICP contours
Calculation of contour geometry
The CNC PILOT automatically calculates all missing coordinates,
points of intersection, center points, etc. that can be derived
mathematically.
If the entered data permit several mathematically possible solutions,
you can inspect the individual solutions and select the proposal that
matches the drawing.
Each unresolved contour element is represented by a small symbol
below the graphic window. The control displays all contour elements
that can be drawn, even if they are not yet fully defined.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 377
5.2 ICP editor in cycle mode
5.2 ICP editor in cycle mode
In cycle mode you can create:
Complex workpiece blank contours
Contours for turning
For ICP turning cycles
For ICP recessing cycles
For ICP recess-turning cycles
Complex contours for milling with the C axis
For the face
For the lateral surface
You activate the ICP editor with the Edit ICP soft key. This can only
be selected when editing ICP turning cycles or milling cycles or the
ICP workpiece blank contour cycle.
The description depends on the contour type. Using the cycle, ICP
distinguishes between:
Contour for turning or the workpiece blank contour: Siehe “Contour
elements of a turning contour” auf Seite 401.
Contour for the face: Siehe “Face contours in smart.Turn” auf
Seite 427.
Contour for the lateral surface: Siehe “Lateral surface contours in
smart.Turn” auf Seite 435.
Editing contours for cycles
The ICP contours of the cycle editing function are assigned names.
The contour name is the same as the file name. The contour name is
also used in the calling cycle.
You can define the contour name in the following ways:
Define the contour name in the cycle dialog before calling the ICP
editor (input field FK). ICP loads this name.
Define the contour name in the ICP editor. The input field FK has to
be empty when you call the ICP editor.
Load the existing contour. When you exit the ICP editor, the name
of the contour last edited is loaded into the input field FK.
If you create/edit two or more ICP contours in sequence,
the last edited "ICP contour number" is loaded to the cycle
after the ICP editor is exited.
378 ICP programming
5.2 ICP editor in cycle mode
Creating a new contour
Define the contour name in the cycle dialog and press
the Edit ICP soft key. The ICP editor switches to
entering the contour.
Press the Edit ICP soft key. The ICP editor opens the
window "Selection of ICP contours."
Define the contour name in the "file name" field and
press the Open soft key. The ICP editor switches to
entering the contour.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
The ICP waits for you to enter a contour name.
File organization with the ICP editor
In the file organization you can copy, rename or delete the ICP
contours.
Press the Edit ICP soft key.
Press the Contour list soft key. The ICP editor
opens the window "Selection of ICP contours."
Press the File manager soft key. The ICP editor
switches the soft-key row to the file organization
functions.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 379
5.3 ICP editor in smart.Turn
5.3 ICP editor in smart.Turn
In smart.Turn you can make:
Blank contours and auxiliary blank contours
Finished part contours and auxiliary contours
Standard figures and complex contours for C-axis machining
on the face
on the lateral surface
Standard figures and complex contours for Y-axis machining
on the XY plane
on the YZ plane
Blank contours and auxiliary blank contours: You describe
complex blanks element by element—like finished parts. You select
the standard forms bar and tube by menu and describe them with a
few parameters (see “Defining the workpiece blank” auf Seite 400). If
a definition of the finished part exists, you can also select "Cast part"
in the menu.
Figures and patterns for C and Y axis machining: You describe
complex milling contours element by element. The following standard
figures are prepared. You select the figures by menu and describe
them with a few parameters:
Circle
Rectangle
Polygon
Linear slot
Circular slot
Hole
You can arrange these figures and holes as linear or circular patterns
on the face or lateral surface as well as in the XY or YZ plane.
You can import DXF contours and integrate them in the smart.Turn
program.
You can load cycle programming contours and integrate them in the
smart.Turn program. smart.Turn supports the loading of the following
contours:
Workpiece blank description (extension *.gmr): Loaded as blank
contour or auxiliary blank contour
Contour for turning (extension *.gmi): Loaded as finished part
contour or auxiliary contour
Face contour (extension *.gms)
Lateral surface contour (extension *.gmm)
ICP uses G codes to describe the contours created in the
smart.Turn program.
380 ICP programming
5.3 ICP editor in smart.Turn
Editing a contour in smart.Turn
Creating a blank contour
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu
select Blank or Auxiliary blank.
Press the Contour menu key. The ICP editor switches
to entering the complex blank contour.
Press the Bar menu key.
Describe the standard workpiece blank "bar."
Press the Tube menu key.
Describe the standard workpiece blank "tube."
Making a new contour for turning
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu,
select the contour type.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
The ICP waits for you to enter a contour name.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 381
5.3 ICP editor in smart.Turn
Loading a contour from the cycle editing
Press the ICP menu key, then in the ICP submenu,
select the contour type.
Press the Contour list soft key. The ICP editor
shows the list of the contours created in cycle mode.
Select and load the contour.
Editing an existing contour
Position the cursor in the corresponding program section.
Press the ICP menu key, then ...
... Select Contour editing in the ICP submenu.
Press the Change ICP contour soft key.
The ICP editor displays the selected existing contour for subsequent
editing.
382 ICP programming
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
An ICP contour consists of individual contour elements. You program
the contour by entering the individual contour elements one after the
other in the correct sequence. The starting point is defined before
you describe the first contour element. The end point is determined
by the target point of the last contour element.
The contour elements / subcontours are displayed as soon as they are
programmed. With the zoom and panning functions, you can adjust
the graphics as required.
The principle described in the following applies for all ICP contours
regardless of whether they are used for cycle programming,
smart.Turn, for turning or for milling.
Entering an ICP contour
If the contour is new, the CNC PILOT asks first for the coordinates of
the contour starting point.
Linear contour elements: Use the menu symbol to select the
direction of the element and assign it a dimension. When defining
horizontal and vertical linear elements, it is not necessary to enter the
X and Z coordinates, respectively, provided that there are no
unresolved elements.
Circular contour elements: Use the menu symbol to select the
direction of arc rotation and give the arc a dimension.
After selecting a contour element, you enter the known parameters.
The CNC PILOT automatically calculates parameters that have not
been defined from the adjoining contour elements. You usually
program the contour elements with the dimensions given in the
production drawing.
During input of linear or circular elements, the control does display the
starting point, but it is not editable. The starting point is the end
point of the preceding element.
You can toggle between the linesand arcs menus by soft key. Form
elements (chamfers, rounding arcs, and undercuts) are selected with
the menu key.
Soft keys in the ICP editor main menu
Opens the file selection dialog for ICP
contours.
Inverts the definition direction of the
contour.
Retroactively inserts form elements.
Adds an element to the existing
contour.
Returns to the dialog that has called
ICP.
Menu items of the lines menu
Line with angle in displayed
quadrant
Horizontal line in displayed
direction
Line with angle in displayed
quadrant
Vertical line in displayed
direction
Call the form element menu
Menu items of arcs menu
Circular arc in the displayed
direction
Call the form element menu
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 383
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Specify the starting point.
Select the line menu.
Select the arc menu.
Select the "Form elements" menu item.
Select the element type and enter the known parameters of the
contour element.
Absolute or incremental dimensioning
The setting of the Increment soft key determines which type of
coordinate is active. Incremental parameters will have the appendix "i"
(Xi, Zi, etc.).
Transitions between contour elements
A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when
one contour element makes a smooth and continuous transition to the
next. There is no visible kink or corner at the intersection. With
geometrically complex contours, tangential transitions are useful for
reducing the input of dimensional data to a minimum and eliminating
the possibility of mathematically contradictory entries.
To be able to calculate unresolved contour elements, the CNC PILOT
must know the type of transition that connects the contour elements.
The transition to the next contour element is determined by soft key.
Soft keys for switching between lines menus
and arcs menus
Select the line menu.
Select the arc menu.
ICP CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
Soft key switchover for incremental
Activates the incremental dimension
for the current value
Soft key for tangential transition
Activates the tangential condition for
the transition in the end point of the
contour element
Error messages that occur during definition of the ICP
contour are often caused by "forgotten" tangential
transitions.
384 ICP programming
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Fits and inside threads
With the Inside thread fit soft key, you can display an input form
for calculating the machining diameter for fits and inside threads. After
entering the required values (nominal diameter and tolerance class or
thread type), you can apply the calculated value as the target point for
the contour element.
Calculate the fit for a hole or shaft:
Press the Fit soft key
Enter the nominal diameter
Enter the fit data in the Fit form
Press the ENT key to calculate the values
Press the Apply soft key. The calculated center of tolerance is
entered in the corresponding field of the open dialog box
Calculate the core hole diameter for inside threads:
Press the Inner thread soft key
Enter the nominal diameter
Enter the thread data in the Inside thread calculator form
Press the ENT key to calculate the values
Press the Apply soft key. The calculated core hole diameter is
entered in the corresponding field of the open dialog box
The machining diameter can only be calculated for suitable
contour elements, e.g. for a linear element in X direction
when calculating the fit for a shaft.
When calculating inside threads of thread type 9, 10 or 11,
you can select the nominal diameter for inch threads in the
Nominal diameter list L.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 385
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Polar coordinates
Entry of Cartesian coordinates is expected as standard. With the soft
keys for polar coordinates you switch individual coordinates to polar
coordinates.
You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates to define a
point.
Angular input
Select the desired angle input by soft key.
Linear elements
AN Angle to the Z axis (AN<=90°—within the preselected
quadrant)
ANn Angle to the following element
ANp Angle to the previous element
Circular arcs
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point of the circle
ANe Tangential angle in the end point of the circle
ANn Angle to the following element
ANp Angle to the previous element
Soft keys for polar coordinates
Switches the field to entering the
angle W.
Switches the field to entering the
radius P.
Soft keys for angular input
Angle to successor
Angle to predecessor
386 ICP programming
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Contour graphics
As soon as you have entered a contour element, the CNC PILOT
checks whether the element is resolved or unresolved.
A resolved element is a contour element that is fully and
unambiguously defined. It is drawn immediately.
An unresolved element has not yet been fully defined by the
entered data. Use of the ICP editor:
It places a symbol below the graphics window. It reflects the
element type and the line direction / direction of rotation.
Represents an unresolved linear element if the starting point and
direction are known.
Represents an unresolved circular element as a full circle if the
circle center and the radius are known.
As soon as it can be calculated, the CNC PILOT converts an
unresolved contour element to a resolved contour element. The
symbol is then deleted.
An incorrect contour element is displayed if possible. In addition, an
error message is issued.
Unresolved contour elements: If during further contour input an
error results because there is not enough information, the unresolved
elements can be selected and supplemented.
If a contour contains "unresolved" contour elements, the "resolved"
elements cannot be changed. You can, however, set or delete the
"tangential transition" for the contour element located directly before
the unsolved contour area.
If the element to be edited is an unresolved element,
the associated symbol is marked "selected."
The element type and the direction of rotation of a
circular arc cannot be changed. In this case, the contour
element has to be deleted and then added.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 387
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Selection of solutions
If the data entered for unresolved contour elements permit several
possible solutions, you can check all mathematically possible solutions
with the Next solution / Previous solution soft keys. You then
confirm the correct solution by soft key.
Colors in contour graphics
Resolved and unresolved contour elements as well as selected
contour elements, selected contour corners, and remaining contours
are depicted in different colors. (The selection of contour elements /
contour corners and remaining contours is important when you are
editing ICP contours.)
Colors:
White: Workpiece blank contour, auxiliary blank contour
Yellow: Finished part contours (turned contours, contour for C and Y
axis machining)
Blue: Auxiliary contours
Gray: For unresolved or incorrect but displayable elements
Red: Selected solution, selected element or selected corner
If the contour still contains unsolved contour elements
when you exit the editing mode, the CNC PILOT will ask
you whether to discard these elements.
388 ICP programming
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Selection functions
In the ICP editor, the CNC PILOT provides various functions for
selecting contour elements, form elements, contour corners and
contour areas. You can call these functions by soft key.
Selected contour corners or contour elements are shown in red.
Selecting a contour area
Select the first element of the contour section.
Activate the section selection.
Press the Next element soft key until the entire
section is marked.
Press the Previous element soft key until the entire
section is marked.
Selecting contour elements
Next element (or the left arrow key)
selects the next element in the direction
of contour definition.
Previous element (or the right arrow key)
selects the previous element in the
direction of contour definition.
Select range: Activates the range
selection.
Selecting contour corners (for form elements)
Next contour edge (or the left arrow key)
selects the next corner in the direction of
contour definition.
Previous contour edge (or the right
arrow key) selects the previous corner in
the direction of contour definition.
Mark all corners: Marks all contour
corners.
Corner selection: If the corner selecting
function is activated, multiple contour
corners can be marked.
Mark: If the corner selecting function is
active, individual contour corners can be
selected and marked or unmarked with
this soft key.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 389
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Zero point shift
With this function, you can move a complete turning contour.
Activate zero point shift:
Select "Zero point > Shift" in the finished part menu
Enter the contour shift to move the defined contour
Press the Save soft key
Deactivate zero point shift:
Select "Zero point > Reset" in the finished part menu to reset the
zero point of the coordinate system to the original position
Copying a contour section in linear series
With this function, you can define a contour section and append it to
the existing contour.
Select "Copy > Row Linear" in the finished part menu
Use the Next element or Previous element soft key to select
contour elements
Press the Select soft key
Enter the number of repeats
Press the Save soft key
The zero point shift cannot be reset after you exit the ICP
editor. When you exit the ICP editor, the contour is
recalculated with the values of the zero point shift and
saved. In this case, you can only reset the zero point by
doing a zero point shift in the opposite direction.
Parameters
Xi Target point – value by which the zero point is shifted
Zi Target point – value by which the zero point is shifted
Parameters
Q Number of repeats
390 ICP programming
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Copying a contour section in circular series
With this function, you can define a contour section and append it to
the existing contour in a circular series.
Select "Copy > Row Circular" in the finished part menu
Use the Next element or Previous element soft key to select
contour elements
Press the Select soft key
Enter the number of repeats and the radius
Press the Save soft key
Copying a contour section by mirroring
With this function, you can define a contour section, mirror it and add
it to the existing contour.
Select "Copy > Mirror" in the finished part menu
Use the Next element or Previous element soft key to select
contour elements
Enter the angle of the mirror axis
Press the Save soft key
Inverting
With the Invert function, you can reverse the programmed direction of
a contour.
Parameters
Q Number of copies (the contour section is copied Q times)
R Radius
The control uses the entered radius for creating a circle
both around the starting point and the end point of the
contour section. The points of intersection of the circles
are the two possible centers of rotation.
The angle of rotation is calculated from the distance
between starting point and end point of the contour
section.
Use the Next solution or Previous solution soft key to
select one of the mathematically possible solutions.
Parameters
W Angle of the mirror axis. The mirror axis intersects the current
end point of the contour.
Reference of the angle: positive Z axis
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 391
5.4 Creating an ICP contour
Contour direction (cycle programming)
The cutting direction during cycle programming depends on the
direction of the contour. If the contour is described in the –Z direction,
a tool with the orientation 1 must be used for longitudinal machining.
(Siehe “General tool parameters” auf Seite 516.) The cycle used
determines whether machining is transverse or longitudinal.
If the contour is described in the –X direction, a transverse machining
cycle or a tool with the orientation 3 must be used.
ICP cut, longitudinal/transverse (roughing): The CNC PILOT
machines the workpiece in the contour direction.
ICP finishing, longitudinal/transverse: The CNC PILOT finishes
the workpiece in the contour direction.
Soft keys in the ICP editor main menu
Inverts the definition direction of the
contour.
An ICP contour which was defined for a roughing
operation with the cycle "ICP cut longitudinal" cannot be
used for machining with the cycle "ICP cut transverse."
Reverse the contour direction with the Turn contour soft
key.
392 ICP programming
5.5 Editing ICP contours
5.5 Editing ICP contours
The CNC PILOT offers the following possibilities for extending or
changing a programmed contour.
Superimposing form elements
Press the soft key.
Select the desired form element.
Select the corner to be changed.
Confirm the corner for the form element and enter
the data for the form element.
Adding contour elements
You can add to an ICP contour by entering additional contour
elements that are "appended" to the existing contour. A small square
indicates the end of the contour and an arrow indicates the direction.
Press the soft key
"Append" additional contour elements to the existing contour.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 393
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Editing or deleting the last contour element
To edit the last contour element: When the Change last soft key is
pressed the data of the "last" contour element are presented for
editing.
Depending on the adjoining contour elements, corrections of linear or
circular elements are either transferred immediately or the corrected
contour is displayed for inspection. ICP highlights the affected contour
elements in color. If the change permits several possible solutions,
you can check all mathematically possible solutions with the Next
solution / Previous solution soft keys.
The change will not become effective until you confirm by soft key. If
you discard the change, the old description becomes effective again.
The type of contour element (linear or circular element), the direction
of a linear element, or the direction of rotation of a circular element
cannot be changed. Should this be necessary, you must delete the
element and add a new contour element.
To delete the last contour element: When the Delete last soft key
is pressed the data of the "last" contour element are discarded. You
can use this function repeatedly to delete several successive contour
elements.
Deleting a contour element
Press the Manipulate menu key. The menu displays
functions for trimming, editing and deleting contours.
Press the menu keys Delete ...
... Element/Range.
Select the contour element to be deleted.
Delete the contour element.
You can delete several successive contour elements.
394 ICP programming
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Editing contour elements
The CNC PILOT provides various ways to change an existing contour.
The procedure is illustrated in the following example of editing the
length of an element. The other functions work similar to the
procedure described here.
The Manipulate menu provides the following functions for editing
existing contour elements:
Trimming
Length of element
Length of contour (only for closed contours)
Radius
Diameter
Change
Contour element
Form element
Delete
Element/Range
Move element/range as well
Contour/Pocket/Figure/Pattern
Form element
All form elements
Transform
Shifting a contour
Contour rotation
Contour mirroring: You can define the position of the mirror axis
by entering the starting point and end point or the starting point
and angle
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 395
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Changing the length of the contour element
Press the Manipulate menu key. The menu displays
functions for trimming, editing and deleting contours.
Press the menu keys Edit ...
... Contour element.
Select the contour element to be edited.
Present the selected contour element for editing.
Make the changes.
Load the changes.
The contour or, if applicable, the possible solutions are displayed for
inspection. Changes in form elements and unresolved elements are
loaded immediately (original contour in yellow, changed contour in red
for comparison).
Load the desired solution.
396 ICP programming
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Changing the paraxial line
When changing a paraxial line, an additional soft key is offered with
which you can change the second end point as well. From an originally
straight line you can make a diagonal in order to make corrections.
Changing the "fixed" end point. By pressing
repeatedly you select the direction of the diagonal.
Shifting a contour
Press the Manipulate menu key. The menu displays
functions for trimming, editing and deleting contours.
Press the menu keys Edit ...
... Contour element.
Select the contour element to be edited.
Present the selected contour element for moving.
Enter the new starting point of the reference element.
Assume the new starting point (= new position). The
CNC PILOT shows the shifted contour.
Confirm the new position for the contour.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 397
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Transformations – Shifting
With this function, you can move a contour by entering incremental or
absolute coordinates.
Transformations – Rotating
With this function you can rotate a contour about a center of rotation.
Parameters
X Target point
Z Target point
Xi Target point – incremental
Zi Target point – incremental
H Original (only with C-axis contours):
0: Delete: Original contour is deleted
1: Copy: Original contour is maintained
ID Contour name (only with C-axis contours)
Soft keys
Polar dimension of the center of
rotation: Angle
Polar dimension of the center of
rotation: Radius
Parameters
X Center of rotation in Cartesian coordinates
Z Center of rotation in Cartesian coordinates
W Center of rotation in polar coordinates
P Center of rotation in polar coordinates
A Angle of rotation
H Original (only with C-axis contours):
0: Delete: Original contour is deleted
1: Copy: Original contour is maintained
ID Contour name (only with C-axis contours)
398 ICP programming
5.5 Editing ICP contours
Transformations – Mirroring
This function mirrors the contour. Define the position of the mirror
axis by entering the starting point and end point or the starting point
and angle.
Soft keys for polar dimensions
Polar dimension of the starting point:
Angle
Polar dimension of the starting point:
Radius
Polar dimension of the end point:
Angle
Polar dimension of the end point:
Radius
Parameters
XS Starting point in Cartesian coordinates
ZS Starting point in Cartesian coordinates
X End point in Cartesian coordinates
Z End point in Cartesian coordinates
A Angle of rotation
WS Starting point in polar coordinates
PS Starting point in polar coordinates
W End point in polar coordinates
P End point in polar coordinates
H Original (only with C-axis contours):
1: Copy: Original contour is maintained
0: Delete: Original contour is deleted
ID Contour name (only with C-axis contours)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 399
5.6 The zoom function in the ICP editor
5.6 The zoom function in the ICP
editor
The zoom functions make it possible to change the visible section by
using soft keys, the arrow keys, and the PgUp and PgDn keys. The
zoom function can be called in all ICP windows.
The CNC PILOT sizes the graphic section depending on the
programmed contour. With the zoom function you can select another
graphic section.
Changing the view
Modifying the section by using keys
The displayed section can be modified with the arrow keys, the
PgUp key and the PgDn key without opening the zoom menu.
Modifying the section with the zoom menu
If the zoom function is selected, a red rectangle appears in the
contour window. This red frame indicates the zoom area, which you
can select using the Take over soft key or the Enter key. Use the
following keys to change the frame size and position:
Soft keys in the zoom menu
Activates the zoom function.
Extends the displayed section directly
(zoom –).
Switches back to the standard screen
section and closes the zoom menu.
Switches to the last screen section
selected.
Applies the area selected by the red
frame as the new section and closes
the zoom menu.
Closes the zoom menu without
changing the selected section.
Keys for modifying the displayed section
The arrow keys move the workpiece in the
indicated direction.
Reduces the displayed workpiece (zoom –).
Magnifies the displayed workpiece (zoom +).
Keys for modifying the red frame
The arrow keys move the frame in the indicated
direction.
Reduces the displayed frame (zoom +).
Enlarges the displayed frame (zoom -).
400 ICP programming
5.7 Defining the workpiece blank
5.7 Defining the workpiece blank
In smart.Turn, the standard forms "bar" and "tube" are described with
a G function.
"Bar" blank
The function describes a cylinder.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G20 in the BLANK section.
"Tube" blank
The function describes a hollow cylinder.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G20 in the BLANK section.
"Cast part" blank
The function describes an oversize on an existing finished part
contour.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a contour in the BLANK section.
Parameters
X Cylinder diameter
Z Length of the blank
K Right edge (distance between workpiece zero point and right
edge)
Parameters
X Diameter of hollow cylinder
Z Length of the blank
K Right edge (distance between workpiece zero point and right
edge)
I Inside diameter
Parameters
K Contour-parallel oversize
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 401
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
5.8 Contour elements of a turning
contour
With the "contour elements of a turning contour" you can create the
following:
In cycle mode
Complex workpiece blank contours
Contours for turning
In smart.Turn
Complex blank contours and auxiliary blank contours
Finished part contours and auxiliary contours
Basic elements of a turning contour
Specify the starting point
Enter the coordinates for the starting point and target point in the first
contour element of the turning contour. Entering the starting point is
only possible in the first contour element. In subsequent contour
elements, the starting point results from the previous contour element
in each case.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Select the contour element
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G0.
Parameters for defining the starting point
XS, ZS Starting point of contour
W Polar starting point of contour (angle)
P Polar starting point of contour (radius)
402 ICP programming
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Vertical lines
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G1.
Horizontal lines
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G1.
Parameters
X Target point
Xi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point (radius)
L Length of line
U, F, D, FP, IC, KC, HC: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point (radius)
L Length of line
U, F, D, FP, IC, KC, HC: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 403
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Line at angle
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element. Always enter the angle AN (<=90°) within the selected
quadrant.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G1.
Parameters
X, Z Target point
Xi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point (radius)
L Length of line
AN Angle to Z axis
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
U, F, D, FP, IC, KC, HC: See machining attributes on Seite 375
404 ICP programming
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Circular arc
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
ICP generates a G2 or G3 in smart.Turn.
Parameters
X, Z Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Xi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
Wi Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
P Polar target point (radius)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
I, K Center of arc
Ii, Ki Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z direction)
PM Polar center of arc (radius)
PMi Incremental polar center of arc (distance from starting
point to center)
WM Polar center of arc (angle)
WMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ANp Angle to the previous element
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 405
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Contour form elements
Chamfer/rounding arc
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G1, G2 or G3.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
Example of an outside chamfer at start of contour: If you program
"element position AN=90°," the imaginary approaching reference
element is a transverse element in the positive +X-axis direction (see
figure).
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
406 ICP programming
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Thread undercut DIN 76
Select the form elements.
Select Undercut DIN 76.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
The CNC PILOT calculates unentered parameters automatically from
the standard table (see “DIN 76—undercut parameters” auf
Seite 615):
The "thread pitch FP" is determined from the diameter.
The parameters I, K, W, and R are calculated from the thread pitch
FP.
Parameters
FP Thread pitch (default: value from standard table)
I Undercut depth (radius) (default: value from standard
table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
If you are programming an internal thread, it is advisable
to preset the thread pitch FP, since the diameter of the
longitudinal element is not the thread diameter. If you
have the CNC PILOT calculate the thread pitch
automatically, slight deviations may occur.
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be
parallel to the X axis.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 407
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Undercut DIN 509 E
Select the form elements.
Select undercut DIN 509 E.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
The CNC PILOT calculates unentered parameters automatically from
the diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 E – undercut
parameters” auf Seite 617).
Parameters
I Undercut depth (radius) (default: value from standard
table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
408 ICP programming
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Undercut DIN 509 F
Select the form elements.
Select undercut DIN 509 F.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
The CNC PILOT calculates unentered parameters automatically from
the diameter in the standard table (see “DIN 509 F – undercut
parameters” auf Seite 617).
Parameters
I Undercut depth (radius) (default: value from standard
table)
K Undercut length (default: value from standard table)
R Undercut radius (default: value from standard table)
W Undercut angle (default: value from standard table)
P Face depth (default: value from standard table)
A Face angle (default: value from standard table)
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 409
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Undercut type U
Select the form elements.
Select the undercut type U.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
Parameters
I Undercut depth (radius)
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius
P Chamfer/rounding
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
410 ICP programming
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Undercut type H
Select the form elements.
Select the undercut type H.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
Parameters
K Undercut length
R Undercut radius
W Plunge angle
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 411
5.8 Contour elements of a turning contour
Undercut type K
Select the form elements.
Select the undercut type K.
Enter the undercut parameters.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G25.
Parameters
I Undercut depth
R Undercut radius
W Angular length
A Plunge angle
U, F, D, FP: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Undercuts can be programmed only between two linear
elements. One of the two linear elements must be parallel
to the X axis.
412 ICP programming
5.9 Contour elements on face
5.9 Contour elements on face
With the "contour elements of a face" you can create complex milling
contours.
Cycle mode: Contour for axial ICP milling cycles
smart.Turn: Contour for machining with the C axis
Enter the dimensions of the front face contour elements in Cartesian
or polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key
(see table). You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates
to define a point.
Starting point of face contour
Enter the coordinates for the starting point and target point in the first
contour element of the contour. Entering the starting point is only
possible in the first contour element. In subsequent contour elements,
the starting point results from the previous contour element in each
case.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Specify the starting point.
Soft keys for polar coordinates
Switches the field to entering the
angle C.
Switches the field to entering the
radius P.
Parameters for defining the starting point
XKS, YKS Starting point of contour
C Polar starting point of contour (angle)
P Polar starting point of contour (radius)
HC Milling/drilling attribute:
1: Contour milling
2: Pocket milling
3: Area milling
4: Deburring
5: Engraving
6: Contour milling and deburring
7: Pocket milling and deburring
14: Do not machine
QF Milling location:
0: On the contour
1: Inside/left
2: Outside/right
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 413
5.9 Contour elements on face
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G100.
Vertical lines on face
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G101.
HF Direction:
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
DF Cutter diameter
WF Angle of the chamfer
BR Chamfer width
RB Retraction plane
Parameters
YK Cartesian target point
YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
C Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
414 ICP programming
5.9 Contour elements on face
Horizontal lines on face
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G101.
Parameters
XK Cartesian target point
XKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
C Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 415
5.9 Contour elements on face
Line at angle on face
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G101.
Parameters
XK, YK Cartesian target point
XKi, YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
C Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
AN Angle to XK axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
416 ICP programming
5.9 Contour elements on face
Circular arc on face
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
ICP generates a G102 or G103 in smart.Turn.
Parameters
XK, YK Target point (end point of the circular arc)
XKi, YKi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
P Polar target point (radius)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
C Polar target point (angle)
Ci Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
I, J Center of arc
Ii, Ji: Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
PM Polar center of arc
PMi Incremental polar center of arc (distance from starting
point to center)
CM Polar center of arc (angle)
CMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ANp Angle to the previous element
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 417
5.9 Contour elements on face
Chamfer/rounding arc on face
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G101, G102 or G103.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
418 ICP programming
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
5.10 Contour elements on lateral
surface
With the "contour elements of a lateral surface" you can create
complex milling contours.
Cycle mode: Contour for radial ICP milling cycles
smart.Turn: Contour for machining with the C axis
Enter the dimensions of the lateral surface contour elements in
Cartesian or polar values. You can use the linear dimension as an
alternative to the angular dimension. You can switch between them by
pressing a soft key (see table).
Starting point of lateral surface contour
Enter the coordinates for the starting point and target point in the first
contour element of the contour. Entering the starting point is only
possible in the first contour element. In subsequent contour elements,
the starting point results from the previous contour element in each
case.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Specify the starting point.
Soft keys for polar coordinates
Switches the field from linear
dimensions to entry of the angle C.
Switches the field to entering the
polar dimension P.
The linear dimension is essentially the unrolled surface at
the reference diameter.
For lateral surface contours, the reference diameter is
specified in the cycle. The linear dimensions of all
subsequent contour elements are referenced to this
diameter.
When called from smart.Turn, the reference diameter in
the reference data is requested.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 419
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G110.
Parameters for defining the starting point
ZS Starting point of contour
CYS Starting point of contour as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
P Polar starting point of contour
C Polar starting point of contour (angle)
HC Milling/drilling attribute:
1: Contour milling
2: Pocket milling
3: Area milling
4: Deburring
5: Engraving
6: Contour milling and deburring
7: Pocket milling and deburring
14: Do not machine
QF Milling location:
0: On the contour
1: Inside/left
2: Outside/right
HF Direction:
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
DF Cutter diameter
WF Angle of the chamfer
BR Chamfer width
RB Retraction plane
420 ICP programming
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
Vertical lines on lateral surface
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G111.
Horizontal lines on lateral surface
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G111.
Parameters
CY Target point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XS)
CYi Incremental target point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
P Target point as polar radius
C Polar target point (angle)
Ci Incremental polar target point – angle
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point
P Target point as polar radius
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 421
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
Line at angle on lateral surface
Direction of the line
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G111.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point
CY Target point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XS)
CYi Incremental target point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
P Target point as polar radius
C Polar target point (angle)
Ci Incremental polar target point – angle
AN Angle to Z axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
422 ICP programming
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
Circular arc on lateral surface
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
ICP generates a G112 or G113 in smart.Turn.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point
CY Target point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XS)
CYi Incremental target point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
P Target point as polar radius
C Polar target point (angle)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
Ci Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
K Center point in Z
Ki Incremental center point in Z
CJ Center as linear dimension; reference: diameter XS)
CJi Incremental center point as linear dimension (reference:
diameter XS)
PM Polar center of arc
PMi Incremental polar center of arc (distance from starting
point to center)
WM Polar center of arc (angle)
WMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 423
5.10 Contour elements on lateral surface
Chamfer/rounding arc on lateral surface
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G111, G112 or G113.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
424 ICP programming
5.11 C and Y axis machining in smart.Turn
5.11 C and Y axis machining in
smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP supports the definition of milling contours and holes
as well as the creation of milling and drilling patterns that are machined
with the aid of the C or Y axis.
Before you use ICP to describe a milling contour or a hole, select the
plane:
C axis
Face (XC plane)
Lateral surface (ZC plane)
Y axis
Y face (XY plane)
Y lateral surface (YZ plane)
A hole can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
The parameters are evaluated for drilling or tapping.
You can arrange holes in linear or circular patterns.
Milling contours: The CNC PILOT is familiar with standard figures
(full circle, polygon, slot, etc.). You can define these figures with a few
parameters. Complex contours are described with lines and circular
arcs.
You can arrange standard figures in linear or circular patterns.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 425
5.11 C and Y axis machining in smart.Turn
Reference data, nested contours
When describing a milling contour or hole you specify the reference
plane. The reference plane is the position on which the milling contour
or the hole is created.
Face (C axis): The Z position (reference dimension)
Lateral surface (C axis): The X position (reference diameter)
XY plane (Y axis): The Z position (reference dimension)
YZ plane (Y axis): The X position (reference diameter)
It is also possible to nest milling contours and holes. Example:
Defining a slot in a rectangular pocket. Holes are drilled inside this slot.
You use the reference plane to specify the positions of these
elements.
ICP supports the selection of the reference plane. The following
reference data are loaded during selection of a reference plane.
Face: Reference dimension
Lateral surface: Reference diameter
XY plane: Reference dimension, spindle angle, limit diameter
YZ plane: Reference diameter, spindle angle
Selecting a reference plane
Select contour, figure, hole, pattern, single surface or polygon.
Press the Select reference plane soft key. ICP
displays the finished part and, if available, the
contours already defined.
Use the soft keys (see table at right) to select the reference
dimension, reference diameter or existing milling contour as reference
plane.
Confirm the reference plane. ICP loads the values of
the reference plane as reference data.
Complete the reference data and describe the contour, figure, hole,
pattern, single surface or polygon.
Soft keys and nested contours
Switches to the next contour of the
same reference plane.
Switches to the previous contour of
the same reference plane.
Switches to the next nested contour.
Switches to the previous nested
contour.
426 ICP programming
5.11 C and Y axis machining in smart.Turn
Representation of the ICP elements in the
smart.Turn program
Each ICP dialog in smart.Turn programs is represented by a section
code followed by further G commands. A hole or milling contour
(standard figure and complex contour) contains the following
commands:
Section code (with reference data of this section):
FACE_C (XC plane)
LATERAL_C (ZC plane)
FACE_Y (XY plane)
LATERAL_Y (ZY plane)
G308 (with parameters) as "beginning of the reference plane"
G function of the figure or hole; sequence of commands with
patterns or complex contours
G309 as "end of a reference plane"
In nested contours a reference plane begins with G308, the next
reference plane with the next G308, etc. When the deepest level is
finally reached, this reference plane is concluded with G309. Then the
next reference plane is concluded with G309 etc.
Note the following points if you describe milling contours or holes with
G commands and then edit them with ICP:
Some parameters are redundant in the DIN contour description. For
example, the milling depth can be programmed in the G308 and/or
in the G function of the figure. This redundancy does not appear in
ICP.
In DIN programming of figures you have the choice between a
Cartesian or polar center dimensioning. The center of the figures is
entered in ICP in Cartesian coordinates.
Example: In the DIN contour description, the milling depth is
programmed in G308 and in the figure definition. If this figure is
changed with ICP, it overwrites the milling depth from G308 with the
milling depth from the figure. When saving, ICP saves the milling
depth in G308. The G function of the figure is saved without milling
depth.
Beispiel: "Rectangle on the face"
. . .
FACE_C Z0
N 100 G308 ID"FACE_1" P-5
N 101 G305 XK40 YK10 A0 K30 B15
N 102 G309
Beispiel: "Nested figures"
. . .
FACE_C Z0
N 100 G308 ID"FACE_2" P-5
N 101 G307 XK-40 YK-40 Q5 A0 K-50
N 102 G308 ID"FACE_12" P-3
N 103 G301 XK-35 YK-40 A30 K40 B20
N 104 G309
N 105 G309
If you use ICP to edit contour descriptions that were
created with G functions, redundant parameters are
lost.
If you load a figure with a center in polar dimensions, the
center is converted to Cartesian coordinates.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 427
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the C axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Reference data for complex face contours
The reference data is followed by the contour definition with individual
contour elements: Siehe “Contour elements on face” auf Seite 412.
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G309 at the end of the contour description.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
428 ICP programming
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
TURN PLUS attributes
In the TURN PLUS attributes you can define settings for the automatic
program generation (AWG).
Circle on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G304 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Parameters for defining the starting point
HC Milling/drilling attribute:
1: Contour milling
2: Pocket milling
3: Area milling
4: Deburring
5: Engraving
6: Contour milling and deburring
7: Pocket milling and deburring
14: Do not machine
QF Milling location:
0: On the contour
1: Inside/left
2: Outside/right
HF Direction:
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
DF Cutter diameter
WF Angle of the chamfer
BR Chamfer width
RB Retraction plane
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
RRadius
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 429
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Rectangle on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G305 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
A Position angle (reference: XK axis)
K Length
BWidth
BR Rounding arc
430 ICP programming
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Polygon on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G307 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
A Position angle (reference: XK axis)
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
Ki Width across flats (inscribed circle diameter)
BR Rounding arc
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 431
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Linear slot on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G301 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Circular slot on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G302 or G303 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
A Position angle (reference: XK axis)
K Length
BWidth
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XKM, YKM Center of figure (Cartesian coordinates)
A Starting angle (reference: XK axis)
W End angle (reference: XK axis)
R Curvature radius (reference: center point path of the
slot)
Q2 Direction of rotation
CW
CCW
BWidth
432 ICP programming
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Hole on face
This function defines a single hole that can contain the following
elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and hole depth (–1*BT).
A G300 with the parameters of the hole.
A G309.
Reference data of hole
ID Contour name
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of the hole
XKM, YKM Center of hole (Cartesian coordinates)
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth (without algebraic sign)
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
GA Thread type (right-hand/left-hand)
0: Right-hand thread
1: Left-hand thread
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 433
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Linear pattern on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G401 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of pattern
XK, YK 1st point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
QP Number of points in pattern
IP, JP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
IPi, JPi Distance between two pattern points (in XK, YK
direction)
AP Position angle
RP Total length of pattern
RPi Distance between two pattern points
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
434 ICP programming
5.12 Face contours in smart.Turn
Circular pattern on face
You can find the reference dimension ZR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_C section code with the reference dimension parameter.
In nested contours, ICP generates only one section code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G402 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data of face
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of pattern
XK, YK Center of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
QP Number of points in pattern
DR Direction of rotation (default: 0)
DR=0, without EP: Figures are arranged on a full circle
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer
circular arc
DR=0, with EPi: The algebraic sign of EPi defines the
direction (EPi<0: clockwise)
DR=1, with EP: clockwise
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
AP Starting angle (default: 0°)
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally
divided into 360°)
EPi Angle between two figures
H Element position
0: Normal position—the figures are rotated about the
circle center (rotation)
1: Original position—the position of the figures
relative to the coordinate system remains unchanged
(translation)
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 435
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
5.13 Lateral surface contours in
smart.Turn
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the C axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Reference data of lateral surface
The reference data is followed by the contour definition with individual
contour elements: Siehe “Contour elements on lateral surface” auf
Seite 418.
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425). The reference diameter is used for
converting angle dimensions into linear dimensions.
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G309 at the end of the contour description or after the figure.
Parameters of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
436 ICP programming
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
TURN PLUS attributes
In the TURN PLUS attributes you can define settings for the automatic
program generation (AWG).
Parameters for defining the starting point
HC Milling/drilling attribute:
1: Contour milling
2: Pocket milling
3: Area milling
4: Deburring
5: Engraving
6: Contour milling and deburring
7: Pocket milling and deburring
14: Do not machine
QF Milling location:
0: On the contour
1: Inside/left
2: Outside/right
HF Direction:
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
DF Cutter diameter
WF Angle of the chamfer
BR Chamfer width
RB Retraction plane
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 437
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Circle on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G314 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
R Radius
438 ICP programming
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Rectangle on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G315 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
A Position angle
K Length
BWidth
BR Rounding arc
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 439
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Polygon on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G317 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
A Position angle
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
Ki Width across flats (inscribed circle diameter)
BR Rounding arc
440 ICP programming
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Linear slot on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G311 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
A Position angle
K Length
BWidth
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 441
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Circular slot on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G312 or G313 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
Z Figure center
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
A Starting angle
W End angle
R Radius
Q2 Direction of rotation
CW
CCW
BWidth
442 ICP programming
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Hole on lateral surface
This function defines a single hole that can contain the following
elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and hole depth (–1*BT).
A G310 with the parameters of the hole.
A G309.
Reference data of hole
ID Contour name
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of the hole
Z Center of hole
CYM Center of figure as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
CM Center of figure (angle)
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
GA Thread type (right-hand/left-hand)
0: Right-hand thread
1: Left-hand thread
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 443
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Linear pattern on lateral surface
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G411 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of pattern
Z 1st point of pattern
CY 1st pattern point as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
C 1st point of pattern (angle)
QP Number of points in pattern
ZE End point of pattern
ZEi Distance between two pattern points (in Z direction)
WP End point of pattern (angle)
WPi Distance between two pattern points (angle)
AP Position angle
RP Total length of pattern
RPi Distance between two pattern points
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
444 ICP programming
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
Circular pattern on lateral surface
Reference data: (siehe „Reference data of lateral surface” auf Seite
435)
Reference data of lateral surface
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of pattern
Z Center of pattern
CY Center of pattern as linear dimension (reference: diameter XR)
C Center of pattern (angle)
QP Number of points in pattern
DR Direction of rotation (default: 0)
DR=0, without EP: Figures are arranged on a full circle
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer circular
arc
DR=0, with EPi: The algebraic sign of EPi defines the
direction (EPi<0: clockwise)
DR=1, with EP: clockwise
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has no
effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
AP Starting angle (default: 0°)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 445
5.13 Lateral surface contours in smart.Turn
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_C section code with the reference diameter
parameter. In nested contours, ICP generates only one section
code.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G412 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally divided
into 360°)
EPi Angle between two figures
H Element position
0: Normal position—the figures are rotated about the circle
center (rotation)
1: Original position—the position of the figures relative to
the coordinate system remains unchanged (translation)
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
446 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the Y axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Single surface
Polygon
Enter the dimensions of the XY plane contour elements in Cartesian
or polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key
(see table). You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates
to define a point.
Reference data in XY plane
The reference data is followed by the contour definition with individual
contour elements.
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters reference
dimension, spindle angle, and limit diameter. The section code is
omitted for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G309 at the end of the contour description.
Soft keys for polar coordinates
Switches the field to entering the
angle W.
Switches the field to entering the
radius P.
Reference data of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 447
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Starting point of contour in XY plane
Enter the coordinates for the starting point and target point in the first
contour element of the contour. Entering the starting point is only
possible in the first contour element. In subsequent contour elements,
the starting point results from the previous contour element in each
case.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Specify the starting point.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G170.
Vertical lines in XY plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G171.
Parameters for defining the starting point
XS, YS Starting point of contour
W Polar starting point of contour (angle)
P Polar starting point of contour (radius)
Parameters
Y Target point
Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
448 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Horizontal lines in XY plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G171.
Parameters
X Target point
Xi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 449
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Line at angle in XY plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G171.
Parameters
X, Y Target point
Xi, Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
AN Angle to X axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
450 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Circular arc in XY plane
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
ICP generates a G172 or G173 in smart.Turn.
Parameters
X, Y Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Xi, Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
P Polar target point (radius)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
Wi Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
I, J Center of arc
Ii, Ji: Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
PM Polar center of arc
PMi Incremental polar center of arc (distance from starting
point to center)
WM Polar center of arc (angle)
WMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ANp Angle to the previous element
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 451
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Chamfer/rounding arc in XY plane
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G171, G172 or G173.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
452 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Circle in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G374 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XM, YM Figure center
RRadius
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 453
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Rectangle in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G375 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XM, YM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
K Length
BWidth
BR Rounding arc
454 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Polygon in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G377 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XM, YM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
Ki Width across flats (inscribed circle diameter)
BR Rounding arc
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 455
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Linear slot in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G371 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XM, YM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
K Length
BWidth
456 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Circular slot in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G372 or G373 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of figure
XM, YM Figure center
A Starting angle (reference: X axis)
W End angle (reference: X axis)
R Curvature radius (reference: center point path of the
slot)
Q2 Direction of rotation
CW
CCW
BWidth
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 457
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Hole in XY plane
This hole defines a single hole that can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters reference
dimension, spindle angle, and limit diameter. The section code is
omitted for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and hole depth (–1*BT).
A G370 with the parameters of the hole.
A G309.
Reference data of hole
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of the hole
XM, YM Center of hole
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
UDepth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
GA Thread type (right-hand/left-hand)
0: Right-hand thread
1: Left-hand thread
458 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Linear pattern in XY plane
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G471 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of pattern
X, Y 1st point of pattern
QP Number of points in pattern
IP, JP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
IPi, JPi Distance between two pattern points (in X or Y direction)
AP Position angle
RP Total length of pattern
RPi Distance between two pattern points
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 459
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Circular pattern in XY plane
Reference data: (siehe „Reference data in XY plane” auf Seite 446)
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G472 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data in XY plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
IR Limit diameter
ZR Reference dimension
Parameters of pattern
X, Y Center of pattern
QP Number of points in pattern
DR Direction of rotation (default: 0)
DR=0, without EP: Figures are arranged on a full circle
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer
circular arc
DR=0, with EPi: The algebraic sign of EPi defines the
direction (EPi<0: clockwise)
DR=1, with EP: clockwise
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
AP Starting angle (default: 0°)
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally
divided into 360°)
EPi Angle between two figures
H Element position
0: Normal position—the figures are rotated about the
circle center (rotation)
1: Original position—the position of the figures
relative to the coordinate system remains unchanged
(translation)
460 ICP programming
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Single surface in XY plane
This function defines a surface in the XY plane.
You can switch between depth (Ki) and residual depth (K) by pressing
a soft key (see table at right).
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameter contour name.
A G376 with the parameters of the single surface.
A G309.
Soft key
Switches the field to entering the
residual depth K.
Reference data of the single surface
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle (position angle of the surface normal)
IR Limit diameter
Parameters of the single surface
Z Reference edge
Ki Depth
K Residual depth
B Width (reference: reference dimension ZR)
B<0: Surface in negative Z direction
B>0: Surface in positive Z direction
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 461
5.14 Contours in the XY plane
Centric polygon in XY plane
This function defines polygonal surfaces in the XY plane.
You can switch between edge length (Ki) and width across flats (K) by
pressing a soft key (see table at right).
You can find the reference dimension ZR and the limit diameter IR
with the "select reference plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The FACE_Y section code with the parameters limit diameter,
reference dimension and spindle angle. The section code is omitted
for nested contours.
A G308 with the parameter contour name.
A G477 with the parameters of the polygon.
A G309.
Soft key
Switches the field to entering the
width across flats K.
Reference data of the polygon
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle (position angle of the surface normal)
IR Limit diameter
Parameters of the polygon
Z Reference edge
Q Number of sides (Q>=2)
K Width across flats
Ki Length of edge
B Width (reference: reference dimension ZR)
B<0: Surface in negative Z direction
B>0: Surface in positive Z direction
462 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
In smart.Turn, ICP provides the following contours for machining with
the Y axis:
Complex contours defined with individual contour elements
Figures
Holes
Pattern of figures or holes
Single surface
Polygon
Enter the dimensions of the YZ plane contour elements in Cartesian or
polar values. You can switch between them by pressing a soft key
(see table). You can mix Cartesian coordinates and polar coordinates
to define a point.
Reference data in YZ plane
The reference data is followed by the contour definition with individual
contour elements.
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G309 at the end of the contour description.
Soft keys for polar coordinates
Switches the field to entering the
angle W.
Switches the field to entering the
radius P.
Reference data of milling operations
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 463
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
TURN PLUS attributes
In the TURN PLUS attributes you can define settings for the automatic
program generation (AWG).
Parameters for defining the starting point
HC Milling/drilling attribute:
1: Contour milling
2: Pocket milling
3: Area milling
4: Deburring
5: Engraving
6: Contour milling and deburring
7: Pocket milling and deburring
14: Do not machine
QF Milling location:
0: On the contour
1: Inside/left
2: Outside/right
HF Direction:
0: Up-cut milling
1: Climb milling
DF Cutter diameter
WF Angle of the chamfer
BR Chamfer width
RB Retraction plane
464 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Starting point of contour in YZ plane
Enter the coordinates for the starting point and target point in the first
contour element of the contour. Entering the starting point is only
possible in the first contour element. In subsequent contour elements,
the starting point results from the previous contour element in each
case.
Press the Contour menu key.
Press the Insert element soft key.
Specify the starting point.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G180.
Vertical lines in YZ plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G181.
Parameters for defining the starting point
YS, ZS Starting point of contour
W Polar starting point of contour (angle)
P Polar starting point of contour (radius)
Parameters
Y Target point
Yi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 465
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Horizontal lines in YZ plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G181.
Parameters
Z Target point
Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
L Length of line
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
466 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Line at angle in YZ plane
Select the line direction.
Enter the line dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
In smart.Turn, ICP generates a G181.
Parameters
Y, Z Target point
Yi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
P Polar target point
AN Angle to Z axis (for direction of angle, see help graphic)
L Length of line
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
ANp Angle to the previous element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 467
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Circular arc in YZ plane
Select the arc’s direction of rotation.
Enter the arc dimensions and define the transition to the next contour
element.
ICP generates a G182 or G183 in smart.Turn.
Parameters
Y, Z Target point (end point of the circular arc)
Yi, Zi Incremental target point (distance from starting point to
target point)
P Polar target point (radius)
Pi Incremental polar target point (distance from starting point
to target point)
W Polar target point (angle)
Wi Incremental polar target point and angle (relative to the
starting point)
J, K Center of arc
Ji, Ki Incremental center of arc (distance from starting point to
center in X, Z)
PM Polar center of arc
PMi Incremental polar center of arc (distance from starting
point to center)
WM Polar center of arc (angle)
WMi Incremental polar center and angle (relative to the starting
point)
R Radius
ANs Tangential angle in the starting point
ANe Tangential angle in the target point
ANp Angle to the previous element
ANn Angle to the subsequent element
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
468 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Chamfer/rounding arc in YZ plane
Select the form elements.
Select a chamfer.
Select rounding arc.
Enter the chamfer width BR or the rounding radius BR.
Chamfer/rounding arc as first element: Enter element position AN.
Chamfers/rounding arcs are defined on contour corners. A "contour
corner" is the point of intersection between the approaching and
departing contour elements. A chamfer or rounding cannot be
calculated until the departing contour element is known.
ICP integrates the chamfer/rounding arc in smart.Turn on the basic
element G181, G182 or G183.
Contour begins with a chamfer or a rounding arc: Enter the
position of the intended corner as starting point. Then, in the form
element menu, select chamfer or rounding arc. Since the introducing
contour element is missing, you enter the element position AN to
clearly define the position of the chamfer or rounding arc.
ICP converts a chamfer or rounding arc at the start of the contour to a
linear or circular element.
Parameters
BR Chamfer width/rounding radius
AN Element position
F: See machining attributes on Seite 375
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 469
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Circle in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G384 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
YM, ZM Figure center
R Radius
470 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Rectangle in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G385 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
YM, ZM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
K Length
BWidth
BR Rounding arc
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 471
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Polygon in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G387 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
YM, ZM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
Q Number of corners
K Length of edge
Ki Width across flats (inscribed circle diameter)
BR Rounding arc
472 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Linear slot in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G381 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
YM, ZM Figure center
A Position angle (reference: X axis)
K Length
BWidth
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 473
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Circular slot in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth.
A G382 or G383 with the parameters of the figure.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of figure
YM, ZM Figure center
A Starting angle (reference: X axis)
W End angle (reference: X axis)
R Curvature radius (reference: center point path of the
slot)
Q2 Direction of rotation
CW
CCW
BWidth
474 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Hole in YZ plane
This hole defines a single hole that can contain the following elements:
Centering
Core hole
Countersink
Thread
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and hole depth (–1*BT).
A G380 with the parameters of the hole.
A G309.
Reference data of hole
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of the hole
YM, ZM Center of hole
Centering
O Diameter
Hole
B Diameter
BT Depth
W Angle
Countersink
R Diameter
U Depth
E Sinking angle
Thread
GD Diameter
GT Depth
K Run-out length
F Thread pitch
GA Thread type (right-hand/left-hand)
0: Right-hand thread
1: Left-hand thread
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 475
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Linear pattern in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G481 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of pattern
Y, Z 1st point of pattern
QP Number of points in pattern
JP, KP End point of pattern (Cartesian coordinates)
JPi, KPi Distance between two pattern points (in Y or Z direction)
AP Position angle
RP Total length of pattern
RPi Distance between two pattern points
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
476 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Circular pattern in YZ plane
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameters contour name and milling depth or hole
depth (–1*BT).
A G482 with the parameters of the pattern.
The G function and the parameters of the figure/hole.
A G309.
Reference data in YZ plane
ID Contour name
PT Milling depth
C Spindle angle
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of pattern
Y, Z Center of pattern
QP Number of points in pattern
DR Direction of rotation (default: 0)
DR=0, without EP: Figures are arranged on a full circle
DR=0, with EP: Figures are arranged on the longer
circular arc
DR=0, with EPi: The algebraic sign of EPi defines the
direction (EPi<0: clockwise)
DR=1, with EP: clockwise
DR=1, with EPi: clockwise (algebraic sign of EPi has
no effect)
DR=2, with EP: counterclockwise
DR=2, with EPi: counterclockwise (algebraic sign of
EPi has no effect)
DP Pattern diameter
AP Starting angle (default: 0°)
EP End angle (no entry: the pattern elements are equally
divided into 360°)
EPi Angle between two figures
H Element position
0: Normal position—the figures are rotated about the
circle center (rotation)
1: Original position—the position of the figures
relative to the coordinate system remains unchanged
(translation)
Parameters of the selected figure/hole
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 477
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Single surface in YZ plane
This function defines a surface in the YZ plane.
You can switch between depth (Ki) and residual depth (K) by pressing
a soft key (see table at right).
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameter contour name.
A G386 with the parameters of the single surface.
A G309.
Soft key
Switches the field to entering the
residual depth K.
Reference data of the single surface
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle (position angle of the surface normal)
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of the single surface
Z Reference edge
Ki Depth
K Residual depth
B Width (reference: reference dimension ZR)
B<0: Surface in negative Z direction
B>0: Surface in positive Z direction
478 ICP programming
5.15 Contours in the YZ plane
Centric polygons in YZ plane
This function defines centric polygons in the YZ plane.
You can switch between edge length (Ki) and width across flats (K) by
pressing a soft key (see table at right).
You can find the reference diameter XR with the "select reference
plane" function (siehe Seite 425).
ICP generates:
The LATERAL_Y section code with the parameters reference
diameter and spindle angle. The section code is omitted for nested
contours.
A G308 with the parameter contour name.
A G487 with the parameters of the polygon.
A G309.
Soft key
Switches the field to entering the
width across flats K.
Reference data of the polygon
ID Contour name
C Spindle angle (position angle of the surface normal)
XR Reference diameter
Parameters of the polygon
Z Reference edge
Q Number of sides (Q>=2)
K Width across flats
Ki Length of edge
B Width (reference: reference dimension ZR)
B<0: Surface in negative Z direction
B>0: Surface in positive Z direction
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 479
5.16 Loading existing contours
5.16 Loading existing contours
Integrating cycle contours in smart.Turn
ICP contours that you have created for cycle programs can be
loaded in smart.Turn. ICP converts the contours into G commands and
integrates them in the smart.Turn program. The contour is now part of
the smart.Turn program.
The ICP editor considers the type of contour. For example, you can
load a contour defined for the face only if you have selected the face
(C axis) in smart.Turn.
Activate the ICP editor.
Press the Contour list soft key. The ICP editor
opens the window "Selection of ICP contours."
Press the Next file type soft key until the cycle
contours are displayed (see file extension table at
right).
Select the file.
Load the selected file.
Blank or finished part contour: Supplement or adapt the
contour, if necessary.
C-axis contour: Complete the reference data.
Extension Group
*.gmi Turning contours
*.gmr Contours of workpiece blanks
*.gms Milling contours on face
*.gmm Milling contours on lateral surface
480 ICP programming
5.16 Loading existing contours
DXF contours (option)
Contours that exist in DXF format are imported with the ICP editor.
You can use DXF contours both for cycle operation and for smart.Turn.
Requirements of a DXF contour:
Only two-dimensional elements
The contour must be in a separate layer (without dimension lines,
without wraparound edges, etc.).
Depending on the setup of the lathe, contours for turning operations
must be either in front of or behind the workpiece.
No complete circles, no splines, no DXF blocks (macros), etc.
Contour preparation during DXF import: Since the DXF format is
fundamentally different from the ICP format, the contour is converted
from DXF to ICP format during the import. The process makes the
following changes:
Polylines are transformed into linear elements.
Gaps between contour elements that are < 0.01 mm are closed.
Open contours are described "from right to left" (starting point:
right).
The starting point on closed contours is specified according to
internal rules.
The rotational direction for closed contours is counterclockwise.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 481
5.16 Loading existing contours
Activate the ICP editor.
Press the Contour list soft key. The ICP editor
opens the window "Selection of ICP contours."
Press the Next file typesoft key until the DXF
contours are displayed (see file extension "*.DXF").
Select the file.
Open the selected file.
Select the DXF layer.
Load the selected contour.
Blank or finished part contour: Supplement or adapt the
contour, if necessary.
C-axis or Y-axis contour: Complete the reference data.
482 ICP programming
5.16 Loading existing contours
Graphic simulation
484 Graphic simulation
6.1 Simulation mode of operation
6.1 Simulation mode of operation
Press this soft key to start a graphic simulation from the
following operating modes:
smart.Turn
Program Run
Teach-in
Manual Operation (cycles)
When called from the smart.Turn mode, the graphic simulation opens
the large simulation window and loads the selected program. When
you call the simulation from the Machine modes of operation, either
the small simulation window or the last window you used is opened.
Large simulation window
Menu bar for controlling the simulation through the numeric keypad
Simulation window: Displays the workpieces and the tool
movements. The simulation supports the simultaneous display of
multiple views in the simulation window. Use the window selection
function from the miscellaneous functions menu to select the
following views:
XZ view (turning view)
XC view (face view)
ZC view (lateral surface)
YZ view (for operations with the Y axis)
Displays:
NC program blocks
NC block number, position values and tool information
Name of the NC program
Small simulation window:
The machine display fields and the cycle dialog are not hidden and
remain visible during the simulation of cycle programs.
In the smart.Turn operating mode, the machine display is not
hidden.
You can set the following views by soft key:
XZ view (turning view)
XC view (face view)
ZC view (unrolled lateral surface)
In the Program Run, Teach-in and Manual modes of
operation, the simulation is started automatically for the
current program. In smart.Turn, the program is only
loaded. Press the soft key to start the simulation.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 485
6.1 Simulation mode of operation
Using the graphic simulation
The simulation is controlled by soft keys in all operating states. In
addition, you can always use the menu keys (numeric keys) to control
the simulation, even in the small simulation window, when the menu
bar is not visible.
Large and small simulation window
This menu item switches between the small and
large simulation window, even if the menu bar is not
visible.
3-D view in Smart.Turn
This menu item switches to the 3-D view.
With the other menu items and the soft keys listed in the table, you
define the sequence of the simulation, activate the magnify function,
or use the miscellaneous functions to make settings for the
simulation.
Soft keys with active simulation window
For calling warnings. If the interpreter
issues warnings during simulation
(e.g. "Material remains unmachined"),
the soft key is activated and the
number of warnings is shown. Each
time the soft key is pressed, it
switches to the next warning.
In the "Continuous Run" mode, all
cycles of the program are simulated in
the program run mode without
stopping.
In the Single Block mode, the
simulation stops after each movement
(basic block).
Opens the soft-key menu for the zoom
functions and displays the zoom frame
(siehe „Adjusting the visible section”
auf Seite 493).
Switches the menu and the soft-key
row over to the miscellaneous
functions.
Starting and stopping with soft keys
Starts the simulation from the beginning. The soft
key switches to the stop symbol; you can now use
the soft key to stop and resume the simulation,
depending on the simulation status.
Resumes a stopped simulation (Single Block mode).
The soft key indicates that a simulation is running at
present. Pressing the soft key stops the simulation.
Starting and stopping with menu keys
Starts the simulation from the beginning.
Resumes a stopped simulation (Single Block mode).
The key indicates that a simulation is running at
present. Pressing the key stops the simulation.
You can operate the simulation with the numeric keys
even if the menu bar is not visible.
In the Machine modes of operation, use the numeric
key [5] to switch between the small and large simulation
windows.
486 Graphic simulation
6.1 Simulation mode of operation
The miscellaneous functions
You use the miscellaneous functions to select the simulation
window, to determine how the tool path is depicted, or to call the time
calculation.
The tables provide you with an overview of the menu and soft-key
functions.
In the Machine modes of operation, an activation of the
Single Block soft key is also effective in automatic
mode.
In the Machine modes of operation, you can start
automatic program run directly from the simulation by
pressing Cycle on.
Soft keys for the miscellaneous functions
Switches between wire-frame
graphics and cutting-path graphics.
Switches between light-dot and
cutting-edge view.
Activates the 2-D material-removal
graphic.
Selects the view.
Switches the focus to the next
window (siehe „Multiple window
view” auf Seite 488).
Overview of the "miscellaneous functions" menu
Selects the simulation window (siehe „Simulation
window” auf Seite 487).
Activates a startup-block search (siehe „Simulation
with mid-program startup” auf Seite 495).
Calls the time calculation (siehe „Time calculation”
auf Seite 497).
Switches between the large and the small simulation
window (siehe „Using the graphic simulation” auf
Seite 485).
Switches between the single and multiple window
display (siehe „Multiple window view” auf
Seite 488).
Saves the contour (siehe „Saving the contour” auf
Seite 498).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 487
6.2 Simulation window
6.2 Simulation window
Setting up the views
With the simulation windows described in the following you check not
only the turning work but also the drilling and milling operations.
XZ view (turning view): The turning contour is depicted in the XZ
coordinate system. The configured coordinate system is taken into
account (tool carrier in front of/behind the turning center, vertical
lathes).
XC view (face view): The displayed coordinate system is a
Cartesian system with the axis designations XK (horizontal) and YK
(vertical). The angle position C=0° is on the XK axis, the positive
direction of rotation is counterclockwise.
ZC view (lateral surface view): The contour display and traverse-
path display are oriented to the position on the unrolled lateral
surface and the Z coordinates. The upper and lower lines of this
workpiece correspond to the angular positions C=-180°/+180°,
respectively. All drilling and milling operations are within the range -
180° to +180°.
Cycle program or DIN program with workpiece blank
definition: The basis for the unrolled workpiece surface is the
dimensions of the programmed workpiece blank.
Cycle program or DIN program without workpiece blank
definition: The basis for the unrolled workpiece surface is the
dimensions of the "standard blank" (user parameter: "simulation >
definition of the standard workpiece blank size").
Single cycle or Teach-In: The basis of the unrolled workpiece
surface is the section defined by the respective cycle (expansion
in Z and limiting diameter X).
YZ view (side view): The contour and traverse path are shown in
the YZ plane. The side view depicts only the Y and Z coordinates—
not the spindle position.
Front face and surface windows operate with a fixed
spindle position. Whereas the machine turns the
workpiece, the graphic simulation moves the tool.
488 Graphic simulation
6.2 Simulation window
Single-window view
Single-window view
Only one view is shown in the small simulation window. You switch
the view with the Main view soft key. You can also use this soft key
when only one view is set in the large simulation window.
With cycle programs, you can activate the face or lateral surface view
only when the C axis is used in the program.
Multiple window view
Activating the multiple window view (possible only in the large
simulation window):
Switch the menu bar to "Miscellaneous functions."
Select the "Window" menu item (in the large
simulation window).
Set the desired window combination.
Set the path display in the auxiliary windows.
Path display in supplementary windows: The front face window,
lateral surface window, and YZ view are considered supplementary
windows. The following setting specifies whether the simulation
depicts traverse paths in the windows.
Automatic: The simulation displays traverse paths if the C axis has
been oriented or a G17 or G19 has been executed. G18 or a C axis
out of orientation stops output of the traverse paths.
Always: The simulation shows the traverse path in all simulation
windows.
In the multiple window view, a window is indicated with a green
frame. This window has the "focus," which means that magnification
settings and other functions apply to this window.
Switching the focus
Press the soft key (or the GOTO key) several times
until the focus is on the desired window.
Switching between the single and multiple window display:
Select the menu item (or the decimal point key) to
switch from the multiple-window to single-window
view. The window with the green frame is shown as
a single window view.
Pressing the menu item again (or the decimal key)
switches back to the multiple window view.
Main view soft key
Select the view:
Turning view XZ
Face view XC
Lateral surface view ZC
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 489
6.3 Views
6.3 Views
Traverse path display
Rapid traverse paths are shown as a broken white line.
Feed paths are displayed either as a line or as a cutting trace,
depending on the soft-key setting:
Line display: A solid line describes the path of the theoretical tool
tip (wire-frame graphics). The wire frame display is particularly
convenient if you only need a quick overview of the proportioning of
cuts. The path of the theoretical tool tip, however, is not identical
with the contour of the workpiece. This view is therefore not as
suitable if you wish to run a thorough check of the machined
contour. This "falsification" is compensated by the cutting radius
compensation.
Cutting path display: The simulation uses hatch marking to depict
the surface covered by the cutting area of the tool. The cutting path
graphic accounts for the exact geometry of the tool tip (cutting
radius, cutting width, tool-tip position, etc.). You can check in the
simulation whether the contour is machined completely or needs to
be reworked, whether the contour is damaged by the tool or
overlaps are too large. The cutting path graphics is especially useful
for recessing or drilling operations as well as for machining slopes
where the tool shape has an essential influence on the accuracy of
the resulting workpiece.
Activating the cutting path graphics:
With the soft key activated, the cutting paths of
traverse are shown.
The "Simulation/General settings/Traverse delay" user
parameters are used to influence the simulation speed.
490 Graphic simulation
6.3 Views
Tool depiction
You adjust by soft key whether the tool cutting edge or the light dot is
shown (see table at right).
The tool cutting edge is shown with the correct angles and cutting
radius, as defined in the tool database.
Light dot view: A white square (light dot) is shown at the currently
programmed position. The light dot represents the position of the
imaginary cutting edge.
Depicting the tool holder during machining simulation
The control can depict the associated tool holder with the
corresponding dimensions in addition to the tool's cutting edge. The
requirements for this are:
Creating a new tool holder in the holder editor or selecting an
existing holder
Describing the tool holder with the required parameters (type,
dimensions and position)
The appropriate tool holder must be assigned to the tool (HID)
Material-removal graphic
The material-removal graphic shows the workpiece blank as a "filled
surface." When the tool tip passes through the workpiece blank, the
workpiece area covered by the tool is erased in the graphic.
The material-removal graphic mode shows all paths of traverse
according to the programmed speed. The 2-D material-removal
graphic mode is only available in turning view (XZ). You activate this
type of simulation by soft key (see table at right).
Soft keys for miscellaneous functions
Switches between wire-frame
graphics and cutting-path graphics.
Switches between light-dot and
cutting-edge view.
Soft keys for miscellaneous functions
Activates the 2-D material-removal
graphic.
Menu for the material-removal graphic
Slows the material-removal
graphic.
Material removal graphic at the
programmed feed rate.
Accelerates the material-removal
graphic.
You can change the speed of simulation in the material-
removal graphic by using the keys in the table at right.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 491
6.3 Views
3-D view
The 3-D view menu item switches to a perspective
view and shows the programmed finished part.
With the 3-D view, you can display the blank and the finished part with
all turning operations, milling contours, drilling and boring operations
as well as threads in a solid-model view. Tilted Y planes and machining
operations referenced to them, such as pockets or patterns, are also
displayed correctly by the CNC PILOT.
The CNC PILOT depicts milling contours depending on the parameter
HC: Milling/drilling attribute defined in G308. If you have selected
the "contour milling," "pocket milling" or "area milling" values in this
parameter, the graphic shows the respective 3-D elements. If other
values are specified in the HC parameter or if values are missing, the
control depicts the described milling contour as a blue line.
Elements that cannot be calculated by the CNC PILOT are displayed
as an orange line; for example, if an open milling contour is
programmed as a pocket.
With the soft keys and the menu functions you can influence the
display of the workpiece.
Check mode
The check mode enables you to verify the correct positioning of holes
and milling contours, for example.
In the check mode the CNC PILOT displays turning contours in gray,
and drilling and milling contours in yellow. For a better overview, the
control shows all contours as transparent.
The finished part contour programmed in the FINISHED
section is shown in the graphic regardless of the
machining operation in the NC program.
You can cancel the calculation of the 3-D view by pressing
the ESC key or the Cancel soft key.
492 Graphic simulation
6.3 Views
Rotating the 3-D view with the menu functions
With the menu functions you rotate the graphic around the displayed
axes (see table at right). The "perspective view" soft key resets the
graphic to its initial condition.
Rotating and moving the 3-D view with the mouse
With the right mouse button pressed you can move the displayed
workpiece as required.
When you press and hold the left mouse button, you can do the
following:
Vertical movement in the simulation window: Tilts the workpiece
forward or backward
Horizontal movement in the simulation window: Rotates the
workpiece horizontally around its own axis
Horizontal or vertical movement at the edge of the simulation
window (gray border): Rotates the workpiece clockwise or
counterclockwise
Movement in any direction: Rotates the workpiece in any direction.
Soft keys for 3-D view
Displays the finished part and the
programmed workpiece blank.
Displays the finished part and the
updated workpiece blank.
Activates/Deactivates the check
mode
Displays a section view.
Selects the side view. Rotates
the side view by 90°.
Selects the perspective view.
Menu for the 3-D view
Tilt the graphic backward.
Rotate the graphic horizontally in the
indicated direction.
Rotate the graphic horizontally in the
indicated direction.
Rotate the graphic counterclockwise.
Tilt the graphic forward.
Rotate the graphic clockwise.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 493
6.4 The zoom function
6.4 The zoom function
Adjusting the visible section
Press this soft key to activate the zoom function. With the
zoom menu, you can modify the section displayed in the
simulation window. As an alternative to the soft keys, you
can use the arrow keys and the PgDn and PgUp keys to change the
visible section.
For cycle programs, and when a program is simulated for the first
time, CNC PILOT automatically selects the displayed section. When
you simulate the same smart.Turn program again, the last selected
section is used.
In the multiple window view, the zoom function applies to the window
with a green frame.
Modifying the section by using keys
You can use the following keys to change the visible section without
opening the zoom function:
Soft keys in the zoom menu
Deletes all traverse paths drawn so
far.
The workpiece blank regeneration is
active, the workpiece blank is
updated and redrawn.
Closes the zoom menu.
Extends the displayed section directly
(zoom –).
Switches back to the standard screen
section and closes the zoom menu.
Switches to the last section selected.
Applies the area selected by the red
frame as the new section and closes
the zoom menu.
Closes the zoom menu without
changing the selected section.
Keys for modifying the displayed section
The arrow keys move the workpiece in the
indicated direction.
Reduces the displayed workpiece (zoom –).
Magnifies the displayed workpiece (zoom +).
494 Graphic simulation
6.4 The zoom function
Modifying the section with the zoom menu
When you activate the zoom menu, a red frame is shown in the
simulation window. This red frame indicates the zoom area, which
you can select using the Take over soft key or the Enter key. Use
the following keys to change the frame size and position:
Keys for modifying the red frame
The arrow keys move the red frame in the indicated
direction.
Reduces the size of the red frame.
Increases the size of the red frame.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 495
6.5 Simulation with mid-program startup
6.5 Simulation with mid-program
startup
Startup block with smart.Turn programs
smart.Turn programs are always simulated from the first block,
regardless of which block the cursor is in. If you use the mid-program
startup, the simulation suppresses the display up to the startup block.
If there is a workpiece blank, the simulation scans the blocks up to this
position, updates the blank and redraws it.
The simulation then draws the traverse paths starting from the startup
block.
Activating a mid-program startup:
Switch the menu bar to "Miscellaneous functions."
Select the "Start block" menu item.
Enter the number of the startup block and confirm.
Go back to the main menu of the simulation.
Start the simulation. The CNC PILOT scans the NC
program up to the startup block, regenerates the
blank and stops at this position.
Continue the simulation.
The block number for startup is shown in the lowest line of the display.
The field for the startup block and the block number in the display have
a yellow background as long as the simulation is conducting the mid-
program startup.
Mid-program startup remains on even if you cancel the simulation. If
you restart the simulation after cancelation, it stops at the section
code MACHINING. This enables you to change settings before
continuing the simulation.
Soft keys for mid-program startup
Loads the NC block number in the
display as the startup block.
Switches off the mid-program startup.
Loads the defined startup block and
activates the mid-program startup.
Cancels the mid-program startup.
496 Graphic simulation
6.5 Simulation with mid-program startup
Mid-program startup in cycle programs
For cycle programs, you first place the cursor on a cycle and then call
the simulation. The simulation begins with this cycle. All previous
cycles are ignored.
The Start block menu item is deactivated for cycle programs.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 497
6.6 Time calculation
6.6 Time calculation
Showing the machining times
During simulation, the machining and idle-machine times are
calculated. The machining times, idle times and total times are shown
in the "Time calculation" table (green: machining times; yellow: idle
times). If you are working with cycle programs, each cycle is shown in
a separate line. In DIN programs, each line represents the use of a
new tool (for each tool call with T).
If there are more table entries than fit on a screen page, you can call
further time data with the arrow keys and the PgUp/PgDn keys.
Calling the machining times:
Switch the menu bar to "Miscellaneous functions."
Call the time calculation.
498 Graphic simulation
6.7 Saving the contour
6.7 Saving the contour
Saving the generated contour in the simulation
You can save a contour generated in the simulation and read it into
smart.Turn. In smart.Turn, you insert into the program the workpiece
blank and finished part contour that you generated during simulation.
Select the "Insert contour" function on the "ICP" menu.
Example: You describe the blank form and finished part and simulate
machining of the first setup. Then you save the machined contour and
use it for the second setup.
During contour generation, the simulation saves:
BLANK: The simulated contour's state of progress
FINISHED PART: The programmed finished part
The simulation takes into account a shift of the workpiece zero point
and/or a mirror image.
Saving the contour:
Select "miscellaneous functions" soft key
Select the "Misc." menu
Select the "Save contour" menu
The control opens a dialog box enabling you to define the following
input fields:
Unit: Contour description metric or in inches
Shift: Shifting the workpiece zero point
Mirroring: Mirror/do not mirror the contours
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 499
Tool and technology
database
500 Tool and technology database
7.1 Tool database
7.1 Tool database
You usually program the coordinates for the contour by taking the
dimensions from the drawing. To enable the CNC PILOT to calculate
the slide path, compensate the cutting radius and determine the
number of cutting passes, you need to enter the tool length, cutting
radius, tool angle, etc.
The CNC PILOT can save tool data for up to 250 tools (optionally 999),
whereby each tool is identified with a number (ID code). The tool list
indicates the maximum number of tool data records and the number
of data records found. For each tool, you can enter an additional tool
description which makes it easier to find the tool data again when
needed.
The Machine mode has functions for determining the tool length
dimensions (see “Tool measurement” auf Seite 103).
Wear compensation is managed separately. This allows you to enter
new compensation values at any time, even during program run.
You can also assign a cutting material to the tools, which gives you
direct access to the technology database (feed rate, cutting speed).
This saves you a lot of time since you only need to determine and
enter the cutting data once.
Tool types
Tools for drilling, recessing, finishing, etc., have very different shapes.
Therefore, the reference points for determining the tool length and
other tool data also vary.
The following table provides an overview of the tool types.
Tool types To ol t yp e s
Standard turning tools (Seite 519)
Roughing tools
Finishing tools
NC center drills (Seite 523)
Button tools (Seite 519) Centering tools (Seite 524)
Recessing tools (Seite 520)
Recessing tools
Parting tools
Recess-turning tools
Counterbores (Seite 525)
Countersinks (Seite 526)
Thread-cutting tools (Seite 521) Standard milling tools (Seite 528)
Twist drills (Seite 522) Thread mills (Seite 529)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 501
7.1 Tool database
Multipoint tools
A multipoint tool is a tool with multiple cutting edges or multiple
reference points. A data record is created for every cutting edge or
every reference point. Then all data records of the multipoint tool are
linked together (siehe „Editing multipoint tools” auf Seite 507).
For every data record of a multipoint tool, the position within the
multipoint tool chain is shown in the tool list in the column "MU."
Counting starts from 0.
In the turret list, multipoint tools are displayed with all cutting edges
and reference points.
The figure at right shows a tool with two reference points.
Tool life management
The CNC PILOT can count either the machining time of a tool (i.e. the
time a tool is traversed at the programmed feed rate) or the number
of parts that were produced with that tool. These two options are used
for tool life management.
As soon as the tool life expires or the programmed quantity is reached,
the system sets the diagnostic bit 1. This causes an error message to
be issued the next time the tool is called. If no replacement tool is
available, the program run is stopped.
To finish the workpiece currently being produced, press NC Start.
Indexable-insert drills (Seite 522) Angle cutters (Seite 530)
Taps (Seite 527) Milling pins (Seite 531)
Knurling tool (Seite 531) Touch probes (Seite 533)
Stopper tool (Seite 534) Grippers (Seite 535)
To ol t yp e s To ol t yp e s
502 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
7.2 Tool editor
Sorting and filtering the tool list
In the tool list, the CNC PILOT displays important parameters and the
tool descriptions. You can recognize the tool type and the tool
orientation from the provided sketch of the tool point.
You can navigate within the tool list with the arrow keys and PgUp/PgDn
to check the entries.
Displaying the entries of only one tool type
Press the soft key and select the tool type in the
following soft-key rows.
The CNC PILOT creates a list containing only tools of the selected
type.
Filtering the tool list
Press the More filters soft key.
Press the Filter orientatn. soft key. The CNC
PILOT switches the display between tools of the
selected orientation.
Press the Filter assignment soft key. The CNC
PILOT switches between tools in the tool carrier
(turret) and unassigned tools.
Press the Filter details soft key. The CNC PILOT
displays a pop-up window containing the available
selection criteria.
Define the filter criteria.
Press the OK soft key.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 503
7.2 Tool editor
Clearing filters
Press the Filter off soft key.
The CNC PILOT clears the selected filters and displays the complete
tool list.
Sorting the tool list
Press the View soft key.
The tool list switches between sorting by ID number
and by tool type (and orientation).
The tool list switches between ascending and
descending sorting.
Searching for tools by ID number
Enter the first few letters or digits of the ID number.
The CNC PILOT jumps to the desired ID number in the open list.
504 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
Editing the tool data
Adding a new tool
Press the soft key
Select the tool type (see soft-key table at right).
The CNC PILOT opens the input window.
First assign the ID number (1 to 16 places, alphanumeric) and
specify the tool orientation.
Enter further parameters.
Assign a tool text (see Seite 506).
Creating new tools by copying
Place the cursor on the desired entry.
Press the soft key. The CNC PILOT opens the input
window with the tool data.
Enter a new ID number. Check and edit the other tool data.
Press the soft key. The new tool is added to the
database.
Editing the tool data
Place the cursor on the desired entry.
Press the soft key. The tool parameters are provided
for editing.
Delete entry
Place the cursor on the entry to be deleted.
Press the soft key and answer Yes to the confirmation
prompt.
Soft keys for tool organization
Opens the following type selection for
adding a new tool.
Special tools:
Type selection for special drilling tools:
Type selection for special milling tools:
Type selection for handling systems
and touch probes:
Opens the dialog box for the selected
tool.
Copies the selected tool and creates a
new tool with the copied data.
Deletes the selected tool after you
confirm a dialog prompt from the
database.
Opens the technology editor (see
Seite 536).
The CNC PILOT does not show the help graphics for
individual parameters until the tool orientation is known.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 505
7.2 Tool editor
Tool control graphics
When the tool dialog box is open, the CNC PILOT provides a control
graphic with which you can check the entered tools. Press the
Graphic soft key.
The CNC PILOT generates the displayed tool from the entered
parameters. The tool control graphic enables you to check the entered
data. Changes become effective as soon you exit the input field.
506 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
Tool texts
Tool texts are assigned to the tools and displayed in the tool list. The
CNC PILOT manages the tool texts in a separate list.
Connections:
The descriptions are managed in the tool text list. Each entry is
preceded by a "QT number."
The parameter "Tool text QT" contains the reference number for the
"tool text" list. The text indicated by QT is then displayed in the tool
list.
When the tool dialog box is open, CNC PILOT lets you enter tool texts.
Press the Tool texts soft key.
You can define up to 999 tool texts of max. 80 characters length.
Soft keys in tool list
Generates a new line in the text list
and opens it for text input.
Opens the selected tool text for
editing. Press ENTER to confirm.
Copies the currently selected tool text
to a new text line. This creates a new
tool text.
Transfers the text number to the tool
dialog box as a reference and exits the
tool text editor.
Deletes the selected tool text after a
confirmation prompt.
Closes the tool text editor and returns
to the tool dialog box without applying
any changes to the text references.
New texts are inserted in the next free line after the
cursor position.
When deleting and editing a tool text, please remember
that the text might be used for more than one tool.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 507
7.2 Tool editor
Editing multipoint tools
Creating multipoint tools
For each cutting edge, or each reference point, make a separate data
record with the tool description.
In the tool list, place the cursor on the data record for the first cutting
edge.
Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor considers this
cutting edge to be the main cutting edge (MU=0).
Place the cursor on the data record for the next cutting edge.
Press the soft key. The tool editor adds this cutting
edge to the multipoint tool chain.
Select a location for the next cutting edge.
Repeat these steps for any further cutting edges of the multipoint tool.
Press the soft key.
508 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
Removing a cutting edge from the multipoint tool
Place the cursor on a cutting edge of the multipoint tool.
Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor lists all cutting
edges of the multipoint tool.
Select the cutting edge.
Remove the cutting edge from the multipoint tool
chain.
Removing complete multipoint tools
Place the cursor on a cutting edge of the multipoint tool.
Press the soft key.
Press the soft key. The tool editor lists all cutting
edges of the multipoint tool.
Place the cursor on the cutting edge no. 0 of the
multipoint tool.
The multipoint tool chain is removed.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 509
7.2 Tool editor
Editing tool-life data
The CNC PILOT counts the tool age in RT and the quantity of finished
parts in RZ. When the predefined tool age or the part quantity limit has
been reached, the tool is considered to be worn out.
Setting a limit to tool life
Set the soft key to "Tool life." The tool editor opens
the Tool life MT input field for editing.
Enter the tool life in the "h:mm:ss" format (h=hours; m=minutes;
s=seconds). You can use the cursor keys to switch between hours,
minutes and seconds.
Entering the quantity
Set the soft key to "No. of pieces." The tool editor
opens the No. of pieces MZ input field for editing.
Enter the limit quantity, i.e. the number of workpieces that can be
machined with one cutting edge.
New cutting edge
Insert a new cutting edge.
Call the corresponding data record in the tool editor.
Press the soft key. The tool life/limit quantity is set to
zero and the diagnostic bits are reset.
Tool life monitoring is activated/deactivated in the Tool
life monitoring (siehe „List of user parameters”, Seite
545) user parameter.
The quantity is added when the end of the program has
been reached.
Tool life / quantity monitoring is also continued after a
change of program.
510 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
Diagnostic bits
The diagnostic bits store information about the status of a tool. The
bits are set either by programming in the NC program or automatically
by the tool and load monitoring functions.
The following diagnostic bits are available:
If tool life monitoring or quantity monitoring is active and a diagnostic
bit has been set, the tool concerned will not be re-inserted again
during the program run. If a replacement tool has been defined, the
control inserts it instead. If no replacement tool has been defined or if
the end of the tool sequence of exchange is reached, the NC program
is stopped before the next tool call.
You can reset the diagnostic bits in the tool editor as follows:
Press the EDITING soft key.
Press the NEW CUTTING EDGE soft key.
Bit Meaning
1 Tool life expired or workpiece quantity reached
2 Breakage according to load monitoring (limit value 2 exceeded)
3 Wear according to load monitoring (limit value 1 exceeded)
4 Wear according to load monitoring (total load limit)
5 Wear determined by tool measurement
6 Wear determined by in-process measurement of workpiece
7 Wear determined by post-process measurement of workpiece
8 Cutting edge new = 1 / used = 0
9-15 Vacant
With the New cutting edge soft key, you reset the
diagnostic bits and set bit 8 "Cutting edge new." This bit
will also be reset as soon as the control inserts the tool.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 511
7.2 Tool editor
Manual change systems
A tool holder is designated as a manual change system if it can
accommodate various tool inserts via an integral clamping device.
Most clamping devices designed as polygon coupling enable rapid,
position-precise replacement of tool inserts.
With a manual change system it is possible to insert tools that are not
in the turret during a program run. For this, the control checks whether
the called tool is in the turret or has to be loaded. If a tool change is
required then the control interrupts the program run. After you have
manually loaded the tool insert, confirm the tool change and continue
the program run.
The following steps are necessary for using manual change systems:
Create the tool holder in the holder table
Select the tool holder in the turret assignment
Enter the tool data for the manual change tool
Your machine must be configured by the machine
manufacturer if you want to use manual change systems.
Refer to your machine manual.
512 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
Holder editor
In the "to_hold.hld" holder table, define the holder type and the tool
setting dimensions of the holder. Because the geometric information
is currently only evaluated with holders of the "manual change system"
type, the management of standard tool holders in the holder table is
not required.
Process holder table in the tool editor:
Press the "Other tables" soft key
Open the holder table: Press the "Holder editor" soft
key
The holder table contains the following entries:
NR Line number
HID ID number: Unique holder name (up to 16 characters)
MTS Manual change system:
0: Tool holder
1: Manual change system
ZLH Tool setting dimension in Z
XLH Tool setting dimension in X
YLH Tool setting dimension in Y
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 513
7.2 Tool editor
HC Holder type:
A1: Boring bar holder
B1: Right-hand, short design
B2: Left-hand, short design
B3: Right-hand, short design, overhead
B4: Left-hand, short design, overhead
B5: Right-hand, long design
B6: Left-hand, long design
B7: Right-hand, long design, overhead
B8: Left-hand, long design, overhead
C1: Right-hand
C2: Left-hand
C3: Right-hand, overhead
C4: Left-hand, overhead
D1: Multicarrier
A: Boring bar holder
B: Drill holder with coolant supply
C: Square, longitudinal
D: Square, transverse
E: Rear-face machining
E1: U drill
E2: Cylindrical shank holder
E3: Collet chuck holder
F: Drill holder MK (Morse taper)
K: Drill chuck
T1: Driven, axial
T2: Driven, radial
T3: Boring bar holder
X5: Driven, axial
X6: Driven, radial
MP Tool position in turret:
0: –Z direction
1: –X/–Z direction
2: –X/+Z direction
3: +Z direction
WH Height of holder
WB Height of holder
AT Holder type
514 Tool and technology database
7.2 Tool editor
You can create a new holder with the "New line" soft key. The new line
is always added at the end of the table.
You may only use ASCII characters in the holder table for
holder names. Diacritics or Asian characters are not
permitted.
You can also view and edit the holder table in opened tool
forms. Use the "Holder editor" soft key for this purpose on
the third form page (MTS entry).
If you use tool inserts in various manual change system
holders, you need to manage the tool setting dimensions
of the holder and tool insert separately. Enter the tool
setting dimensions of the tool inserts into the tool table.
Enter the tool setting dimensions of the manual change
system holders in the holder table.
Entries for the standard tool holders are currently not
evaluated. Thus management of the standard tool holders
is not necessary.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 515
7.2 Tool editor
Setting up the holder for manual change systems
Set up the manual change system holder in the turret assignment:
Select turret assignment: Press the "Turret list" soft
key
Select an unassigned turret pocket and press the
"Special functions" soft key
Open the holder table: Press the "Set up the holder"
soft key
Select the holder and press the "Transfer of ID no."
soft key
Selecting the manual change system in the tool data
Define the tool as a manual change tool in the tool data form:
Open the tool data form: Press the "Editing" soft key
On the third form page, select MTS 1: MANUAL CHANGE
TOOL
Confirm the entry by pressing the "Save" soft key
After setting up a holder for a manual change system in
the turret assignment, the first three fields of the specific
line are color-highlighted.
You can remove a manual change system holder again
with the "Remove holder" soft key.
In the turret assignment you can only set up the holder
type MTS 1 (manual change system). With holder type
MTS 0 (standard holder), the control displays an error
message.
If you define a tool as a manual change system, in the tool
list the tool type field (tool symbol) is color-highlighted.
With manual change tools you must not select a HID tool
holder (empty field). Assignment of holder and tool is
implemented via the turret assignment. A manual change
system has to have been set up on the corresponding
turret pocket for this.
With multipoint tools all cutting edges must be assigned
the same MTS input value.
516 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
7.3 Tool data
General tool parameters
The parameters listed in the following table are available for all tool
types. Parameters for specific tool types are described in the later
chapters.
General tool parameters
ID ID number - Name of the tool (up to 16 characters)
TO Tool orientation (for identification number, see graphics)
XL Tool setting dimension in X
ZL Tool setting dimension in Z
DX Wear compensation in X (range: –100 mm < DX < 100 mm)
DZ Wear compensation in Z (range: –100 mm < DZ < 100 mm)
DS Special compensation (range: –100 mm < DZ < 100 mm)
MU Multipoint tool
MD Direction of rotation (default: Not defined)
3: M3
4: M4
Rem. Remaining time / remaining quantity (with tool life monitoring)
Status With tool life monitoring
Diagn. Evaluation of diagnostic bits (with tool life monitoring)
QT (Reference to) tool text
CW C tilting plane angle: Position of the C axis to determine the
work position of the tool (machine-dependent function)
SS Cutting material (name of the cutting material for access to the
technology database)
CK G96 compensation factor (default: 1)
FK G95 compensation factor (default: 1)
DK Depth compensation factor (default: 1)
PLC Additional information (see machine manual)
MT Tool life. Preset value for tool life monitoring (default: not
defined)
MZ No. of pieces. Preset value for tool life monitoring (default: not
defined)
RT Display field for remaining tool life
RZ Display field for remaining no. of pieces
HID ID number: Unique holder name (up to 16 characters)
MTS Manual change system:
0: Tool holder
1: Manual change system
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 517
7.3 Tool data
Description of the tool parameters
Identification number (ID): The CNC PILOT needs a unique name
for each tool. This "ID number" can have up to 16 alphanumeric
characters.
Tool orientation (TO): From the tool orientation, the CNC PILOT
determines the position of the tool tip and, depending on the
selected tool type, additional information such as the tool angle
direction, reference-point position, etc. This information is
necessary, for example, for calculating the cutting radius
compensation, plunge angle, etc.
The setting dimensions (XL, ZL) refer to the tool reference point.
The position of the reference point depends on the tool type (see
graphic support window).
Compensation values (DX, DZ, DS) compensate for the wear of
the cutting edge. For recessing and button tools, DS stands for the
compensation value of the third side of the tool, which is away from
the tool reference point. The cycles automatically shift to the special
compensation. With G148, you can also switch to special
compensation DS for single-path machining operations.
Direction of tool rotation (MD): If you define a direction of rotation,
a switching command (M3 or M4) is automatically generated for the
spindle or, with driven tools, for the auxiliary spindle in all cycles that
use this tool.
Parameters for drilling tools
DV Drill diameter
BW Drill angle: Point angle of the drill
AW Driven tool: This parameter specifies for drilling and tapping
tools during cycle programming whether switching
commands are generated for the spindle or the driven tool.
0: Stationary tool
1: Driven tool
NL Usable length
RW Angle of orientation: Deviation from the main machining
direction (input range: –90° to +90°)
AX Salient length in X
FH Chuck height
FD Diameter of the chuck
It depends on the PLC software of your machine whether
the generated switching commands are evaluated. If the
PLC does not execute the switching commands, they
should not be defined. Refer to your machine manual.
518 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Tool text (QT): You can assign a tool text to each tool. The text is
shown in the tool list. Because the tool texts are managed in a
separate list, the reference to the text is entered in QT (see “Tool
texts” auf Seite 506).
Cutting material (SS): This parameter is required if you want to use
the cutting data from the technology database (see “Technology
database” auf Seite 536).
Compensation factors (CK, FK, DK): These parameters serve for
the tool-specific adjustment of the cutting values. The cutting data
from the technology database are multiplied with the compensation
factors before they are entered as default values.
Additional information (PLC): You can find information on this
parameter in the machine manual. This date can be used for
machine-specific settings.
Tool life (MT, RT): If you use the tool life management, specify in
MT the tool life of the cutting edge. In RT the CNC PILOT shows the
tool life already passed.
Quantity (MZ, RZ): If you use the tool life management, specify in
MZ the number of workpieces that can be machined with one tool
cutting edge. In RZ the CNC PILOT shows the number of
workpieces that have already been machined with this cutting edge.
Manual change system (MTS): Definition of the tool holder
The tool life management and the quantity count are used
alternatively.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 519
7.3 Tool data
Standard turning tools
Select "New tool."
Select lathe tools.
For tools with round cutting edge, switch to dialog for
button tools.
For tool orientations TO=1, 3, 5 and 7, you can enter the tool angle
EW. The tool orientation values TO=2, 4, 6, 8 are used for neutral
tools. "Neutral" tools are tools that are centered precisely in the tool
tip. One of the setting dimensions for neutral tools refers to the center
of the tool-tip radius.
Special parameters for roughing and finishing tools
CO Cutting edge position: The main machining direction of the tool
influences the orientation of the tool angle EW and the point
angle SW (required for AWG with TURN PLUS).
1: Longitudinal preferred
2: Transverse preferred
3: Only longitudinal
4: Only transverse
RS Cutting radius
EW Tool angle (range: 0° <= EW <= 180°)
SW Point angle (range: 0° <= SW <= 180°)
SUT Tool type (required for AWG in TURN PLUS)
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
Special parameters for button tools
RS Cutting radius
EW Tool angle (range: 0° <= EW <= 180°)
DS Special compensation (position of the special compensation:
see figure)
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
The wear compensation DX, DZ compensates for wear on
the two sides of the tool tip that lie next to the reference
point. The special compensation DS compensates for
wear on the third side of the tool tip.
520 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Recessing tools
Select "New tool."
Select recessing tools.
Recessing tools are used for recessing, parting, recess turning and
finishing (only smart.Turn).
Special parameters for recessing tools
RS Cutting radius
SW Point angle
SB Cutting width
SL Cutting length
DS Special compensation
SUT Tool type (required for AWG in TURN PLUS):
0: Recessing
1: Parting
2: Recess turning
DN Tool width
SD Shank diameter
ET Maximum plunging depth
NL Usable length
RW Angular offset (only for B axis)
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
The wear compensation DX, DZ compensates for wear on
the two sides of the tool tip that lie next to the reference
point. The special compensation DS compensates for
wear on the third side of the tool tip.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 521
7.3 Tool data
Thread-cutting tools
Select "New tool."
Select thread-cutting tools.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for thread cutting tools
RS Cutting radius
SB Cutting width
EW Tool angle (range: 0° <= EW <= 180°)
SW Point angle (range: 0° <= SW <= 180°)
DN Tool width
SD Shank diameter
ET Maximum plunging depth
NL Usable length
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
522 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Twist drills and indexable-insert drills
Select "New tool."
Select drilling tools.
For indexable-insert drills, switch to dialog for
indexable-insert drills.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for twist drills
DV Drill diameter
BW Drill angle: Point angle of the drill
AW Driven tool: This parameter specifies for drilling and tapping
tools during cycle programming whether switching commands
are generated for the spindle or the driven tool.
0: Stationary tool
1: Driven tool
NL Usable length
RW Angle of orientation: Deviation from the main machining
direction (input range: –90° to +90°)
AX Salient length in X
FH Chuck height
FD Diameter of the chuck
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the
drilling diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 523
7.3 Tool data
NC center drill
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special drilling tools.
Select NC center drill.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for NC center drills
DV Hole diameter
BW Point angle
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the
hole diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.
524 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Centering tool
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special drilling tools.
Select centering tools.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for centering tools
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
BW Drill angle
SW Point angle
ZA Stud length
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the
hole diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 525
7.3 Tool data
Counterbore
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special drilling tools.
Select counterbore.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for counterbores
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
ZA Stud length
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the
hole diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.
526 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Countersink
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special drilling tools.
Select counterbore.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for countersinks
DV Hole diameter
DH Stud diameter
BW Drill angle
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For drilling operations with constant cutting speed, the
hole diameter (DV) is used to calculate the spindle
speed.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 527
7.3 Tool data
Tap
Select "New tool."
Select taps.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for taps
DV Thread diameter
HG Thread pitch
AL Length of first cut
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
The thread pitch (HG) is evaluated if the corresponding
parameter is not defined in the tapping cycle.
528 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Standard milling tools
Select "New tool."
Select milling tools.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for standard milling tools
DV Cutter diameter
AZ Number of teeth
DD Cutter diameter compensation
SL Cutting length
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For milling operations with constant cutting speed, the
milling cutter diameter (DV) is used to calculate the
spindle speed.
The number of teeth (AZ) parameter is evaluated for
G193 Feed per tooth.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 529
7.3 Tool data
Thread milling tools
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special milling tools.
Select the thread milling tool.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for thread milling tools
DV Cutter diameter
AZ Number of teeth
FB Cutter width
HG Pitch
DD Cutter diameter compensation
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For milling operations with constant cutting speed, the
milling cutter diameter (DV) is used to calculate the
spindle speed.
The number of teeth (AZ) parameter is evaluated for
G193 Feed per tooth.
530 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Angle cutters
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special milling tools.
Select angle cutters.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for angle cutters
DV (Large) milling diameter
AZ Number of teeth
FB Cutter width
FB<0: Large cutter diameter on front
FB>0: Large cutter diameter on back
FW Cutter angle
DD Cutter diameter compensation
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For milling operations with constant cutting speed, the
milling cutter diameter (DV) is used to calculate the
spindle speed.
The number of teeth (AZ) parameter is evaluated for
G193 Feed per tooth.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 531
7.3 Tool data
Milling pins
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select special milling tools.
Select milling pins.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for milling pins
DV Cutter diameter
AZ Number of teeth
SL Cutting length
FW Cutter angle
DD Cutter diameter compensation
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
For milling operations with constant cutting speed, the
milling cutter diameter (DV) is used to calculate the
spindle speed.
The number of teeth (AZ) parameter is evaluated for
G193 Feed per tooth.
532 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Knurling tool
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select knurling tool.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for knurling tools
SL Cutting length
EW Tool angle
SB Cutting width
DN Tool width
SD Shank diameter
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 533
7.3 Tool data
Touch probes
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select handling systems and touch probes.
Select touch probes.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for touch probes
SL Cutting length
TP Selection of touch probes
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
The CNC PILOT must be specially prepared by the
machine tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.
534 Tool and technology database
7.3 Tool data
Stopper tool
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select handling systems and touch probes.
Select stopper tool.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for stopper tools
DD Special compensation
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 535
7.3 Tool data
Gripper
Select "New tool."
Select special tools.
Select handling systems and touch probes.
Select grippers.
The help graphics illustrate the dimensions of the tools.
Special parameters for grippers
DD Special compensation
For further tool parameters, see Seite 516.
536 Tool and technology database
7.4 Technology database
7.4 Technology database
The technology database manages the cutting data according to the
machining mode, the workpiece material and the cutting material. The
graphic on this page shows the composition of the database. Each
cube represents a data record with cutting data.
In its standard version, the technology database is designed for 9
workpiece-material/tool-material combinations. You can optionally
expand the database to 62 workpiece material-cutting material
combinations.
The CNC PILOT ascertains these criteria from the following
information:
Machining operation: A machining operation is assigned in the
cycle programming (Teach-in mode) to each cycle, and in smart.Turn
to each unit (see table).
Work material: The workpiece material is defined in the TSF menu
during cycle programming, and in the program header in smart.Turn.
Cutting material: Each tool description contains the cutting
material.
Using these three criteria, the CNC PILOT accesses the cutting data
record (shown yellow in the figure) and generates from it the
technology-data proposal.
Explanation of abbreviations used in the graphic:
Task: Machining operation
WS: Workpiece material
SS: Cutting material
Types of machining
Predrilling Not used
Roughing 2
Finishing 3
Thread cutting 4
Contour recessing 5
Parting 6
Centering 9
Drilling 8
Countersinking 9
Reaming Not used
Tapping 11
Milling 12
Finish milling 13
Deburring 14
Engraving 15
Recess turning 16
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 537
7.4 Technology database
Technology editor
The technology editor can be called from the Tool Editor and
smart.Turn operating modes.
Database access of the following combinations are supported:
Work material/operating mode combinations (blue)
Cutting material/operating-mode combinations (red)
Work-material/tool-material combinations (green)
Editing workpiece and cutting material designations: The
technology editor keeps one list each with workpiece material
designations and cutting material designations. You have the following
options:
Insert new workpiece/cutting materials.
Do not change the workpiece material or cutting material
designations.
Delete existing workpiece/cutting material designations. This also
deletes the associated cutting data.
Editing cutting data: The cutting data of a workpiece material/cutting
material combination are called a "data record". You have the following
options:
Assign cutting data to a workpiece material/cutting material
combination to create a data record.
Delete the cutting data of a workpiece material/cutting material
combination (a data record).
Call the technology editor in the tool editor operating modes:
Press the "Other tables" soft key
Call the technology editor: Press the "Technology
editor" soft key
Explanation of abbreviations used in the graphic:
Task: Machining operation
WS: Workpiece material
SS: Cutting material
Remember when deleting workpiece material or cutting
material designations:
This also deletes the associated cutting data.
The CNC PILOT cannot determine any cutting data for
the affected programs or tools. The reason:
The workpiece material designations are saved in the
program header of the smart.Turn programs.
Cutting material designations are saved together with
the tool data.
538 Tool and technology database
7.4 Technology database
Editing a workpiece material or cutting material
list
Work material list
Select the "Work materials" menu item. The editor
opens the list with the workpiece material
designations.
Adding a workpiece material:
Press the soft key. Enter the workpiece designation
(maximum 16 characters). The sorting number is
assigned sequentially.
Deleting a workpiece material:
Press the soft key. After the confirmation request,
the CNC PILOT deletes the workpiece material with
all associated cutting data.
Cutting material list
Select the "Cutting materials" menu item. The editor
opens the list with the cutting material designations.
Adding a cutting material:
Press the soft key. Enter the cutting material
designation (maximum 16 characters). The sorting
number is assigned sequentially.
Deleting a cutting material:
Press the soft key. After the confirmation request,
the CNC PILOT deletes the cutting material with all
associated cutting data.
The sorting number only specifies the sequence within the list. To
change the sorting number: Select the sorting number, press the Edit
field soft key and enter the new number.
Expanding the workpiece-material or cutting-material lists
does not create cutting data. The data record for cutting
data of a new workpiece material/cutting material
combination is not created until you have requested it
through the New data record soft key.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 539
7.4 Technology database
Displaying/editing cutting data
Displaying cutting data of the machining modes:
Select the "Cutting data" menu item. The editor opens
the dialog for selecting a workpiece material/cutting
material combination.
Select the desired combination and press OK.
The technology editor displays the cutting data.
Displaying cutting data of the workpiece materials:
"Extras/.." menu item
... Select "Work material table..." The editor opens the
dialog for selecting an operating mode/cutting
material combination.
Select the desired combination and press OK.
The technology editor displays the cutting data.
Displaying cutting data of the cutting materials:
"Extras/.." menu item
... Select "Cutting material table." The editor opens the
dialog for selecting a workpiece material/operating
mode combination.
Select the desired combination and press OK.
The technology editor displays the cutting data.
The value 0 in a data record means that no value is
transferred to the unit or cycle dialog.
540 Tool and technology database
7.4 Technology database
Editing cutting data:
Call the table with cutting data.
With the arrow keys, select the cutting data field you want to edit.
Press the soft key
Enter the value and confirm with the Enter key.
Adding new cutting data:
Set any workpiece-material/cutting material combinations.
Press the soft key. The technology editor opens the
"New cutting data" dialog box.
Set the desired workpiece material/cutting material combination.
Decide whether an existing workpiece material/cutting material
combination should be used as a template. Otherwise, all entries
will be preset with "0."
Press OK to create the new cutting data records.
Deleting a data record with cutting data:
Set the workpiece material/cutting material combination (data
record) to be deleted.
Press the soft key. The technology editor asks you if
you really want to delete the data record.
Press the soft key. The technology editor deletes the
data record of the given workpiece material/cutting
material combination.
Organization mode of
operation
542 Organization mode of operation
8.1 Organization mode of operation
8.1 Organization mode of
operation
This mode of operation offers various functions for communication
with other systems, data backup, setting of parameters, and
diagnosis.
The following functions are available:
Login code
Some parameter settings and functions may only be accessed by
qualified personnel. Users need to enter a code number to log in to
this mode.
Parameter settings
Parameters enable you to adapt CNC PILOT to your specific
requirements. The User parameter menu provides functions to
display and edit parameters.
Transfer
The transfer functions are used either for exchange of data with
other systems or for data security. You can input and output
programs, parameters, and tool data.
Diagnosis
The Diagnosis menu provides functions for checking the system
and for locating errors.
Login code
Code number Possibilities
Editing user parameters
Transfer:
Transmit/Receive programs
Create service files
123 Editing all user parameters
Transfer
Parameter backup
Backup/Restore tools
net123 Configuring the network (control
name / DHCP)
Transfer
Parameter backup
Backup/Restore tools
sik Options dialog box
Opens the dialog box for activating
software options via SIK (system
identification key)
Service code Editing configuration data
Diagnostic functions
Restoring the parameters
The Configuration and Diagnosis functions can only be
accessed by authorized commissioning and service
personnel.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 543
8.2 Parameters
8.2 Parameters
Parameter editor
The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor.
Each parameter object has a name (e.g. CfgDisplayLanguage) that
gives information about the parameters it contains. Each object has a
key for unique identification.
The CNC PILOT displays an icon at the beginning of each line in the
parameter tree showing additional information about this line. The
icons have the following meanings::
User parameter (user parameters)
Parameters that are preset for the usual "daily operations" are
organized as User parameters.
To enable you to set machine-specific functions, your machine tool
builder can make further parameters available as user parameters.
Editing user parameters
Press the soft key and enter the key number 123.
Press the User parameters soft key.
Branch exists but is closed
Branch is open
Empty object, cannot be opened
Initialized machine parameter
Uninitialized (optional) machine parameter
Can be read but not edited
Can neither be read nor edited
Refer to your machine manual.
544 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Displaying help texts
Position the cursor on the parameter.
Press the info key.
The parameter editor opens the window with information on these
parameters.
Press the info key again to close the information
window.
Searching for parameters
Press the Find soft key.
Enter the search criteria.
Press the Find soft key again.
Exit the parameter editor
Press the End soft key.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 545
8.2 Parameters
List of user parameters
Language setting:
Parameters: Definition of the NC and PLC conversational language / ...
... / NC conversational language (101301)
ENGLISH
GERMAN
CZECH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
DANISH
FINNISH
DUTCH
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN
CHINESE
CHINESE_TRAD
SLOVENIAN
KOREAN
NORWEGIAN
ROMANIAN
SLOVAK
TURKISH
... / PLC conversational language (101302)
See NC conversational language
... / PLC error message language (101303)
See NC conversational language
... / Language for online help (101304)
See NC conversational language
546 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
General settings:
Parameters: System / ... Meaning
... / Definition of the units of measure valid for the display (101100)
/ ...
... / Unit of measure for display and user interface (101101)
metric Use the metric system
inch Use the inch system
... / General display settings (604800) / ...
... / Axis display (604803) Type of axis display:
Default
Actual value
Nominal value
Following error (servo lag)
Distance-to-go
.../ File preview during program selection (604804)
TRUE File preview is displayed during program selection.
FALSE File preview is not displayed during program selection.
.../ Do not display limit switch warnings (604805)
TRUE No limit-switch warning is displayed if an axis is
positioned on the software limit switch.
FALSE The limit switch warning is displayed.
... / Settings for automatic operation (601800) / ...
.../ Service life management (601801)
ON Tool life monitoring is active
OFF Tool life monitoring is inactive
.../ Program run with the most recently selected cycle
(601809)
ON When Program Run is selected, the most recently
selected cycle remains active
OFF When Program Run is selected, the first cycle is active
.../ End mid-program startup after start block (601810)
TRUE In mid-program startup, program execution begins
with the subsequent NC block
FALSE In mid-program startup, program execution begins
with the selected NC block
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 547
8.2 Parameters
... / Tool measurement (604600)
Measuring feed rate [mm/min] (604602) Feed rate for approaching the touch probe
Measuring range [mm] (604603) The touch probe must be triggered within the
measuring range. Otherwise, an error message is
issued.
... / Settings for Machine operating mode (604900) / ...
.../ Save cycle without simulation (604903)
TRUE Cycle can be saved without previous simulation or
execution.
FALSE Cycle can only be saved after previous simulation or
execution.
.../ Run a tool change with NC start (604904)
TRUE The tool change with the TSF dialog is conducted with
Cycle Start.
FALSE The tool change is not conducted with Cycle Start.
.../ Separate dialogs for tool change, speed and feed rate
(604906)
TRUE Data input for tool change, spindle speed and feed rate
in separate dialogs
FALSE TSF dialog box with input of all cutting data
... / Settings for load monitoring (124700) / ...
.../ Activate load monitoring (124701)
TRUE Load monitoring is active
FALSE Load monitoring is inactive
.../ Factor for utilization limit 1 [%] (124702) This value multiplied by the reference value
determined by reference machining results in the
utilization limit value 1.
.../ Factor for utilization limit 2 [%] (124703) This value multiplied by the reference value
determined by reference machining results in the
utilization limit value 2.
.../ Factor for total utilization limit [%] (124704) This value multiplied by the reference value
determined by reference machining results in the total
utilization limit value.
Parameters: System / ... Meaning
548 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Settings for the simulation:
Parameters: Simulation / ... Meaning
... / General settings (114800) / ...
... / Restart with M99 (114801)
ON Simulation begins again at beginning of program
OFF Simulation stops
... / Traverse delay [s] (114802) Delay time after each path has been graphically
simulated. The simulation speed can thus be
influenced.
... / Software limit switches active (114803)
ON Software limit switches also active during simulation
OFF Software limit switches not active during simulation
... / Machining times for the NC functions in general (115000) / ... These times are used as nonmachining times for the
time calculation function.
... / Time allowance for tool change [s] (115001)
... / Time allowance for gear shifting [s] (115002)
... / General time allowance for M functions [s] (115003)
... / Machining times for M functions (115100) / ... Individual time allowances for a maximum of 20 M
functions
... / T01 / ...
... / Number of the M function
... / Operating time of the M function [s] The time calculation adds this time to the "General
time allowance for M functions."
... / T20
... / Specification of the (standard) window size (115200) The simulation function adapts the window size to the
workpiece blank. If no blank part is programmed, the
simulation uses a standard window size.
... / Zero point position in X [mm] (115201) Distance of the coordinate origin from the lower
window edge.
... / Zero point position in Z [mm] (115202) Distance of the coordinate origin from the left edge of
the window.
... / Delta X [mm] (115203) Vertical expansion of the graphic window
... / Delta Z [mm] (115204) Horizontal expansion of the graphic window
... / Specification of the (standard) workpiece blank size (115300) If no blank part is programmed in DIN PLUS, the
simulation uses a "standard blank."
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 549
8.2 Parameters
Settings for fixed cycles and units:
... / Outside diameter [mm] (115301)
... / Workpiece blank length [mm] (115302)
... / Right edge of workpiece blank [mm] (115303)
... / Inside diameter [mm] (115304)
Parameters: Simulation / ... Meaning
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
... / General settings (602000) / ...
... / Type of tool access (602001) Default value for tool access:
0: First from NC program, then from tool table
1: Only from NC program
2: First from NC program, then from magazine
3: First from NC program, then from magazine, then
from tool table
... / Spindle speed limitation [rev/mm] (602004) Default value for spindle speed limitation
... / External safety clearance (SAR) [mm] (602005) External safety clearance on workpiece blank
... / Internal safety clearance (SIR) [mm] (602006) Internal safety clearance on workpiece blank
... / External on machined part (SAT) [mm] (602007) External safety clearance on machined part
... / Internal on machined part (SIT) [mm] (602008) Internal safety clearance on machined part
... / G14 for new units (602009) Default value for "tool change point G14."
... / Coolant for new units (602010) Default value for "coolant CLT":
0: Without (coolant)
1: Circuit 1 on
2: Circuit 2 on
... / G60 for new units (602011) Default value for "protection zone":
0: Active
1: Inactive
... / Safety clearance G47 [mm] (602012) Default value for "safety clearance G47":
... / Safety clearance, G147 plane [mm] (602013) Default value for "safety clearance SCK"
... / Safety clearance, G147 infeed direction [mm] (602014) Default value for "safety clearance SCI"
... / Oversize in X direction [mm] (602015) Default value for "oversize (X) I"
... / Oversize in Z direction [mm] (602016) Default value for "oversize (Z) K"
... / Direction of rotation for new units (602017) Default value for "direction of rotation MD"
550 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Zero point shift (602022)
OFF The AWG does not generate a zero point shift.
ON The AWG generates a zero point shift.
... / Front chuck edge on main spindle (602018) Z position of the front edge of the chuck for calculating
the workpiece zero point.
... / Front chuck edge on opposing spindle (602019) Z position of the front edge of the chuck for calculating
the workpiece zero point.
... / Jaw width on main spindle (602020) Jaw width in Z direction for calculating the workpiece
zero point.
... / Jaw width on opposing spindle (602021) Jaw width in Z direction for calculating the workpiece
zero point.
... / Global parameters for finished parts (601900) / ...
... / Max. inward copying angle (EKW) [°] (601903) Tolerance angle for distinguishing turning from
recessing.
... / Centric predrilling (602100) / ...
... / 1st drilling diameter limit (UBD1) [mm] (602101) Limit diameter for the first predrilling step
... / 2nd drilling diameter limit (UBD2) [mm] (602102) Limit diameter for the second predrilling step
... / Point angle tolerance (SWT) [°] (602103) Permissible point angle tolerance for inclined drilling
limitation elements
... / Drilling oversize – Diameter [BAX] [mm] (602104) Machining oversize on drilling diameter in X direction.
Radius value
... / Drilling oversize – Depth [BAZ] [mm] (602105) Machining oversize on drilling depth in Z direction.
... / Traverse for predrilling (ANB) (602106) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Traverse for tool change (ABW) (602106) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Safety clearance on blank part (SAB) [mm] (602108) Safety clearance on workpiece blank
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 551
8.2 Parameters
... / Internal safety clearance (SIB) [mm] (602109) Retraction distance for deep-hole drilling "B"
... / Drilling depth ratio (BTV) (602110) Ratio for checking the predrilling steps
... / Drilling depth factor (BTF) (602111) Factor for calculation of the first drilling depth for deep-
hole drilling
... / Depth reduction (BTR) (602112) Reduction for deep-hole drilling
... / Overhang length – Predrilling (ULB) [mm] (602113) Default value for "drilling lengths A"
... / Roughing (602200) / ...
... / Tool angle –ext./longitudinal (RALEW) [°] (602201) Tool angle for roughing tool
... / Point angle –ext./longitud. (RALSW) [°] (602202) Point angle for roughing tool
... / Tool angle –ext./transverse (RAPEW) [°] (602203) Tool angle for roughing tool
... / Point angle –ext./transv. (RAPSW) [°] (602204) Point angle for roughing tool
... / Tool angle –int./longitud. (RILEW) [°] (602205) Tool angle for roughing tool
... / Point angle –int./longitud. (RILSW) [°] (602206) Point angle for roughing tool
... / Tool angle –int./transverse (RIPEW) [°] (602207) Tool angle for roughing tool
... / Point angle –int./transverse (RIPSW) [°] (602208) Point angle for roughing tool
... / Machining –ext./longitudinal (RAL) (602209) Strategy for roughing:
0: Full-surface roughing cycle, including plunge-
cutting
1: Standard roughing cycle without plunge-cutting
... / Machining –int./longitudinal (RIL) (602210) Strategy for roughing:
0: Full-surface roughing cycle, including plunge-
cutting
1: Standard roughing cycle without plunge-cutting
... / Machining –ext./transverse (RAP) (602211) Strategy for roughing:
0: Full-surface roughing cycle, including plunge-
cutting
1: Standard roughing cycle without plunge-cutting
... / Machining –int./transverse (RIP) (602212) Strategy for roughing:
0: Full-surface roughing cycle, including plunge-
cutting
1: Standard roughing cycle without plunge-cutting
... / Adjacent angle tolerance (RNWT) [°] (602213) Tolerance range for secondary cutting edge
... / Relief cutting angle (RFW) [°] (602214) Minimum angle differential between the contour and
secondary cutting edge
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
552 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Type of oversize (RAA) (602215)
16 Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – no single
oversizes
144 Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – with
single oversizes
32 Equidistant oversize – no single oversizes
160 Equidistant oversize – with single oversizes
... / Equidistant or longitudinal (RLA) (602216) Equidistant oversize or longitudinal oversize
... / Face oversize (RPA) (602217) Transverse oversize
... / Approach/external roughing (ANRA) (602218) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Approach/internal roughing (ANRI) (602219) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/external roughing (ABRA) (602220) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/internal roughing (ABRI) (602221) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Transv./longitud. ratio, ext. (PLVA) (602222) Ratio for determination of longitudinal or transverse
machining
... / Transv./longitud. ratio, int. (PLVI) (602223) Ratio for determination of longitudinal or transverse
machining
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 553
8.2 Parameters
... / Min. roughing transv. length (RMPL) [mm] (602224) Radius value for determination of the machining
operation:
RMPL > l1: Without transverse roughing
RMPL < l1: With transverse roughing
RMPL = 0: Special case
... / Transverse angle variation (PWA) [°] (602225) Tolerance range in which the first element is declared
a transverse element
... / Overhang length –outside (ULA) [mm] (602226) Length for external rough-machining enabling
roughing beyond the target position.
... / Overhang length –inside (ULI) [mm] (602227) Length for internal rough-machining enabling roughing
beyond the target position.
... / Retracting length –outside (RAHL) [mm] (602228) Retracting length for smoothing variants H = 1 and H
= 2
... / Retracting length –inside (RIHL) [mm] (602229) Retracting length for smoothing variants H = 1 and H
= 2
... / Cutting depth reduction factor (SRF) (602230) Factor for reducing the infeed value (cutting depth).
For tools machining opposite to the main machining
direction
... / Finishing (602300) / ...
... / Tool angle –ext./longitudinal (FALEW) [°] (602301) Tool angle for finishing tool
... / Point angle –ext./longitud. (FALSW) [°] (602302) Point angle for finishing tool
... / Tool angle –ext./transverse (FAPEW) [°] (602303) Tool angle for finishing tool
... / Point angle –ext./transv. (FAPSW) [°] (602304) Point angle for finishing tool
... / Tool angle –int./longitud. (FILEW) [°] (602305) Tool angle for finishing tool
... / Point angle –int./longitud. (FILSW) [°] (602306) Point angle for finishing tool
... / Tool angle –int./transverse (FIPEW) [°] (602307) Tool angle for finishing tool
... / Point angle –int./transverse (FIPSW) [°] (602308) Point angle for finishing tool
... / Machining –ext./longitudinal (FAL) (602309) Strategy for finishing:
0: Full-surface finishing with optimum tool
1: Standard finishing; relief turns and undercuts
machined with a suitable tool
... / Machining –int./longitudinal (FIL) (602310) Strategy for finishing:
0: Full-surface finishing with optimum tool
1: Standard finishing; relief turns and undercuts
machined with a suitable tool
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
554 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Machining –ext./transverse (FAP) (602311) Strategy for finishing:
0: Full-surface finishing with optimum tool
1: Standard finishing; relief turns and undercuts
machined with a suitable tool
... / Machining –int./transverse (FIP) (602312) Strategy for finishing:
0: Full-surface finishing with optimum tool
1: Standard finishing; relief turns and undercuts
machined with a suitable tool
... / Adjacent angle tolerance (FNWT) [°] (602313) Tolerance range for secondary cutting edge
... / Relief cutting angle (FFW) [°] (602314) Minimum angle differential between the contour and
secondary cutting edge
... / Approach/external finishing (ANFA) (602315) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Approach/internal finishing (ANFI) (602316) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/external finishing (ABFA) (602317) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/internal finishing (ABFI) (602318) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 555
8.2 Parameters
... / Min. transv. finishing depth (FMPL) [mm] (602319) Value for determination of the machining operation:
Without inside contour: Always with transverse cut
With inside contour, FMPL >= l1: Without
transverse cut
With inside contour, FMPL < l1: With transverse cut
... / Max. finishing cutting depth (FMST) [mm] (602320) Permissible infeed depth for non-machined undercuts
FMST > ft: With undercut machining
FMST <= ft: Without undercut machining
... / No. rev. for chamfer/rounding (FMUR) (602321) Minimum number of revolutions; feed rate is reduced
automatically.
... / Recessing (602400) / ...
... / Approach/external recessing (ANESA) (602401) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Approach/internal recessing (ANESI) (602402) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/external recessing (ABESA) (602403) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/internal recessing (ABESI) (602404) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
556 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Appr./ext. contour recessing (ANKSA) (602405) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Appr./int. contour recessing (ANKSI) (602406) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./ext. contour recessing (ABKSA) (602407) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./int. contour recessing (ABKSI) (602408) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Recessing width divisor (SBD) (602409) Value for selecting the tool for contour recessing with
linear elements at the recess base
... / Type of oversize (KSAA) (602410) Oversize for contour recessing with contour valleys.
Standardized recesses are completed in one
machining cycle.
16 Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – no single
oversizes
144 Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – with
single oversizes
32 Equidistant oversize – no single oversizes
160 Equidistant oversize – with single oversizes
... / Equidistant or longitudinal (KSLA) (602411) Equidistant oversize or longitudinal oversize
... / Face oversize (KSPA) (602412) Transverse oversize
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 557
8.2 Parameters
... / Recessing width factor (SBF) (602413) Factor for determining the maximum tool offset
... / Recessing/finishing (602414) Sequence of finishing cuts:
1: Part a horizontal element (previous behavior)
2: Move through and lift-off
... / Thread cutting (602500) / ...
... / Approach/ext. – thread (ANGA) (602501) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Approach/int. – thread (ANGI) (602502) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/ext. – thread (ABGA) (602503) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Departure/int. – thread (ABGI) (602504) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Thread starting length (GAL) [mm] (602505) Default value for "run-in length B"
... / Thread run-out length (GUL) [mm] (602506) Default value for "overrun length P"
... / Measuring (602600) / ...
... / Measuring loop counter (MC) (602602) Definition of the measurement/loop intervals.
... / Measuring path length in Z (MLZ) (602603) Length of departure path in Z
... / Measuring path length in X (MLX) (602604) Length of departure path in X
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
558 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Measurement oversize (MA) (602605) Oversize on the element to be measured
... / Measuring cut length (MSL) (602606) Measuring cut length
... / Drilling (602700) / ...
... / Approach/front face – drilling (ANBS) (602701) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Appr./lateral surface – drilling (ANBM) (602702) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./front face – drilling (ABBS) (602703) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./lateral surface – drilling (ABBM) (602704) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Internal safety clearance (SIBC) [mm] (602705) Retraction distance for deep-hole drilling "B"
... / Driven drill (SBC) (602706) Safety clearance for driven tools
... / Stationary drill (SBCF) (602707) Safety clearance for tools that are not driven
... / Driven tap (SGC) (602708) Safety clearance for driven tools
... / Stationary tap (SGCF) (602709) Safety clearance for tools that are not driven
... / Drilling depth factor (BTCF) (602710) Factor for calculation of the first drilling depth for deep-
hole drilling
... / Depth reduction (BTRC) [mm] (602711) Reduction for deep-hole drilling
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 559
8.2 Parameters
... / Diameter tolerance/drill (BDT) [mm] (602712) For drill selection
... / Milling (602800) / ...
... / Approach/front face – milling (ANMS) (602801) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Appr./lateral surface – milling (ANMM) (602802) Approach strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./front face – milling (ABMS) (602803) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Dep./lateral surface – milling (ABMM) (602804) Departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
... / Safety clearance in infeed dir. (SMZ) [mm] (602805) Distance between starting position and top edge of
object to be milled
... / Safety clearance, milling dir. (SME) [mm] (602806) Distance between milling contour and side of mill
... / Oversize in milling direction (MEA) [mm] (602807) Oversize
... / Oversize in infeed direction (MZA) [mm] (602808) Oversize
... / ExpertPrograms / ...
... / Expert programs (606800) / ... Subprograms adapted to the machine configuration
... / Parameter list Key of the parameter list
... / Parameter lists for expert programs (606900) / ...
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
560 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
... / Name of the expert program Name of the expert program (without path
information)
... / Parameter Value of the parameter
Parameters: Processing / ... Meaning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 561
8.2 Parameters
Descriptions of the most important machining
parameters (processing)
General settings
Global technology parameters – Safety clearances
Machining parameters are used by the work plan
generation (TURN PLUS) and various machining cycles.
Global safety clearance
Speed limiting [SMAX]
Global speed limiting. You can define a small speed limit in the
program head of the TURN PLUS program.
External on blank part [SAR]
Internal on blank part [SIR]
TURN PLUS takes SAR/SIR into account
for all rough-turning operations
for centric predrilling
External on machined part [SAT]
Internal on machined part [SIT]
TURN PLUS takes SAT/SIT into account on premachined
workpieces for:
Finish-machining
Recess turning
Contour recessing (contour cutting)
Recessing
Thread cutting
Measuring
G14 for new units
Default setting for the axis sequence (start unit: GWW parameter)
that is used to approach the tool change position:
No axis
0: Simultaneously
1: First X, then Z
2: First Z, then X
3: Only X
4: Only Z
562 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Coolant for new units
Default setting for the coolant (start unit: CLT parameter):
0: Without coolant
1: Coolant circuit 1 on
2: Coolant circuit 2 on
Protection zone "G60" for new units
Default setting for the protection zone (start unit: G60
parameter):
0: Active
1: Inactive
Global safety clearance G47
Default setting for the global safety clearance (start unit: G47
parameter)
Global safety clearance G147 in the plane
Default setting for the global safety clearance in the plane (start
unit: SCK parameter)
Global safety clearance G147 in infeed direction
Default setting for the global safety clearance in infeed
direction (start unit: SCI parameter)
Global oversize in X direction
Default setting for the global safety clearance in X direction
(start unit: I parameter)
Global oversize in Z direction
Default setting for the global safety clearance in X direction
(start unit: Kparameter)
Rotational direction for new units
Default for the spindle direction of rotation MD when creating/
opening a new unit ("Tool" tab)
Front edge of chuck on main spindle
Z position of the front edge of the chuck for calculating the
workpiece zero point (AWG)
Front chuck edge on counterspindle
Z position of the front edge of the chuck for calculating the
workpiece zero point (AWG)
Jaw width on main spindle
Jaw width in Z direction for calculating the workpiece zero point
(AWG)
Jaw width on counterspindle
Jaw width in Z direction for calculating the workpiece zero point
(AWG)
Global safety clearance
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 563
8.2 Parameters
Global parameters for finished parts
Centric predrilling
Centric predrilling – Tool selection
For predrilling, a maximum of three drilling steps is used:
1st predrilling step (limit diameter UBD1)
2nd predrilling step (limit diameter UBD2)
Finish-drilling step
Finish-drilling is performed with: dimin <= UBD2
Tool selection: db = dimin
Designations in the figures at right:
db1, db2: Drill diameter
DB1max: Maximum inside diameter for 1st drilling step
DB2max: Maximum inside diameter for 2nd drilling step
dimin: Minimum inside diameter
Global parameters for finished parts
Max. inward copying angle [EKW]
Tolerance angle for recess areas, used for distinguishing
turning from recessing (mtw = contour angle).
EKW > mtw: Relief turn
EKW <= mtw: Undefined recess (no form element)
Tool selection
1st drilling diameter limit [UBD1]
1st predrilling step: if UBD1 < DB1max
Tool selection: UBD1 <= db1 <= DB1max
2nd drilling diameter limit [UBD2]
2nd predrilling step: if UBD2 < DB2max
Tool selection: UBD2 <= db2 <= DB2max
564 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
BBG (drilling limitation elements): Contour elements intersected by
UBD1/UBD2
Centric predrilling – Oversizes
UBD1/UBD2 have no effect when "Centric predrilling"
has been defined as main machining operation followed
by "Finish-drilling" as submachining operation in the
machining sequence (see smart.Turn and DIN
Programming User's Manual).
Prerequisite: UBD1 > UBD2
UBD2 must permit subsequent inside machining with
boring bars.
Oversizes
Point angle tolerance [SWT]
If the drilling limitation element is a diagonal element, TURN
PLUS prefers using a twist drill with suitable point angle. If no
suitable twist drill is available, an indexable-insert drill is
selected for the predrilling operation. SWT defines the
permissible point angle tolerance.
Drilling oversize – Diameter [BAX]
Machining oversize on drilling diameter (X direction – radius
value).
Drilling oversize – Depth [BAZ]
Machining oversize on drilling depth (Z direction).
BAZ is not considered if:
A subsequent inside finishing operation is not possible
due to the small diameter.
"dimin < 2* UBD2" in the finish-drilling step for blind
holes.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 565
8.2 Parameters
Centric predrilling – Approach and departure
Centric predrilling – Safety clearances
Approach and departure
Traverse for predrilling [ANB]
Traverse for tool change [ABW]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
Safety clearances
Safety clearance on blank part [SAB]
Internal safety clearance [SIB]
Retraction distance for deep-hole drilling ("B" for G74)
566 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Centric predrilling – Machining
Roughing
Roughing – Tool standards
Furthermore:
Roughing cycles are primarily executed with standard roughing
tools.
Alternatively, tools that allow full-surface machining are used.
Machining
Drilling depth ratio [BTV]
TURN PLUS checks the 1st and 2nd drilling steps. The
predrilling step is performed with:
BTV <= BT / dmax
Drilling depth factor [BTF]
1st drilling depth for deep-hole drilling cycle (G74):
bt1 = BTF * db
Depth reduction [BTR]
Reduction for deep-hole drilling cycle (G74):
bt2 = bt1 – BTR
Overhang length – Predrilling [ULB]
Through-drilling length
Tool standards
Tool angle – external/longitudinal [RALEW]
Point angle – external/longitudinal [RALSW]
Tool angle – external/transverse [RAPEW]
Point angle – external/transverse [RAPSW]
Tool angle – internal/longitudinal [RILEW]
Point angle – internal/longitudinal [RILSW]
Tool angle – internal/transverse [RIPEW]
Point angle – internal/transverse [RIPSW]
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 567
8.2 Parameters
Roughing – Machining standards
Roughing – Tool tolerances
For tool selection, the following applies:
Tool angle (EW): EW >= mkw (mkw: ascending contour angle)
Tool angle (EW) and point angle (SW): NWmin < (EW+SW) <
NWmax
Adjacent angle (RNWT): RNWT = NWmax – NWmin
Machining standards
Standard/Full-surface – external/longitudinal [RAL]
Standard/Full-surface – internal/longitudinal [RIL]
Standard/Full-surface – external/transverse [RAP]
Standard/Full-surface – internal/transverse [RIP]
Input for RAL, RIL, RAP, RIP:
0: Full-surface roughing cycle, including plunge-cutting.
TURN PLUS looks for a tool for full-surface machining.
1: Standard roughing cycle without plunge-cutting
Tool tolerances
Adjacent angle tolerance [RNWT]
Tolerance range for secondary cutting edge
Relief cutting angle [RFW]
Minimum angle differential between the contour and
secondary cutting edge
568 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Roughing – Oversizes
Roughing – Approach and departure
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
Oversizes
Type of oversize [RAA]
16: Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – no single
oversizes
144: Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – with
single oversizes
32: Equidistant oversize – no single oversizes
160: Equidistant oversize – with single oversizes
Equidistant or longitudinal [RLA]
Equidistant oversize or longitudinal oversize
None or transverse [RPA]
Transverse oversize
Approach and departure
Approach – external roughing [ANRA]
Approach – internal roughing [ANRI]
Departure – external roughing [ABRA]
Departure – internal roughing [ABRI]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 569
8.2 Parameters
Roughing – Machining analysis
TURN PLUS uses the PLVA/PLVI parameters to define whether a
roughing area is to be rough-machined longitudinally or transversely.
Machining analysis
Transverse/longitudinal ratio – external [PLVA]
PLVA <= AP/AL: Longitudinal machining
PLVA > AP/AL: Transverse machining
Transverse/longitudinal ratio – internal [PLVI]
PLVI <= IP/IL: Longitudinal machining
PLVI > IP/IL: Transverse machining
Minimum roughing transverse length [RMPL] (radius value)
Defines whether transverse roughing is used for the front
transverse element of the outside contour of a finish part.
RMPL > l1: Without additional transverse roughing
RMPL < l1: With additional transverse roughing
RMPL = 0: Special case
Transverse angle variation [PWA]
The first front element is declared a transverse element when
it is within +PWA and –PWA.
570 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Roughing – Machining cycles
Fixed cycles
Overhang length outside [ULA]
Relative length for external rough-machining enabling roughing
beyond the target position in longitudinal direction. ULA is not
considered when the cutting limitation is in front of or within
the overhang.
Overhang length inside [ULI]
Relative length for internal rough-machining enabling
roughing beyond the target position in longitudinal direction.
ULA is not considered when the cutting limitation is in front
of or within the overhang.
This parameter is used for calculating the drilling depth for
centric predrilling.
Retracting length outside [RAHL]
Retracting length for smoothing variants (H=1, 2) of roughing
cycles G810 and G820 for external machining (RAHL).
Retracting length inside [RIHL]
Retracting length for smoothing variants (H=1, 2) of roughing
cycles G810 and G820 for internal machining (RIHL).
Cutting depth reduction factor [SRF]
For rough-machining with tools machining opposite to the main
machining direction, the infeed value (cutting depth) is
reduced.
Infeed (P) for roughing cycles (G810, G820):
P = ZT * SRF
(ZT: Infeed value from technology database)
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 571
8.2 Parameters
Finishing – Machining standards
Machining standards
Tool angle – external/longitudinal [FALEW]
Point angle – internal/longitudinal [FILEW]
Tool angle – external/transverse [FAPEW]
Point angle – internal/transverse [FIPEW]
Tool selection:
Finishing cycles are primarily executed with standard
finishing tools.
If form elements such as relief turns (type FD) and undercuts
(type E, F, G) cannot be machined with a standard finishing
tool, one form element after the other is skipped. TURN
PLUS starts a renewed attempt to machine the remaining
contour with the standard tool. Subsequently, the skipped
form elements are machined individually with a suitable
finishing tool.
Standard/Full-surface – external/longitudinal [FAL]
Standard/Full-surface – internal/longitudinal [FIL]
Standard/Full-surface – external/transverse [FAP]
Standard/Full-surface – internal/transverse [FIP]
Machining of contour areas:
Complete: TURN PLUS searches for an optimum tool for
machining the complete contour area.
Standard:
The machining operation is primarily executed with
standard finishing tools. Relief turns and undercuts are
machined with a suitable tool.
If the standard finishing tool cannot be used for relief turns
and undercuts, TURN PLUS splits up the machining
operation into standard machining operations and
machining the form elements.
If a division into standard machining and form-element
machining is not possible, TURN PLUS switches to "full-
surface machining."
572 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Finishing – Tool tolerances
For tool selection, the following applies:
Tool angle (EW): EW >= mkw
(mkw: ascending contour angle)
Tool angle (EW) and point angle (SW):
NWmin < (EW+SW) < NWmax
Adjacent angle tolerance (FNWT): FNWT = NWmax – NWmin
Finishing – Tool tolerances
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
To ol to l er an c es
Adjacent angle tolerance [FNWT]
Tolerance range for secondary cutting edge
Relief cutting angle [FFW]
Minimum angle differential between the contour and
secondary cutting edge
Approach and departure
Approach – external finishing [ANFA]
Approach – internal finishing [ANFI]
Departure – external finishing [ABFA]
Departure – internal finishing [ABFI]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 573
8.2 Parameters
Finishing – Machining analysis
Recessing and contour recessing
Recessing, contour recessing – Approach and departure
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
Machining analysis
Minimum finishing transverse length [FMPL]
TURN PLUS checks the frontmost element of the outside
contour to be finish-machined. Remember that:
Without inside contour: Always with additional transverse
cut
With inside contour – FMPL >= l1: Without additional
transverse cut
With inside contour – FMPL < l1: With additional transverse
cut
Maximum finishing cut depth [FMST]
FMST defines the permissible infeed depth for non-machined
undercuts. The finishing cycle (G890) uses this parameter to
determine whether undercuts (type E, F, G) will be machined
with a contour-finishing operation. Remember that:
FMST > ft: With undercut machining (ft: undercut depth)
FMST <= ft: Without undercut machining
Number of revolutions for chamfer or rounding [FMUR]
The feed rate is reduced such that at least FMUR revolutions
can be executed (evaluation: finishing cycle G890).
The following rules apply to FMPL:
The additional transverse cut is executed from the
outside toward the inside.
The "Transverse angle variation PWA" has no effect on
the analysis of the transverse elements.
Approach and departure
Approach – external recessing [ANESA]
Approach – internal recessing [ANESI]
Departure – external recessing [ABESA]
Departure – internal recessing [ABESI]
Approach – external contour recessing [ANKSA]
Approach – internal contour recessing [ANKSI]
Departure – external contour recessing [ABKSA]
Departure – internal contour recessing [ABKSI]
574 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Recessing, contour recessing – Tool selection, oversizes
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
Approach and departure
Tool selection, oversizes
Recessing width divisor [SBD]
If a recess base machined with a contour-recessing cycle does
not contain paraxial elements but only linear elements, a
suitable tool is selected using the "recessing width divisor
SBD."
SB <= b / SBD
(SB: Width of recessing tool; b: width of machining area)
Type of oversize [KSAA]
The recessing area to be machined can be assigned oversizes.
When oversizes have been defined, a recess is first rough-
machined and then finish-machined. Inputs:
16: Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – no single
oversizes
144: Longitudinal and transverse oversizes differ – with
single oversizes
32: Equidistant oversize – no single oversizes
160: Equidistant oversize – with single oversizes
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 575
8.2 Parameters
Recessing, contour recessing – Machining
Evaluation: DIN PLUS
Equidistant or longitudinal [KSLA]
Equidistant oversize or longitudinal oversize
None or transverse [KSPA]
Transverse oversize
The oversizes are accounted for when machining
contour valleys with a contour-recessing operation.
Standardized recesses such as recess types D, S, A are
completed in one machining cycle. A division into rough-
machining and finish-machining is only possible in DIN
PLUS.
Tool selection, oversizes
Machining
Recessing width factor [SBF]
SBF is used for calculating the maximum offset for recessing
cycles G860, G866:
esb = SBF * SB
(esb: effective recessing width; SB: width of recessing tool)
576 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Thread cutting
Thread cutting – Approach and departure
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
Thread cutting – Machining
Approach and departure
Approach – external thread [ANGA]
Approach – internal thread [ANGI]
Departure – external thread [ABGA]
Departure – internal thread [ABGI]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
Machining
Thread starting length [GAL]
Starting length before threading cut.
Thread run-out length [GUL]
Overrun length after threading cut.
GAL/GUL are automatically transferred to the thread
attributes "starting length B/overrun length P" if they have
not been entered as attributes.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 577
8.2 Parameters
Measuring
The measuring parameters are assigned to the fit elements as an
attribute.
Drilling
Drilling – Approach and departure
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
Drilling – Safety clearances
Measurement procedure
Measuring loop counter [MC]
Defines the measurement/loop intervals
Measuring path length in Z [MLZ]
Distance in Z for departure movement
Measuring path length in X [MLX]
Distance in X for departure movement
Measuring oversize [MA]
Oversize still applied to the element to be measured.
Measuring cut length [MSL]
Approach and departure
Approach – face [ANBS]
Approach – lateral surface [ANBM]
Departure – face [ABGA]
Departure – lateral surface [ABBM]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
578 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Safety clearances
Internal safety clearance [SIBC]
Retraction distance for deep-hole drilling ("B" for G74)
Driven drills [SBC]
Safety clearance for driven tools on face and lateral surface.
Stationary drills [SBCF]
Safety clearance on face and lateral surface for tools that are
not driven.
Driven taps [SGC]
Safety clearance for driven tools on face and lateral surface.
Stationary taps [SGCF]
Safety clearance on face and lateral surface for tools that are
not driven.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 579
8.2 Parameters
Drilling – Machining
The parameters apply to drilling with deep-hole drilling cycle (G74).
Milling
Milling – Approach and departure
Approach and departure are at rapid traverse (G0).
Machining
Drilling depth factor [BTFC]
1st drilling depth: bt1 = BTFC * db
(db: drill diameter)
Depth reduction [BTRC]
2nd drilling depth: bt2 = bt1 – BTRC
The subsequent drilling steps are reduced accordingly.
Diameter tolerance for drill [BDT]
For selecting the desired drill (centering drills, countersinks,
stepped drill, taper reamers).
Drilling diameter: DBmax = BDT + d (DBmax: maximum
drilling diameter)
Tool selection: DBmax > DB > d
Approach and departure
Approach – end face [ANMS]
Approach – lateral surface [ANMM]
Departure – end face [ABMS]
Departure – lateral surface [ABMM]
Approach/departure strategy:
1: Move simultaneously in X and Z directions
2: First X, then Z direction
3: First Z, then X direction
6: Coupled motion; X precedes Z direction
7: Coupled motion; Z precedes X direction
580 Organization mode of operation
8.2 Parameters
Milling – Safety clearances and oversizes
Safety clearances and oversizes
Safety clearance in infeed direction [SMZ]
Distance between starting position and top edge of object to be
milled.
Safety clearance in milling direction [SME]
Distance between milling contour and side of mill.
Oversize in milling direction [MEA]
Oversize in infeed direction [MZA]
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 581
8.3 Transfer
8.3 Transfer
The Transfer mode is used for data backup and data exchange via
networks or USB devices. When we speak of "files" in the following,
we mean programs, parameters and tool data. The following file types
can be transferred:
Programs (cycle programs, smart.Turn programs, DIN main and
subprograms, ICP contour descriptions)
Parameters
Tool data
Data backup
HEIDENHAIN recommends backing up the tool data and programs
created on CNC PILOT on an external device at regular intervals.
You should also back up the parameters. Since the parameters are not
changed very often, however, you only need to back up the
parameters from time to time, as required.
Data exchange with TNCremo
HEIDENHAIN offers the PC program TNCremo to complement the
CNC PILOT control. This program enables you to access the control
data from a PC.
External access
The soft key EXTERNAL ACCESS can be used to grant or restrict
access through the LSV-2 interface.
Permitting/Restricting external access:
Select the Organization mode
Enable a connection to the control: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to ON. The TNC will then permit
data access through the LSV-2 interface.
Disable connections to the control: Set the
EXTERNAL ACCESS soft key to OFF. The TNC will
then disable access through the LSV-2 interface
The machine tool builder can configure the external access
options. Refer to your machine manual.
582 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Connections
You can establish connections over the network (Ethernet) or with a
USB storage device. Data is transferred over the Ethernet or USB
interface.
Network (via Ethernet): The CNC PILOT supports SMB networks
(Server Message Block, WINDOWS) and NFS networks (Network
File Service).
USB storage devices can be connected directly to the control. The
CNC PILOT uses only the first partition of a USB storage device.
Select the Organization mode and log on with the code number
"net123".
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Press the Connections soft key.
Press the Network soft key.
The CNC PILOT opens the Network connection dialog box. This dialog
box is for the settings for the connection target.
Press the Config. soft key (login required). The
Network configuration dialog box opens.
Danger of collision!
Other computer systems in the network may overwrite
CNC PILOT programs. Organize your network in such a
way that only authorized persons have access to CNC
PILOT.
You can also create new folders on a connected USB data
carrier or network drive: Press the Create transfer
folder soft key and enter a name for the folder.
The control displays all active connections in a selection
window. If a folder contains subfolders, you can also open
and select these subfolders.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 583
8.3 Transfer
Ethernet interface CNC PILOT 620
Network configuration settings
Control name - Computer name of the control
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
OFF: The other network settings have to be configured manually.
Static IP address.
ON: The network settings are automatically configured by a DHCP
server.
Settings for DHCP OFF
IP address
Subnet mask
Broadcast
Gateway
Network connection settings (SMB)
Protocol
SMB – Windows network
Host IP address/host name – Computer name or IP address of the
target computer.
Host release – Share name of the target computer. (Sharename)
User name – For logging on to the target computer.
Workgroup/Domain – Name of the workgroup/domain.
Password – For logging on to the target computer.
Network connection settings (NFS)
Protocol
NFS
Host IP address- – IP address of the target computer.
Host release – Share name of the target computer. (Sharename)
rsize -
wsize -
time0 -
soft -
Select project folder: The CNC PILOT reads and writes all the data to/
from a predefined project folder. Each project folder mirrors the folder
structure on the control. Select the project folder you want to connect
to. If no project folder exists in the target path, the folder is created
when connecting.
Network configuration soft keys
Creates a folder of the specified
name in the target path when a
connection is established.
Opens the Network configuration
dialog box.
Opens the Check network
connection dialog box and pings the
specified target.
Displays all the network information
in a list box.
Terminates an existing network
connection. When a USB storage
device is active, the control
switches to the USB connection.
Establishes the connection and
opens the last project folder you
selected.
Returns to the Transfer soft-key
menu.
584 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Ethernet interface CNC PILOT 640
Introduction
The control is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the
control as a client in your network. The control transmits data via the
Ethernet card with
the smb protocol (Server Message Block) for Windows operating
systems, or
the TCP/IP protocol family (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol) and with support from the NFS (Network File System). The
control also supports the NFS V3 protocol, which permits higher
data transfer rates.
Connection possibilities
You can connect the Ethernet card in your control to your network
through the RJ45 connection, or directly to a PC. The connection is
metallically isolated from the control electronics.
The maximum cable length between control and a node
depends on the quality grade of the cable, the sheathing
and the type of network.
If you connect the control directly with a PC you must use
a crossover cable.
Make sure that the person configuring your control is a
network specialist.
Please note that the control performs an automatic restart
if you change the IP address of the control.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 585
8.3 Transfer
Control configuration
General network settings
Press the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the general network
settings. The Computer name tab is active:
Select the Interfaces tab to enter the interface settings:
Setting Meaning
Primary
interface
Name of the Ethernet interface to be integrated
in your company network. Only active if a
second, optional Ethernet interface is available
on the control hardware
Computer name Name displayed for the control in your company
network
Host file Only required for special applications: Name
of a file in which the assignments of IP
addresses to computer names are defined
Setting Meaning
Interface list List of the active Ethernet interfaces. Select one
of the listed interfaces (via mouse or arrow
keys)
Activate button:
Activate the selected interface (an X appears
in the Activecolumn)
Deactivate button:
Deactivate the selected interface (a hyphen
(-) appears in the Active column)
Configuration button:
Open the Configuration menu
Allow IP
forwarding
This function must be kept deactivated.
Only activate this function if external access via
the second, optional Ethernet interface of the
control is necessary for diagnostic purposes.
Only do so after instruction by our Service
Department
586 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Press the Configuration button to open the Configuration menu:
Setting Meaning
Status Interface active:
Connection status of the selected Ethernet
interface
Name:
Name of the interface you are currently
configuring
Plug connection:
Number of the plug connection of this
interface on the logic unit of the control
Profile Here you can create or select a profile in which
all settings shown in this window are stored.
HEIDENHAIN provides two standard profiles:
DHCP-LAN:
Settings for the standard Ethernet interface,
should work in a standard company network
MachineNet:
Settings for the second, optional Ethernet
interface; for configuration of the machine
network
Press the corresponding buttons to save, load
and delete profiles
IP address Automatically procure IP address option:
The control is to procure the IP address from
the DHCP server
Set the IP address manually option:
Manually define the IP address and subnet
mask. Input: Four numerical values separated
by points, in each field, e.g. 160.1.180.20 and
255.255.0.0
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 587
8.3 Transfer
Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the
Cancel button
Select the Internet tab:
Domain Name
Server (DNS)
Automatically procure DNS option:
The control is to automatically procure the IP
address of the domain name server
Manually configure the DNS option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the
servers and the domain name
Default
gateway
Automatically procure default gateway
option:
The control is to automatically procure the
default gateway
Manually configure the default gateway
option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the default
gateway
Setting Meaning
Setting Meaning
Proxy Direct connection to Internet/NAT:
The control forwards Internet inquiries to the
default gateway and from there they must
be forwarded through network address
translation (e.g. if a direct connection to a
modem is available)
Use proxy:
Define the Address and Port of the Internet
router in your network, ask your network
administrator for the correct address and
port
Telemaintenance The machine manufacturer configures the
server for telemaintenance here. Changes
must always be made in agreement with your
machine tool builder
588 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Select the Ping/Routing tab to enter the ping and routing settings:
Select the NFS UID/GID tab to enter the user and group
identifications:
Select the DHCP server tab to configure the DHCP server settings of
the machine network.
Setting Meaning
Ping In the Address: field, enter the IP number for
which you want to check the network
connection. Input: Four numerical values
separated by points, e.g. 160.1.180.20. As an
alternative, you can enter the name of the
computer whose connection you want to check
Start button: Start the test. The control
shows status information in the Ping field
Stop button: Conclude the test
Routing For network specialists: Status information of
the operating system for the current routing
process
Update button:
Update routing
Setting Meaning
Set UID/GID
for NFS shares
User ID:
Definition of which user identification the end
user uses to access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value
Group ID:
Definition of the group identification with
which you access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value
The configuration of the DHCP server is protected by
password. Please contact the machine tool builder.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 589
8.3 Transfer
Setting Meaning
DHCP server
active on:
IP addresses as of:
Define the IP address as of which the control
is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses.
The control transfers the values that appear
dimmed from the static IP address of the
defined Ethernet interface; these values
cannot be edited.
IP addresses up to:
Define the IP address up to which the control
is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses.
Lease Time (hours):
Time within which the dynamic IP address is
to remain reserved for a client. If a client logs
on within this time, the control reassigns the
same dynamic IP address.
Domain name:
Here you can define a name for the machine
network if required. This is necessary if the
same names are assigned in the machine
network and in the external network, for
example.
Forward DNS to external:
If IP Forwarding is active (Interfaces tab)
and the option is active, you can specify that
the name resolution for devices in the
machine network can also be used by the
external network.
Forward DNS from external:
If IP Forwarding is active (Interfaces tab)
and the option is active, you can specify that
the control is to forward DNS inquiries from
devices within the machine network to the
name server of the external network if the
DNS server of the MC cannot answer the
inquiry.
Status button:
Call an overview of the devices that are
provided with a dynamic IP address in the
machine network. You can also select
settings for these devices.
Advanced options button:
Additional settings for the DNS/DHCP server.
Set standard values button:
Set the factory default settings.
590 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Network settings specific to the device
Press the Network soft key to enter the network settings for a
specific device. You can define any number of network settings, but
you can manage only seven at one time
Setting Meaning
Network drive List of all connected network drives. The
control shows the respective status of the
network connections in the columns:
Mount:
Network drive connected / not connected
Auto:
Network drive is to be connected
automatically/manually
Type:
Type of network connection. cifs and nfs
are possible
Drive:
Designation of the drive on the control
ID:
Internal ID that identifies if a mount point
has been used for more than one
connection
Server:
Name of the server
Share name:
Name of the directory on the server that
the control is to access
User:
User name with which the user logs on to
the network
Password:
Network drive password protected / not
protected
Ask for password?:
Request / Do not request password during
connection
Options:
Display additional connection options
To manage the network drives, use the
screen buttons.
To add network drives, use the Add button:
The control then starts the connection
wizard, which guides you by dialog through
the required definitions.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 591
8.3 Transfer
USB connection
Select the Organization mode and plug the USB storage device in at
the USB port on the CNC PILOT.
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Press the Connections soft key.
Press the USB soft key.
The CNC PILOT opens the USB dialog box. This dialog box is for the
settings for the connection target.
Use the soft keys to disconnect and reconnect USB
storage devices.
Soft keys for USB connection
Creates a folder of the specified name
on the USB storage device.
Disconnects the USB storage device
and prepares the device for removal.
Allows access to files that have not
been properly saved in a project
folder.
Selects the project folder highlighted
previously using the arrow keys.
Returns to the Transfer soft-key
menu.
In principle, it should be possible to connect most USB
devices to the control. It may happen that a USB device is
not identified correctly by the control, for example when
the cable between the control panel and the main
computer is very long. In such cases, use another USB
device.
592 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Data transfer options
The CNC PILOT manages DIN programs, DIN subprograms, cycle
programs and ICP contours in different directories. When you select
"Program group," the control automatically switches to the applicable
directory.
Parameters and tool data are stored under the file name entered for
backup name and saved to a ZIP file located in the "para" or "tool" folder
on the control. You can then send this backup file to a project folder in
the remote station.
The following transfer functions are available:
Programs: Transmitting and receiving files
Back up parameters: Creating, transmitting and receiving
Restore parameters: Reloading the parameter backup files
Backup tools: Creating, transmitting and receiving
Restore tools: Reloading the tool backup files
Service data: Creating and transmitting service data
Data backup: Backing up all data in a project folder
Free external: Freely selecting program files on a USB storage
device
Misc. functions: Importing the cycle programs and DIN programs of
the MANUALplus 4110 and the tool data of the CNC PILOT 4290
Transfer folder
The control exchanges data with an external storage device by
accessing transfer folders created in the storage device. Files in
transfer folders are organized using the same folder structure as on
the control.
Transfer folders can only be used directly in the selected network path
or in the root directory of the USB storage device.
Folder structure – Storage of files
Folders File types
\dxf Drawings in DXF format
\gtb Machining sequences (TURN PLUS)
\gti ICP contour descriptions
*.gmi (turning contour)
*.gmr (workpiece-blank contour)
*.gms (C axis, face)
*.gmm (C axis, surface)
\gtz Cycle programs (teach-in)
*.gmz
\ncps DIN programs (smart.Turn)
*.nc (main programs)
*.ncs (subprograms)
\para Parameter backup files
PA_*.zip (parameters)
\table Parameter backup files
TA*.zip (tables)
\tool Tool backup files
TO*.zip (tool data and technology
data)
\pictures Image files for subprograms
*.bmp/png/jpg
\data Service files
Service*.zip
If program files are opened in another operating mode,
they are not overwritten.
You can only load tool data and parameters when no
program is executed in Program Run mode.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 593
8.3 Transfer
Transferring programs (files)
Selecting the program group
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Press the Connections soft key.
Press the USB soft key.
Press the Network soft key.
Select a project folder and press the Selection soft
key (USB), or the
Connect (network) soft key.
Return to data selection.
Switch to program transfer.
Open a selection of program types.
Activate DIN programs (or other program types) for
transfer.
Soft keys for program group selection
*.nc: DIN and smart.Turn main
programs. The transfer function scans
the programs for subprograms and
asks whether you want to transfer
them as well.
*.ncs: DIN and smart.Turn
subprograms. Help graphics assigned
to the subprogram are also
transferred.
*.gmz: Cycle programs. The transfer
function scans the programs for
subprograms and ICP contours, and
asks whether you want to transfer
them as well.
ICP contours for cycle programs
*.gmi (turning contour)
*.gmr (workpiece-blank contour)
*.gms (C axis, face)
*.gmm (C axis, lateral surface)
Allows selecting program files on a
USB storage device without using a
project folder.
Masking the file names within the
selected program group.
594 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Selecting the program
In the window on the left, the CNC PILOT shows a file list of the
control. The files of the remote station are displayed in the window on
the right when a connection is established. With the arrow keys you
can switch back and forth between the two windows.
When selecting a program, place the cursor on the desired program
and press the Mark soft key. You can also select all programs with Mark
everything.
Marked programs are highlighted in color. To unmark a program,
simply press Mark once again.
The CNC PILOT displays the file size and the time of the last
modification of the program in the list if permitted by the length of the
file name.
With DIN programs/subprograms, you can also view the NC program
with the Program view soft key.
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files.
During transfer, the CNC PILOT displays the following information in a
transfer window (see illustration):
The name of the program which is currently being transferred.
If a file already exists in the target path, the CNC PILOT asks
whether you want to overwrite the file. You can then activate
overwriting for only that file or for all files in the transfer.
If the CNC PILOT detects during transfer that the transferred files are
linked to other files (subprograms, ICP contours), a dialog box opens
where you can select the linked files for transfer.
Transferring project files
If you wish to transfer files from a project, the "Project" soft key
enables you to open the project management of the control and select
the corresponding project (see “Project management” auf Seite 129).
Soft keys for program selection
Marks all files in the current window.
Marks or unmarks the file at the
cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
Opens a DIN main program or
subprogram for reading.
The Internal project soft key enables you to manage
projects and transfer complete project folders (siehe auch
„Project management” auf Seite 129).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 595
8.3 Transfer
Transferring parameters
Parameters are backed up in two steps:
Creating a parameter backup: The parameters are archived in ZIP
files and stored in the control.
Transmitting/Receiving the parameter backup files.
Restoring parameters: Restores the backup files into the active
data on the CNC PILOT (login required).
Parameter selection
You can also create a parameter backup without connecting to an
external storage device.
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Open the parameter transfer.
Parameter backup data
A parameter backup file contains all the parameters and tables of the
CNC PILOT except tool and technology data.
Path and file names of the backup files:
Config data: \para\PA_*.zip
Tables: \table\TA_*.zip
The transfer window only shows the "para" folder. The associated file
in the "table" folder is automatically created and transferred.
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files.
Soft keys for parameter transfer
Transmits all marked files from the
control to the remote station.
Receives all files marked on the
remote station.
Deletes all marked files after a
confirmation prompt (login required).
Creates a parameter backup data
record as a .zip file.
Restores data from the selected
backup data record to the active
control system (login required).
Marks all files in the current window.
Marks or unmarks the file at the
cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
596 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Transferring tool data
Tools are backed up in two steps:
Creating a tool backup: The parameters are archived in ZIP files
and stored in the control.
Transmitting/Receiving the tool backup files.
Restoring tools: Restores the backup files into the active data on
the CNC PILOT (login required).
Tool selection
You can also create a tool backup without connecting to an external
storage device.
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Open the tool transfer.
Tool backup data
When creating a tool backup, you can choose whether to save the data
of specific tools or all tools. Select the desired tools in the tool list or
turret list:
Press the Backup tools soft key
Open the tool list
Open the turret list
Mark tools
Confirm selection
The CNC PILOT Here you can define which tool data you want to save.
Soft keys for tool transfer
Transmits all marked files from the
control to the remote station.
Receives all files marked on the
remote station.
Deletes all marked files after a
confirmation prompt (login required).
Creates a tool backup data record as a
.zip file.
Restores data from the now selected
backup data record to the active
control system (login required).
Marks all files in the current window.
Marks or unmarks the file at the
cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
Selects the ZIP or HTT file type. The
tool data can also be transferred
directly as a HTT file (e.g. from a tool
presetter).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 597
8.3 Transfer
Selection for the content of backup files:
Tools
Tool texts
Technology data
Probes
Tool holders
Path and file names of the backup files:
\bck\tool\TO_*.zip
Press the Transmit or Receive soft key to start transferring the files.
When restoring backup data, all available backup files are displayed.
With the Tool list soft key, you can select individual tools from a
backup file.
Choose the tool data you want to restore from the backup file.
598 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Service files
Service files contain various log files used by the service department
for troubleshooting. All important information is summarized in a
services file record as a zip file.
Path and file names of the backup files:
\data\SERVICEx.zip ("x" stands for a consecutive number)
The CNC PILOT always generates the service file with the number
"1". Already existing files are renamed to the numbers 2 to 5. An
existing file with the number 5 is deleted.
Creating service files: The information is summarized in a ZIP file
and stored in the control.
Transmit service files.
Service selection
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Open the service data transfer.
Saving service files
You can also create service files without connecting to an external
storage device.
Press the Create service files soft key.
Enter a file name under which you want to save the service file.
Press the Save soft key.
Soft keys for transferring service files
Transmits all marked files from the
control to the remote station.
Deletes all marked files after a
confirmation prompt (login required).
Marks all files in the current window.
Marks or unmarks the file at the
cursor position and moves the cursor
down one position.
Creates a service files data record as
a .zip file.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 599
8.3 Transfer
Creating a data backup file
A data backup performs the following steps:
Copies the program files to the transfer folder.
NC main programs
NC subprograms (with graphics)
Cycle programs
ICP contours
Creates a parameter backup and copies all backup files from "\para"
and "\table" to the project folder. (PA_Backup.zip, TA_Backup.zip)
Creates a tool backup file and copies all tool backup files from "\tool"
to the project folder (TO_Backup.zip).
Service files are not created and copied.
Data backup selection
Press the soft key and enter the login code.
Press the Transfer soft key.
Open the data backup transfer.
Soft keys for data backup
Starts backing up the data to a
complete transfer folder.
Existing files will be overwritten without a confirmation
prompt.
To cancel the data backup, press the Cancel soft key.
The backup process stops as soon as the currently
running partial backup is completed.
600 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Importing NC programs from predecessor
controls
The program formats of the predecessor controls MANUALplus 4110
and CNC PILOT 4290 differ from the format of the CNC PILOT 640.
However, you can use the program converter to adapt programs of the
predecessor control to the new control. This converter is a component
of the CNC PILOT. The converter completes the required adaptations
as automatically as possible.
Overview of convertible NC part programs:
MANUALplus 4110
Cycle programs
ICP contour descriptions
DIN programs
CNC PILOT 4290: DIN PLUS programs
TURN PLUS programs of the CNC PILOT 4290 cannot be converted.
Importing NC programs from the connected data medium
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Open the menu with the miscellaneous functions.
Open the menu with the import functions.
Selection of cycle programs or ICP contours of the
MANUALplus 4110 (*.gtz).
Selection of DIN programs ...
... of the MANUALplus 4110 (*.nc/ *.ncs).
Selection of DIN programs ...
... of the CNC PILOT 4290 (*.nc/ *.ncs).
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 601
8.3 Transfer
Use the cursor keys to select the folder, then press
the Enter key to switch to the right window.
With the cursor keys, select the NC program to be converted.
Mark all NC programs.
Start the import filter for converting the program(s) to
the CNC PILOT format.
Converting cycle programs
MANUALplus 4110 and CNC PILOT 640 have different solutions for
tool management, technology data, etc. Also, the cycles of the CNC
PILOT 640 have more parameters than those of the MANUALplus
4110.
Please note the following:
Tool call: The loading of the T number depends on whether the
program is a "multifix program" (2-digit T number) or "turret program"
(4-digit T number).
2-digit T number: The T number is loaded as "ID" and entered as
the T number "T1".
4-digit T number (Tddpp): The first two digits of the T number (dd)
are loaded as "ID" and the last two (pp) as "T".
Moving to the tool change point: In tool change point G14, the
converter enters the "no axis" setting. In the MANUALplus 4110 this
parameter is not used.
Safety clearance: The safety clearances defined in the "general
settings" parameter are entered by the converter in the safety
clearance G47, ... SCI, ... SCK.
The names of imported cycle programs, ICP contour
descriptions, DIN programs and DIN subprograms are given
the prefix "CONV_..." In addition, the CNC PILOT adapts the
extension and imports the NC programs to the correct
folders.
602 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
M functions are left unchanged.
Calling ICP contours: When an ICP contour is called, the converter
prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
Calling DIN cycles: When a DIN cycle is called, the converter
prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
Converting DIN programs
DIN/ISO programs not only have new solutions for tool management,
technology data, etc., but also for contour description and variable
programming.
Remember the following when converting DIN/ISO programs of the
MANUALplus 4110:
Tool call: The loading of the T number depends on whether the
program is a "multifix program" (2-digit T number) or "turret program"
(4-digit T number).
2-digit T number: The T number is loaded as "ID" and entered as
the T number "T1".
4-digit T number (Tddpp): The first two digits of the T number (dd)
are loaded as "ID" and the last two (pp) as "T".
Workpiece-blank definition: A G20/G21 workpiece-blank
definition of the MANUALplus 4110 becomes an AUXILIARY
BLANK on the CNC PILOT 640.
Contour descriptions: In MANUALplus 4110 programs, the fixed
cycles are followed by the contour description. During conversion
the contour description is converted to an AUXILIARY CONTOUR.
The associated cycle in the MACHINING section then refers to this
auxiliary contour.
Variable programming: Variable accesses to tool data, machine
dimensions, D compensation values, parameter data and events
cannot be converted. These program sequences have to be
adapted.
M functions are left unchanged.
Inches or metric: The converter cannot detect the unit of measure
of the MANUALplus 4110 program. Consequently, no unit of
measure is entered in the target program. This has to be completed
by the user.
HEIDENHAIN recommends adapting converted NC
programs to the circumstances of the CNC PILOT and
then testing them before using them for production.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 603
8.3 Transfer
Remember the following when converting DIN programs of the CNC
PILOT 4290:
Tool call (T commands of the TURRET section):
T commands containing a reference to the tool database are left
unchanged (example: T1 ID"342-300.1").
T commands containing tool data cannot be converted.
Variable programming: Variable accesses to tool data, machine
dimensions, D compensation values, parameter data and events
cannot be converted. These program sequences have to be
adapted.
M functions are left unchanged.
Names of external subprograms: When an external subprogram
is called, the converter prefixes "CONV_..." to the name.
If the DIN program contains nonconvertible elements, the
corresponding NC block is saved as a comment. The word
WARNING is inserted in front of this comment. Depending
on the situation, the nonconvertible command is taken into
the comment line, or the nonconvertible NC block follows
the comment.
HEIDENHAIN recommends adapting converted NC
programs to the circumstances of the CNC PILOT and
then testing them before using them for production.
604 Organization mode of operation
8.3 Transfer
Importing tool data of the CNC PILOT 4290
The format of the tool list of the CNC PILOT 4290 differs from the
format of the CNC PILOT 640. You can use the program converter to
adapt tool data to the new control.
Importing tool data from the connected data medium
Press the Transfer soft key (login required).
Open the menu with the miscellaneous functions.
Open the menu with the import functions.
Press the Tools soft key.
Use the cursor keys to select the folder, then press
the Enter key to switch to the right window.
Use the arrow keys to select the tool data.
Mark all tool data.
Start the import filter for the conversion.
The CNC PILOT 640 generates a table named CONV_*.HTT for each
imported file. You can load this table with the Restore function by
setting the file mask to the *.htt file type.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 605
8.4 Service pack
8.4 Service pack
If changes or additional features are required in the control software,
your machine tool builder will provide you with a service pack. The
service pack is usually installed with the aid of a USB memory stick
(1 GB or larger). The software required for the service pack is
compressed in the setup.zip file. This file is saved on the USB stick.
Installing a service pack
The control has to be shut-down during the installation of the service
pack. So end any NC program editing, etc. before you begin
installation.
Connect a USB stick and switch to the Organization mode of
operation.
Press the soft key and enter the code number
231019.
Press the soft key. (If the soft key is not visible,
switch the soft-key menu.)
Press the soft key.
Press the Path soft key to select the directory in the
left window.
Press the Files soft key to select the file in the right
window.
Place the cursor on the "setup.zip" file and press the
SELECT soft key.
HEIDENHAIN recommends backing up your data before
installing the service pack (siehe Seite 599).
606 Organization mode of operation
8.4 Service pack
The CNC PILOT checks whether the service pack can be used for the
current software version of the control.
Answer the confirmation prompt "Do you really want to switch off?"
Then the actual update program starts.
Set the desired language (e.g. English) and do the update.
After the software update the CNC PILOT automatically
restarts.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 607
Tables and overviews
608 Tables and overviews
9.1 Thread pitch
9.1 Thread pitch
Thread parameters
To determine the thread parameters, the CNC PILOT uses the
following table.
Where:
F: Thread pitch. Where an asterisk "*" is given in the table, the thread
pitch is calculated from the diameter, depending on the thread type
(Siehe „Thread pitch” auf Seite 609.).
P: Thread depth
R: Thread width
A: Thread angle at left
W: Thread angle at right
Calculation: Kb = 0.26384*F – 0.1*√ F
Thread backlash "ac" (depending on thread pitch):
Thread pitch <= 1: ac = 0.15
Thread pitch <= 2: ac = 0.25
Thread pitch <= 6: ac = 0.5
Thread pitch <= 13: ac = 1
Thread type Q F P R A W
Q=1 Metric ISO fine-pitch thread External – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal – 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=2 Metric ISO thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=3 Metric ISO tapered thread External – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Q=4 Metric ISO tapered fine-pitch thread – 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Q=5 Metric ISO trapezoid thread External – 0.5*F+ac 0.633*F 15° 15°
Internal – 0.5*F+ac 0.633*F 15° 15°
Q=6 Flat metric trapezoid thread External – 0.3*F+ac 0.527*F 15° 15°
Internal – 0.3*F+ac 0.527*F 15° 15°
Q=7 Metric buttress thread External – 0.86777*F 0.73616*F 3° 30°
Internal – 0.75*F F–Kb 30° 3°
Q=8 Cylindrical round thread External * 0.5*F F 15° 15°
Internal * 0.5*F F 15° 15°
Q=9 Cylindrical Whitworth thread External * 0.64033*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Internal * 0.64033*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Q=10 Tapered Whitworth thread External * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Q=11 Whitworth pipe thread External * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
Internal * 0.640327*F F 27.5° 27.5°
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 609
9.1 Thread pitch
Thread pitch
Q = 2 Metric ISO thread
Q=12 Nonstandard thread – – – – –
Q=13 UNC US coarse thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=14 UNF US fine-pitch thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=15 UNEF U.S. extra-fine-pitch thread External * 0.61343*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.54127*F F 30° 30°
Q=16 NPT U.S. taper pipe thread External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=17 NPTF U.S. taper dryseal pipe thread External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=18 NPSC U.S. cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Q=19 NPFS U.S. cylindrical pipe thread without
lubricant
External * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Internal * 0.8*F F 30° 30°
Thread type Q F P R A W
Diameter Thread pitch Diameter Thread pitch Diameter Thread pitch
10.25 6 1 273
1.1 0.25 7 1 30 3.5
1.2 0.25 8 1.25 33 3.5
1.4 0.3 9 1.25 36 4
1.6 0.35 10 1.5 39 4
1.8 0.35 11 1.5 42 4.5
2 0.4 12 1.75 45 4.5
2.2 0.45 14 2 48 5
2.5 0.45 16 2 52 5
3 0.5 18 2.5 56 5.5
3.5 0.6 20 2.5 60 5.5
40.7 222.5 646
4.5 0.75 24 3 68 6
50.8
610 Tables and overviews
9.1 Thread pitch
Q = 8 Cylindrical round thread
Q = 9 Cylindrical Whitworth thread
Q = 10 Tapered Whitworth thread
Diameter Thread pitch
12 2.54
14 3.175
40 4.233
105 6.35
200 6.35
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/4'' 6.35 1.27 1 1/4'' 31.751 3.629
5/16'' 7.938 1.411 1 3/8'' 34.926 4.233
3/8'' 9.525 1.588 1 1/2'' 38.101 4.233
7/16'' 11.113 1.814 1 5/8'' 41.277 5.08
1/2'' 12.7 2.117 1 3/4'' 44.452 5.08
5/8'' 15.876 2.309 1 7/8'' 47.627 5.645
3/4'' 19.051 2.54 2'' 50.802 5.645
7/8'' 22.226 2.822 2 1/4'' 57.152 6.35
1'' 25.401 3.175 2 1/2'' 63.502 6.35
1 1/8'' 28.576 3.629 2 3/4'' 69.853 7.257
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/16'' 7.723 0.907 1 1/2'' 47.803 2.309
1/8'' 9.728 0.907 2'' 59.614 2.309
1/4'' 13.157 1.337 2 1/2'' 75.184 2.309
3/8'' 16.662 1.337 3'' 87.884 2.309
1/2'' 20.995 1.814 4'' 113.03 2.309
3/4'' 26.441 1.814 5'' 138.43 2.309
1'' 33.249 2.309 6'' 163.83 2.309
1 1/4'' 41.91 2.309
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 611
9.1 Thread pitch
Q = 11 Whitworth pipe thread
Q = 13 UNC US coarse thread
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/8'' 9.728 0.907 2'' 59.614 2.309
1/4'' 13.157 1.337 2 1/4'' 65.71 2.309
3/8'' 16.662 1.337 2 1/2'' 75.184 2.309
1/2'' 20.995 1.814 2 3/4'' 81.534 2.309
5/8'' 22.911 1.814 3'' 87.884 2.309
3/4'' 26.441 1.814 3 1/4'' 93.98 2.309
7/8'' 30.201 1.814 3 1/2'' 100.33 2.309
1'' 33.249 2.309 3 3/4'' 106.68 2.309
1 1/8'' 37.897 2.309 4'' 113.03 2.309
1 1/4'' 41.91 2.309 4 1/2'' 125.73 2.309
1 3/8'' 44.323 2.309 5'' 138.43 2.309
1 1/2'' 47.803 2.309 5 1/2'' 151.13 2.309
1 3/4'' 53.746 1.814 6'' 163.83 2.309
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
0.073'' 1.8542 0.396875 7/8'' 22.225 2.822222222
0.086'' 2.1844 0.453571428 1'' 25.4 3.175
0.099'' 2.5146 0.529166666 1 1/8'' 28.575 3.628571429
0.112'' 2.8448 0.635 1 1/4'' 31.75 3.628571429
0.125'' 3.175 0.635 1 3/8'' 34.925 4.233333333
0.138'' 3.5052 0.79375 1 1/2'' 38.1 4.233333333
0.164'' 4.1656 0.79375 1 3/4'' 44.45 5.08
0.19'' 4.826 1.058333333 2'' 50.8 5.644444444
0.216'' 5.4864 1.058333333 2 1/4'' 57.15 5.644444444
1/4'' 6.35 1.27 2 1/2'' 63.5 6.35
5/16'' 7.9375 1.411111111 2 3/4'' 69.85 6.35
3/8'' 9.525 1.5875 3'' 76.2 6.35
7/16'' 11.1125 1.814285714 3 1/4'' 82.55 6.35
1/2'' 12.7 1.953846154 3 1/2'' 88.9 6.35
9/16'' 14.2875 2.116666667 3 3/4'' 95.25 6.35
5/8'' 15.875 2.309090909 4'' 101.6 6.35
3/4'' 19.05 2.54
612 Tables and overviews
9.1 Thread pitch
Q = 14 UNF US fine-pitch thread
Q = 15 UNEF US extra-fine-pitch thread
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
0.06'' 1.524 0.3175 3/8'' 9.525 1.058333333
0.073'' 1.8542 0.352777777 7/16'' 11.1125 1.27
0.086'' 2.1844 0.396875 1/2'' 12.7 1.27
0.099'' 2.5146 0.453571428 9/16'' 14.2875 1.411111111
0.112'' 2.8448 0.529166666 5/8'' 15.875 1.411111111
0.125'' 3.175 0.577272727 3/4'' 19.05 1.5875
0.138'' 3.5052 0.635 7/8'' 22.225 1.814285714
0.164'' 4.1656 0.705555555 1'' 25.4 1.814285714
0.19'' 4.826 0.79375 1 1/8'' 28.575 2.116666667
0.216'' 5.4864 0.907142857 1 1/4'' 31.75 2.116666667
1/4'' 6.35 0.907142857 1 3/8'' 34.925 2.116666667
5/16'' 7.9375 1.058333333 1 1/2'' 38.1 2.116666667
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
0.216'' 5.4864 0.79375 1 1/16'' 26.9875 1.411111111
1/4'' 6.35 0.79375 1 1/8'' 28.575 1.411111111
5/16'' 7.9375 0.79375 1 3/16'' 30.1625 1.411111111
3/8'' 9.525 0.79375 1 1/4'' 31.75 1.411111111
7/16'' 11.1125 0.907142857 1 5/16'' 33.3375 1.411111111
1/2'' 12.7 0.907142857 1 3/8'' 34.925 1.411111111
9/16'' 14.2875 1.058333333 1 7/16'' 36.5125 1.411111111
5/8'' 15.875 1.058333333 1 1/2'' 38.1 1.411111111
11/16'' 17.4625 1.058333333 1 9/16'' 39.6875 1.411111111
3/4'' 19.05 1.27 1 5/8'' 41.275 1.411111111
13/16'' 20.6375 1.27 1 11/16'' 42.8625 1.411111111
7/8'' 22.225 1.27 1 3/4'' 44.45 1.5875
15/16'' 23.8125 1.27 2'' 50.8 1.5875
1'' 25.4 1.27
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 613
9.1 Thread pitch
Q = 16 NPT US taper pipe thread
Q = 17 NPTF US taper dryseal pipe thread
Q = 18 NPSC U.S. cylindrical pipe thread with lubricant
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/16'' 7.938 0.94074074 3 1/2'' 101.6 3.175
1/8'' 10.287 0.94074074 4'' 114.3 3.175
1/4'' 13.716 1.411111111 5'' 141.3 3.175
3/8'' 17.145 1.411111111 6'' 168.275 3.175
1/2'' 21.336 1.814285714 8'' 219.075 3.175
3/4'' 26.67 1.814285714 10'' 273.05 3.175
1'' 33.401 2.208695652 12'' 323.85 3.175
1 1/4'' 42.164 2.208695652 14'' 355.6 3.175
1 1/2'' 48.26 2.208695652 16'' 406.4 3.175
2'' 60.325 2.208695652 18'' 457.2 3.175
2 1/2'' 73.025 3.175 20'' 508 3.175
3'' 88.9 3.175 24'' 609.6 3.175
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/16'' 7.938 0.94074074 1'' 33.401 2.208695652
1/8'' 10.287 0.94074074 1 1/4'' 42.164 2.208695652
1/4'' 13.716 1.411111111 1 1/2'' 48.26 2.208695652
3/8'' 17.145 1.411111111 2'' 60.325 2.208695652
1/2'' 21.336 1.814285714 2 1/2'' 73.025 3.175
3/4'' 26.67 1.814285714 3'' 88.9 3.175
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/8'' 10.287 0.94074074 1 1/2'' 48.26 2.208695652
1/4'' 13.716 1.411111111 2'' 60.325 2.208695652
3/8'' 17.145 1.411111111 2 1/2'' 73.025 3.175
1/2'' 21.336 1.814285714 3'' 88.9 3.175
3/4'' 26.67 1.814285714 3 1/2'' 101.6 3.175
1'' 33.401 2.208695652 4'' 114.3 3.175
1 1/4'' 42.164 2.208695652
614 Tables and overviews
9.1 Thread pitch
Q = 19 NPFS U.S. cylindrical pipe thread without lubricant
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
Thread
designation
Diameter
(in mm)
Thread pitch
1/16'' 7.938 0.94074074 1/2'' 21.336 1.814285714
1/8'' 10.287 0.94074074 3/4'' 26.67 1.814285714
1/4'' 13.716 1.411111111 1'' 33.401 2.208695652
3/8'' 17.145 1.411111111
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 615
9.2 Undercut parameters
9.2 Undercut parameters
DIN 76—undercut parameters
The CNC PILOT determines the parameters for the thread undercut
(undercut DIN 76) from the thread pitch. The undercut parameters are
in accordance with DIN 13 for metric threads.
External thread External thread
Thread pitch I K R W Thread pitch I K R W
0.2 0.3 0.7 0.1 30° 1.25 2 4.4 0.6 30°
0.25 0.4 0.9 0.12 30° 1.5 2.3 5.2 0.8 30°
0.3 0.5 1.05 0.16 30° 1.75 2.6 6.1 1 30°
0.35 0.6 1.2 0.16 30° 2 3 7 1 30°
0.4 0.7 1.4 0.2 30° 2.5 3.6 8.7 1.2 30°
0.45 0.7 1.6 0.2 30° 3 4.4 10.5 1.6 30°
0.5 0.8 1.75 0.2 30° 3.5 5 12 1.6 30°
0.6 1 2.1 0.4 30° 4 5.7 14 2 30°
0.7 1.1 2.45 0.4 30° 4.5 6.4 16 2 30°
0.75 1.2 2.6 0.4 30° 5 7 17.5 2.5 30°
0.8 1.3 2.8 0.4 30° 5.5 7.7 19 3.2 30°
1 1.6 3.5 0.6 30° 6 8.3 21 3.2 30°
616 Tables and overviews
9.2 Undercut parameters
For internal threads, the CNC PILOT calculates the depth of the thread
undercut according to the following formula:
Undercut depth = (N + I – K) / 2
Where:
I: Undercut depth (radius)
K: Width of undercut
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
N: Nominal diameter of the thread
I: From the table
K: Core diameter of the thread
Internal thread Internal thread
Thread pitch I K R W Thread pitch I K R W
0.2 0.1 1.2 0.1 30° 1.25 0.5 6.7 0.6 30°
0.25 0.1 1.4 0.12 30° 1.5 0.5 7.8 0.8 30°
0.3 0.1 1.6 0.16 30° 1.75 0.5 9.1 1 30°
0.35 0.2 1.9 0.16 30° 2 0.5 10.3 1 30°
0.4 0.2 2.2 0.2 30° 2.5 0.5 13 1.2 30°
0.45 0.2 2.4 0.2 30° 3 0.5 15.2 1.6 30°
0.5 0.3 2.7 0.2 30° 3.5 0.5 17.7 1.6 30°
0.6 0.3 3.3 0.4 30° 4 0.5 20 2 30°
0.7 0.3 3.8 0.4 30° 4.5 0.5 23 2 30°
0.75 0.3 4 0.4 30° 5 0.5 26 2.5 30°
0.8 0.3 4.2 0.4 30° 5.5 0.5 28 3.2 30°
1 0.5 5.2 0.6 30° 6 0.5 30 3.2 30°
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 617
9.2 Undercut parameters
DIN 509 E – undercut parameters
The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter.
Where:
I: Undercut depth
K: Width of undercut
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
DIN 509 F – undercut parameters
The undercut parameters are determined from the cylinder diameter.
Where:
I: Undercut depth
K: Width of undercut
R: Undercut radius
W: Undercut angle
P: Face depth
A: Transverse angle
Diameter I K R W
<=1.6 0.1 0.5 0.1 15°
> 1.6 – 3 0.1 1 0.2 15°
> 3 – 10 0.2 2 0.2 15°
> 10 – 18 0.2 2 0.6 15°
> 18 – 80 0.3 2.5 0.6 15°
> 80 0.4 4 1 15°
Diameter I K R W P A
<=1.6 0.1 0.5 0.1 15° 0.1 8°
> 1.6 – 3 0.1 1 0.2 15° 0.1 8°
> 3 – 10 0.2 2 0.2 15° 0.1 8°
> 10 – 18 0.2 2 0.6 15° 0.1 8°
> 18 – 80 0.3 2.5 0.6 15° 0.2 8°
> 80 0.4 4 1 15° 0.3 8°
618 Tables and overviews
9.3 Technical information
9.3 Technical information
Specifications
Components MC 6441, MC6542 or MC 7420 main computer with
CC 61xx or UEC 11x controller unit
15-inch or 19-inch TFT color flat-panel display
TE 735T or TE 745T keyboard unit
Operating system HEROS real-time operating system for machine control
Memory 1.8 GB (on CFR compact flash memory card) for NC programs
Input resolution and display step X axis: 0.5 µm, diameter: 1 µm
Z and Y axes: 1 µm
U, V and W axes: 1 µm
C and B axes: 0.001°
Interpolation
Straight line: In 2 principal axes, optional in 3 principal axes (max. ±100 m)
Circle: in 2 axes (radius max. 999 m), optional additional linear
interpolation of the third axis
C axis: Interpolation of the X and Z axes with the C axis
Feed rate mm/min or mm/rev
Constant surface speed
Max. feed rate (60 000/pole pairs × ball screw pitch) at fPWM = 5000 Hz
Spindle Maximum 60000 rpm (with 2 pole pairs)
Axis feedback control Integrated digital drive control for synchronous and asynchronous
motors
Position loop resolution: Signal period of the position encoder/1024
Position control clock pulse: 0.2 ms
Speed control clock pulse: 0.2 ms
Current control: 0.1 ms
Error compensation Linear and nonlinear axis error, backlash, reversal peaks during circular
movements
Static friction
Data interfaces 1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet interface
4x USB 3.0 on the rear, 1x USB 2.0 on the front
Diagnostics Fast and simple troubleshooting through integrated diagnostic aids
Ambient temperature Operation: 5 °C to 40 °C
Storage: -20 °C to +60 °C
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 619
9.3 Technical information
User functions
Configuration Basic version: X and Z axis, spindle
Y axis (optional)
Driven tool (optional)
C axis (optional)
B axis (optional)
Digital current and speed control
Rear-face machining with the opposing spindle (optional)
Manual operation Manual slide movement through axis-direction keys or electronic
handwheel
Graphic support for entering and running Teach-in cycles without
saving the machining steps in alternation with manual machine
operation
Thread reworking (thread repair in a second workpiece setup)
(optional)
Teach-in mode Sequential linking of Teach-in cycles, where each machining cycle is
run immediately after input, or is graphically simulated and
subsequently saved.
Program Run mode All are possible in single-block and full-sequence modes:
DINplus programs
smart.Turn programs (optional)
Teach-in programs (optional)
Setup functions Workpiece datum setting
Definition of tool-change position
Definition of protection zone
Measurement of the tool by touch-off, touch probe, or optical gauge
Workpiece measurement with a TS workpiece touch probe
620 Tables and overviews
9.3 Technical information
Programming – Teach-in mode (optional) Turning cycles for simple and complex contours, and contours
described with ICP
Contour-parallel turning cycles
Recessing cycles for simple or complex contours, as well as
contours defined with ICP
Repetitions with recessing cycles
Recess turning cycles for simple and complex contours, and
contours described with ICP
Undercut and parting cycles (optional)
Engraving cycles
Threading cycles for single or multi-start longitudinal, taper or API
threads
Cycles for axial and radial drilling, pecking and tapping operations
with the C axis
Thread milling with the C axis
Axial and radial milling cycles for slots, figures, single surfaces and
polygons as well as for complex contours defined with ICP for
machining with the C axis
Helical slot milling with the C axis
Linear and circular patterns for drilling and milling operations with the
C axis
Context-sensitive help graphics
Transfer of cutting values from technology database
Use of DIN macros in Teach-in programs
Conversion of Teach-in programs to smart.Turn programs
Interactive contour programming (ICP)
(optional)
Contour definition with linear and circular contour elements
Immediate display of entered contour elements
Calculation of missing coordinates, intersections, etc.
Graphic display of all solutions for selection by the user if more than
one solution is possible
Chamfers, rounding arcs and undercuts available as form elements
Input of form elements immediately during contour creation or by
superimposition later
Changes to existing contours can be programmed
Programming of the rear face for full-surface machining with the C
and Y axes
C-axis machining on face and lateral surface Description of individual holes and hole patterns
Description of figures and figure patterns for milling operations
Creation of freely definable milling contours
Y-axis machining in the XY and ZY planes Description of individual holes and hole patterns
Description of figures and figure patterns for milling operations
Creation of freely definable milling contours
User functions
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 621
9.3 Technical information
B-axis machining (optional) Machining with the B axis
Tilting the working plane
Rotating the machining position of the tool
DXF import Importing contours for turning
Importing contours for milling
smart.Turn programming (optional) The basis is the unit, which is the complete description of a
machining block (geometry, technology and cycle data)
Dialog boxes divided into overview and detail forms
Fast navigation between the fillable forms and input groups via the
"smart" keys
Context-sensitive help graphics
Start unit with global settings
Transfer of global values from the start unit
Transfer of cutting values from technology database
Units for all lathe and recessing operations
Use of the contours described with ICP for turning and recess
turning operations
Units for all milling and drilling operations with the C axis
Use of the patterns and contours described with ICP for C-axis
operations
Units for activating/deactivating the C axis
Units for all milling and drilling operations with the Y axis
Use of the patterns and contours described with ICP for Y-axis
operations
Special units for subprograms and program part repeats
Verification graphics for blank and finished part and for C and Y axis
contours
Turret assignment and other setup information in the smart.Turn
program
Parallel programming
Parallel simulation
User functions
622 Tables and overviews
9.3 Technical information
DINplus programming Programming in DIN 66025 format
Extended command format (IF... THEN ... ELSE...)
Simple geometry programming (calculation of missing data)
Powerful fixed cycles for area clearance, recessing, recess turning
and thread machining
Powerful fixed cycles for drilling and milling with the C axis (optional)
Powerful fixed cycles for drilling and milling with the Y axis (optional)
Subprograms
Programming with variables
Contour description with ICP (optional)
Program verification graphics for workpiece blank and finished part
Turret assignment and other setup information in the DINplus
program
Conversion of smart.Turn units into DINplus command sequences
(optional)
Parallel programming
Parallel simulation
Test run graphics Graphic simulation of sequence of Teach-in cycle, Teach-in,
smart.Turn or DINplus programs
Display of the tool paths as pencil-trace or cutting-path graphics,
special identification of the rapid traverse paths
Machining simulation (2-D material-removal graphic)
Display of programmed contours
Side or face view, or 2-D view of cylindrical surface for verification of
C axis machining
View of face (XY plane) and YZ plane for verification of Y-axis
machining
Shifting and magnifying functions
3-D graphics for display of workpiece blank and finished part as solid-
model view
Machining time analysis Calculation of machining times and idle times
Consideration of switching commands triggered by the CNC
Representation of time per individual cycle or per tool change
TURN PLUS Automatic generation of smart.Turn programs
Automatic cutting limitation through the definition of chucking
equipment
Automatic tool selection and turret assignment
User functions
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 623
9.3 Technical information
Tool database For 250 tools
For 999 tools (optional)
Tool description can be entered for every tool
Automatic inspection of tool-tip position with respect to the contour
Compensation of tool-tip position in the X/Y/Z plane
High-precision correction via handwheel, capturing compensation
values in the tool table
Automatic tool-tip and cutter radius compensation
Tool monitoring for lifetime of the insert (tool tip) or the number of
workpieces produced
Tool monitoring with automatic tool change after tool insert wear
(optional)
Management of multipoint tools (multiple inserts or reference
points)
Technology database (optional) Access to cutting data after definition of workpiece material, cutting
material and machining mode. The CNC PILOT distinguishes
between 16 machining modes. Each workpiece-material/tool-
material combination includes the cutting speed, the main and
secondary feed rates, and the infeed for 16 machining modes.
Automatic determination of the machining modes from the cycle or
the machining unit
The cutting data are entered in the cycle or in the unit as default
values.
9 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (144 entries)
62 workpiece-material/tool-material combinations (992 entries)
(optional)
User functions
624 Tables and overviews
9.3 Technical information
Conversational languages ENGLISH
GERMAN
CZECH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
DANISH
FINNISH
DUTCH
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
RUSSIAN
CHINESE
CHINESE_TRAD
SLOVENIAN
KOREAN
NORWEGIAN
ROMANIAN
SLOVAK
TURKISH
Accessories
Electronic handwheels HR 180 panel-mounted handwheels with connection to position
inputs, plus
One HR 130 panel-mounted serial handwheel, or one portable serial
handwheel HR 410
Touch probe TS 230: 3-D touch trigger probe with cable connection, or
TS 440: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 444: Battery-free 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared
transmission
TS 640: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared
transmission
TT 140: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement with cable
connection
TT 449: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement with infrared
transmission
DataPilot CP 640, MP 620 Control software for PCs for programming, archiving, and training for
the CNC PILOT:
Full version with license for single station or multiple stations
Demo version (free of charge)
User functions
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 625
9.3 Technical information
Option
number
Option ID Description
0 to 7 Additional Axis 354540-01
353904-01
353905-01
367867-01
367868-01
370291-01
353292-01
353293-01
Additional control loops
8 Software option 1 632226-01 Cycle programming
Contour description with ICP
Cycle programming
Technology database with 9 workpiece-material/tool-
material combinations
9 Software option 2 632227-01 smart.Turn
Contour description with ICP
Programming with smart.Turn
Technology database with 9 workpiece-material/tool-
material combinations
10 Software option 3 632228-01 Tools and technology
Tool database expanded to 999 entries
Technology database expanded to 62 workpiece-material/
tool-material combinations
Tool life monitoring with exchange tools
11 Software option 4 632229-01 Thread
Thread recutting
Handwheel superimposition during thread cutting
17 Touch probe functions 632230-01 Tool measurement and workpiece measurement
Determining tool-setting dimensions with a touch probe
Determining tool-setting dimensions with an optical gauge
Automatically measuring workpieces
18 HEIDENHAIN DNC 526451-01 Communication with external PC applications over COM
component
42 DXF import 632231-01 DXF import
Loading of DXF contours
54 B-axis machining 825742-01 Machining with the B axis
Rotating the machining position of the tool
626 Tables and overviews
9.3 Technical information
55 C-axis machining 633944-01 C-axis machining
63 TURN PLUS 825743-01 Automatic generation of smart.Turn programs
70 Y-axis machining 661881-01 Y-axis machining
77 4 additional axes 634613-01 4 additional control loops
78 8 additional axes 634614-01 8 additional control loops
94 Parallel axes 661881-01 Support of parallel axes (U, V, W)
101 to
130
OEM option 579651-01
to
579651-30
Options of the machine tool builder
131 Spindle synchronism 806270-01 Synchronization (of two or more spindles)
132 Opposing spindle 806275-01 Opposing spindle (spindle synchronism, rear-face
machining)
135 Synchronizing functions 1085731-01 Expanded synchronization of axes and spindles
143 Load Adaptive Control (LAC) 800545-01 LAC: Dynamic adaptation of the control parameters
151 Load monitoring 1111843-01 Monitoring of the tool load
Option
number
Option ID Description
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 627
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
The format of DIN programs of the CNC PILOT 4290 predecessor
control differs from the format of the CNC PILOT 640. However, you
can use the program converter to adapt programs of the predecessor
control to the new control.
When opening an NC program, the CNC PILOT 640 recognizes the
programs of the predecessor control. The program concerned will be
converted after a confirmation prompt. "CONV_..." will be prefixed to
the program name. The program converter is also part of the Transfer
function (Organization mode of operation).
When converting DIN programs, it is also important to keep in mind
that the predecessor controls use different solutions for tool
management, parameter management, programming with variables
and PLC programming.
Remember the following when converting DIN programs of the CNC
PILOT 4290:
Tool call (T commands of the TURRET section):
T commands containing a reference to the tool database are left
unchanged (example: T1 ID"342-300.1")
T commands containing tool data cannot be converted
Variable programming:
D variables (# variables) are replaced by # variables of the new
syntax. Depending on the range of numbers, #c or #l or #n or #i
variables will be used.
Special conversion rules: #0 is converted to #c30, #30 is converted
to #c51
V variables are replaced by #g variables. Braces used in assignments
are removed. Braces used in expressions are changed to
parentheses.
Variable accesses to tool data, machine dimensions, D
compensation values, parameter data and events cannot be
converted. These program sequences have to be adapted.
Exception: The "Mid-program startup active" E90[1] event is
converted to #i6
Remember that – unlike the 4290 – the interpreter of the CNC PILOT
640 re-evaluates the lines every time the program is executed.
M functions:
M30 with NS.. is converted to M0 M99 NS
M97 is removed for single-channel controls
All other M functions are left unchanged.
G codes:
The following G codes are currently not supported by the CNC
PILOT 640: G62, G63, G98, G162, G204, G710, G906, G907, G915,
G918, G975.
A warning will be issued if the following G codes are used in a
contour description: G10, G38, G39, G52, G95, G149. These
functions are now modal.
628 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Warnings may occur for the thread functions G31, G32, G33; it is
recommended to test these functions.
The "Contour mirroring/shifting G121" function is converted to G99,
but the principle of function is compatible.
A warning will be issued for G48 because the principle of function
has changed.
A warning will be issued for G916, G917 and G930 because the
principle of function has changed. Functions must be supported by
the PLC.
Names of external subprograms:
When an external subprogram is called, the converter prefixes
"CONV_..." to the name.
Multi-channel programs:
On single-channel controls, programs for two slides are converted
to a single slide and the Z-axis movements of the second slide are
converted to G1 W… or G701 W…
In the program head, #SLIDE $1$2 is replaced by #SLIDE $1
$ statements preceding the block number are removed
$2 G1 Z… is converted to G1 W… and G701 Z… to G701 W…
The word ZUORDNUNG [ASSIGNMENT] is removed (but
remembered internally for converting the subsequent blocks)
Synchronization statements $1$2 M97 are removed
Zero point shifts for slide 2 are saved as comments; paths of
traverse are provided with a warning.
Nonconvertible elements:
If the DIN program contains nonconvertible elements, the
corresponding NC block is saved as a comment. The word
WARNING is inserted in front of this comment. Depending on the
situation, the nonconvertible command is taken into the comment
line, or the nonconvertible NC block follows the comment.
HEIDENHAIN recommends adapting converted NC
programs to the circumstances of the control and then
testing them before using them for production.
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 629
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Syntax elements of the CNC PILOT 640
Meaning of the symbols used in the table:
þ Compatible behavior; if necessary, the program converter
converts the functions so that they are compatible with the
CNC PILOT 640
X Behavior changed; the program has to be tested in the
individual case
– Function is not available or is replaced by different
functionality
Function is planned for future software versions or will only
be required for multi-channel systems
Section codes
Program head PROGRAMMKOPF [HEADER] þ
REVOLVER [TURRET] þ
SCHEIBENMAGAZIN [PLATE MAGZN.] þ
SPANNMITTEL [CLAMPS] X
Contour definition KONTUR [CONTOUR GEOMETRY]
ROHTEIL [BLANK] þ
FERTIGTEIL [FINISHED] þ
HILFSKONTUR [AUXIL_CONTOUR] þ
C-axis contours STIRN [FACE_C] þ
RUECKSEITE [REAR_C] þ
MANTEL [LATERAL_C] þ
Workpiece machining BEARBEITUNG [MACHINING] þ
ZUORDNUNG [ASSIGNMENT]
ENDE [END] þ
Subprograms UNTERPROGRAMM [SUBPROGRAM] þ
RETURN þ
Others CONST þ
Y-axis contours STIRN_Y [FACE_Y] þ
RUECKSEITE_Y [REAR_Y] þ
MANTEL_Y [LATERAL_Y] þ
630 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
G commands for turning contours
Workpiece-blank definition G20-Geo Chuck part, cylinder/tube þ
G21-Geo Cast part þ
Basic contour elements G0-Geo Starting point of contour þ
G1-Geo Line segment þ
G2-Geo Circular arc with incremental center dimensioning þ
G3-Geo Circular arc with incremental center dimensioning þ
G12-Geo Circular arc with absolute center dimensioning þ
G13-Geo Circular arc with absolute center dimensioning þ
Contour form elements G22-Geo Recess (standard) þ
G23-Geo Recess/relief turn þ
G24-Geo Thread with undercut þ
G25-Geo Undercut contour þ
G34-Geo Thread (standard) þ
G37-Geo Thread (general) þ
G49-Geo Bore hole at turning center þ
Help commands for contour definition G7-Geo Precision stop on þ
G8-Geo Precision stop off þ
G9-Geo Precision stop blockwise þ
G10-Geo Peak-to-valley height X
G38-Geo Feed rate reduction X
G39-Geo Attributes for superimposed elements –
G52-Geo Blockwise oversize X
G95-Geo Feed per revolution X
G149-Geo Additive compensation X
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 631
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
G commands for C-axis contours
Overlapping contours G308-Geo Start of pocket/island þ
G309-Geo End of pocket/island þ
Front and rear face contours G100-Geo Starting point of face contour þ
G101-Geo Line segment on front face þ
G102-Geo Circular arc on front face þ
G103-Geo Circular arc on front face þ
G300-Geo Bore hole on front face þ
G301-Geo Linear slot on front face þ
G302-Geo Circular slot on front face þ
G303-Geo Circular slot on front face þ
G304-Geo Full circle on front face þ
G305-Geo Rectangle on front face þ
G307-Geo Eccentric polygon on front face þ
G401-Geo Linear pattern on front face þ
G402-Geo Circular pattern on front face þ
Lateral surface contours G110-Geo Starting point of lateral surface contour þ
G111-Geo Line segment on lateral surface þ
G112-Geo Circular arc on lateral surface þ
G113-Geo Circular arc on lateral surface þ
G310-Geo Bore hole on lateral surface þ
G311-Geo Linear slot on lateral surface þ
G312-Geo Circular slot on lateral surface þ
G313-Geo Circular slot on lateral surface þ
G314-Geo Full circle on lateral surface þ
G315-Geo Rectangle on lateral surface þ
G317-Geo Eccentric polygon on lateral surface þ
G411-Geo Linear pattern on lateral surface þ
G412-Geo Circular pattern on lateral surface þ
632 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
G commands for Y-axis contours
XY plane G170-Geo Starting point of contour þ
G171-Geo Line segment þ
G172-Geo Circular arc þ
G173-Geo Circular arc þ
G370-Geo Hole þ
G371-Geo Linear slot þ
G372-Geo Circular slot þ
G373-Geo Circular slot þ
G374-Geo Full circle þ
G375-Geo Rectangle þ
G376-Geo Single surface þ
G377-Geo Eccentric polygon þ
G471-Geo Linear pattern þ
G472-Geo Circular pattern þ
G477-Geo Centric polygon þ
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 633
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
YZ plane G180-Geo Starting point of contour þ
G181-Geo Line segment þ
G182-Geo Circular arc þ
G183-Geo Circular arc þ
G380-Geo Hole þ
G381-Geo Linear slot þ
G382-Geo Circular slot þ
G383-Geo Circular slot þ
G384-Geo Full circle þ
G385-Geo Rectangle þ
G387-Geo Eccentric polygon þ
G481-Geo Linear pattern þ
G482-Geo Circular pattern þ
G386-Geo Single surface þ
G487-Geo Centric polygon þ
G commands for machining
Tool positioning without machining G0 Positioning at rapid traverse þ
G14 Move to the tool change position þ
G701 Rapid traverse to machine coordinates þ
Simple linear and circular movements G1 Linear movement þ
G2 Circular movement with incremental center dimensioning þ
G3 Circular movement with incremental center dimensioning þ
G12 Circular movement with absolute center dimensioning þ
G13 Circular movement with absolute center dimensioning þ
G commands for Y-axis contours
634 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Feed rate and spindle speed Gx26 Speed limitation þ
G48 Reduce rapid traverse X
G64 Interrupted feed þ
G192 Feed per minute for rotary axis –
Gx93 Feed per tooth þ
G94 Feed per minute þ
Gx95 Feed per revolution þ
Gx96 Constant surface speed þ
Gx97 Speed þ
Tool-tip radius compensation G40 Switch off TRC/MCRC þ
G41 TRC/MCRC, left þ
G42 TRC/MCRC, right þ
Zero point shifts G51 Relative zero point shift þ
G53 Parameter-dependent zero point shift þ
G54 Parameter-dependent zero point shift þ
G55 Parameter-dependent zero point shift þ
G56 Additive zero point shift þ
G59 Absolute zero point shift þ
G121 Contour mirroring/shifting þ
G152 Zero point shift, C axis þ
G920 Deactivate zero point shift þ
G921 Deactivate zero point shift, tool dimensions þ
G980 Activate zero point shift þ
G981 Activate zero point shift, tool dimensions þ
Oversizes G50 Switch off oversize þ
G52 Switch off oversize þ
G57 Axis-parallel oversize þ
G58 Contour-parallel oversize þ
G commands for machining
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 635
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Safety clearances G47 Set safety clearances þ
G147 Safety clearance (milling cycles) þ
Tools, types of compensation T Tool call þ
G148 Switching the tool edge compensation þ
G149 Additive compensation þ
G150 Compensation of right-hand tool tip þ
G151 Compensation of left-hand tool tip þ
G710 Adding tool dimensions
Cycles for turning
Simple turning cycles G80 End of cycle þ
G81 Simple longitudinal roughing þ
G82 Simple face roughing þ
G83 Simple contour repeat cycle þ
G85 Undercut þ
G86 Simple recessing cycle þ
G87 Transition radii þ
G88 Chamfers þ
Drilling cycles G36 Tapping þ
G71 Simple drilling cycle þ
G72 Counterboring, countersinking, etc. þ
G73 Tapping cycle þ
G74 Deep hole drilling cycle þ
G commands for machining
636 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Contour-based turning cycles G810 Longitudinal roughing cycle þ
G820 Face roughing cycle þ
G830 Contour-parallel roughing cycle þ
G835 Contour-parallel with neutral tool þ
G860 Universal recessing cycle þ
G866 Simple recessing cycle þ
G869 Recess turning cycle þ
G890 Finishing cycle þ
Thread cycles G31 Thread cycle þ
G32 Single thread cycle þ
G33 Single thread cut (Thread single path) þ
G933 Thread switch –
G799 Thread milling, axial þ
G800 Thread milling in XY plane þ
G806 Thread milling in YZ plane þ
Synchronization commands
Assigning contour to operation G98 Assignment of spindle to workpiece –
G99 Workpiece group
Slide synchronization G62 One-sided synchronization
G63 Synchronous start of slides
G162 Synchronization marking
Contour follow-up G702 Storing/loading contour follow-up þ
G703 Contour follow-up ON/OFF þ
G706 K default branch –
Cycles for turning
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 637
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Spindle synchronization, workpiece
transfer
G30 Converting and mirroring þ
G121 Contour mirroring/shifting þ
G720 Spindle synchronization þ
G905 Measuring C-angle offset þ
G906 Measuring angular offset during spindle synchronization –
G916 Traversing to a fixed stop þ
G917 Controlled parting using lag error monitoring þ
G991 Controlled parting using spindle monitoring –
G992 Values for controlled parting –
C-axis machining
C axis G119 No. of C axis þ
G120 Reference diameter for lateral-surface machining þ
G152 Zero point shift, C axis þ
G153 Standardize C axis þ
Front/rear-face machining G100 Rapid traverse, front face þ
G101 Synchronous start of slides þ
G102 Circular arc on front face þ
G103 Circular arc on front face þ
Milling cycles G799 Thread milling, axial þ
G801 Engraving on front face þ
G802 Engraving on lateral surface þ
G840 Contour milling þ
G845 Pocket milling, roughing þ
G846 Pocket milling, finishing þ
Lateral-surface machining G110 Rapid traverse, lateral surface þ
G111 Linear path on lateral surface þ
G112 Circular arc on lateral surface þ
G113 Circular arc on lateral surface þ
Synchronization commands
638 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Variable programming, program
branches
Programming with variables # variables Evaluation during program conversion þ
V variables Evaluation during program run þ
Program branches, program repeats IF..THEN.. Program branching þ
WHILE.. Program repeat þ
SWITCH.. Program branching þ
Special functions $ Slide code þ
/ Skip level þ
Data input and data output INPUT Input (# variables) þ
WINDOW Open output window (# variables) þ
PRINT Output (# variables) þ
INPUTA Input (V variables) þ
WINDOWA Open output window (V variables) þ
PRINTA Output (V variables) þ
Subprograms L Subprogram call þ
Measuring functions, load monitoring
In-process measuring G910 Activate in-process measuring þ
G912 Actual-value determination for in-process measuring þ
G913 Deactivate in-process measuring þ
G914 Deactivate touch probe monitoring þ
Post-process measuring G915 Post-process measuring
Load monitoring G995 Specifying the monitoring zone þ
G996 Type of load monitoring þ
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 639
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
Other G codes
Other G codes G4 Dwell time þ
G7 Precision stop on þ
G8 Precision stop off þ
G9 Precision stop (blockwise) þ
G15 Move rotary axes –
G60 Deactivate protection zone þ
G65 Display chucking equipment þ
G66 Component position
G204 Waiting for time
G717 Updating nominal values –
G718 Move lag error –
G901 Actual values in variables þ
G902 Zero point shift in variables þ
G903 Lag error in variables þ
G907 Zero point shift in variables
G908 Zero point shift in variables þ
G909 Zero point shift in variables þ
G918 Zero point shift in variables –
G919 Zero point shift in variables þ
G920 Zero point shift in variables þ
G921 Zero point shift in variables þ
G930 Zero point shift in variables þ
G975 Zero point shift in variables
G980 Zero point shift in variables þ
G981 Zero point shift in variables þ
G940 Zero point shift in variables –
G941 Zero point shift in variables –
640 Tables and overviews
9.4 Compatibility in DIN programs
B-axis and Y-axis machining
Working planes G16 Tilting working plane þ
G17 XY plane (front or rear face) þ
G18 XZ plane (turning) þ
G19 YZ plane (plan view / lateral surface) þ
Tool positioning without machining G0 Positioning at rapid traverse þ
G14 Move to the tool change position þ
G600 Preselect tool þ
G701 Rapid traverse to machine coordinates þ
G714 Insert magazine tool
G712 Define tool position
Milling cycles G841 Area milling, roughing þ
G842 Area milling, finishing þ
G843 Centric polygon milling, roughing þ
G844 Centric polygon milling, finishing þ
G845 Pocket milling, roughing þ
G846 Pocket milling, finishing þ
G800 Thread milling in XY plane þ
G806 Thread milling in YZ plane þ
G803 Engraving in XY plane þ
G804 Engraving in YZ plane þ
G808 Hobbing þ
Simple linear and circular movements G1 Linear path þ
G2 Circular arc with incremental center dimensioning þ
G3 Circular arc with incremental center dimensioning þ
G12 Circular arc with absolute center dimensioning þ
G13 Circular arc with absolute center dimensioning þ
Overview of cycles
642 Overview of cycles
10.1 Workpiece blank cycles, single cut cycles
10.1 Workpiece blank cycles, single
cut cycles
Workpiece blank cycles Page
Overview 141
Standard blank 142
ICP blank 143
Single cut cycles Page
Overview 144
Rapid traverse positioning 145
Move to the tool change position 146
Linear machining, longitudinal
Single longitudinal cut
147
Linear machining, transverse
Single transverse cut
148
Linear machining at angle
Single oblique cut
149
Circular machining
Single circular cut
151
Circular machining
Single circular cut
151
Chamfer
For machining a chamfer
153
Rounding arc
For machining a rounding
155
M function
Entering an M function
157
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 643
10.2 Turning cycles
10.2 Turning cycles
Turning cycles Page
Overview 158
Cut longitudinal
Roughing and finishing cycle for simple
contours
161
Cut transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for simple
contours
163
Cut with longitudinal plunge
Roughing and finishing cycle for
simple contours
175
Cut with transverse plunge
Roughing and finishing cycle for simple
contours
177
ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
Roughing and finishing cycle for any
type of contour
191
ICP contour-parallel, transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for any
type of contour
194
ICP cut longitudinal
Roughing and finishing cycle for any
type of contour
200
ICP cut transverse
Roughing and finishing cycle for any
type of contour
202
644 Overview of cycles
10.3 Recessing and recess-turning cycles
10.3 Recessing and recess-turning
cycles
Recessing cycles Page
Overview
212
Recessing, radial
Recessing and finishing cycles for
simple contours
214
Recessing, axial
Recessing and finishing cycles for
simple contours
216
ICP recessing, radial
Recessing and finishing cycles for any
contour
230
ICP recessing, axial
Recessing and finishing cycles for any
contour
232
Undercut H
262
Undercut K
264
Undercut U
265
Parting
Cycle for parting the workpiece
267
Recess-turning cycles Page
Overview
238
Recess turning, radial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for simple contours
239
Recess turning, axial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for simple contours
240
ICP recess turning, radial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for any type of contour
254
ICP recess turning, axial
Recess-turning and finishing cycles
for any type of contour
256
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 645
10.4 Thread cycles
10.4 Thread cycles
Thread cycles Page
Overview 271
Thread cycle
Longitudinal single or multi-start thread
275
Tapered thread
Tapered single or multi-start thread
279
API thread
Single or multi-start API thread (API:
American Petroleum Institute)
281
Thread recutting
Recut longitudinal single or multi-start
thread
283
Tapered thread, recutting
Recut tapered single or multi-start
thread
287
API thread, recutting
Recut single or multi-start API thread
289
Undercut DIN 76
Thread undercut and thread chamfer
291
Undercut DIN 509 E
Undercut and cylinder chamfer
293
Undercut DIN 509 F
Undercut and cylinder chamfer
295
646 Overview of cycles
10.5 Drilling cycles
10.5 Drilling cycles
Drilling cycles Page
Overview 299
Axial drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
300
Radial drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
302
Axial deep-hole drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
304
Radial deep-hole drilling cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
307
Axial tapping cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
309
Radial tapping cycle
For drilling single holes and patterns
311
Thread milling
For milling threads in existing holes
313
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 647
10.6 Milling cycles
10.6 Milling cycles
Milling cycles Page
Overview 317
Rapid traverse positioning
Activate C axis; position tool and spindle
318
Slot, axial
For milling single slots or slot patterns
319
Figure, axial
For milling a single figure
321
Axial ICP contour
For milling single ICP contours or
contour patterns
325
Face milling
For milling surfaces or polygons
328
Slot, radial
For milling single slots or slot patterns
331
Figure, radial
For milling a single figure
333
Radial ICP contour
For milling single ICP contours or
contour patterns
337
Helical-slot milling, radial
For milling a helical slot
340
Thread milling
For milling threads in existing holes
313
648 Overview of cycles
10.6 Milling cycles
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 649
Index
A
Absolute coordinates ... 46
Additive compensation ... 116
Additive compensation for cycle
programming ... 140
Alphanumeric keyboard ... 57
API thread ... 281
API thread, recutting ... 289
Axis designations ... 45
Axis values, setting ... 93, 94, 95, 96
B
Backup ... 581
Backup name ... 592
Bar/tube blank ... 142
Basic-block display
Display during program
execution ... 114
Block number
Cycle programming ... 110
C
C axis, fundamentals ... 37
Calculator ... 58
C-axis values, setting ... 98
Chamfer ... 153
Character set ... 349
Circular drilling pattern, axial ... 355
Circular drilling pattern, radial ... 363
Circular machining ... 151
Circular milling pattern, axial ... 357
CNC PILOT 620 Ethernet interface
CNC PILOT 640 Ethernet interface
Comments
Comment blocks in cycle
programs ... 137
Comments in cycles ... 137
Compatibility in DIN programs ... 627
Compensation, additive ... 116
Compensations ... 115
Context-sensitive help ... 66
Continuous run
Program execution ... 114
Contour follow-up in Teach-in
mode ... 136
Conversion into DIN format ... 130
Coordinate system ... 46
Coordinates, absolute ... 46
Coordinates, incremental ... 47
Coordinates, polar ... 47
C
Copy
Circular ... 390
Linear ... 389
Mirror ... 390
Cut, ICP contour-parallel,
longitudinal ... 191
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, longitudinal
finishing ... 196
Cut, ICP contour-parallel,
transverse ... 194
Cut, ICP contour-parallel, transverse
finishing ... 198
Cut, ICP longitudinal ... 200
Cut, ICP longitudinal finishing ... 204
Cut, ICP transverse ... 202
Cut, ICP transverse finishing ... 206
Cut, longitudinal ... 161
Cut, longitudinal finishing ... 169
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge ... 183
Cut, longitudinal finishing plunge—
expanded ... 187
Cut, longitudinal finishing—
expanded ... 171
Cut, longitudinal plunge ... 175
Cut, longitudinal plunging—
expanded ... 179
Cut, longitudinal—expanded ... 165
Cut, transverse ... 163
Cut, transverse finishing ... 170
Cut, transverse finishing plunge ... 185
Cut, transverse finishing plunge—
expanded ... 189
Cut, transverse finishing—
expanded ... 173
Cut, transverse plunge ... 177
Cut, transverse plunging—
expanded ... 181
Cut, transverse—expanded ... 167
Cutting direction (cycle
programming) ... 342, 343
Cutting limits SX, SZ ... 140
Cycle keys ... 136
Cycle menu ... 138
Cycle programming
Cycle keys ... 136
Cycle programs, converting ... 601
Cycle starting point ... 134
Cycle status ... 84
Cycles in Manual mode ... 109
Cycles, addresses used ... 140
D
Data backup ... 42
Data entry—fundamentals ... 56
Data transfer ... 581
DATAPILOT ... ... 581
Deep-hole drilling, axial ... 304
Deep-hole drilling, radial ... 307
Defining the tool change position ... 97
DIN cycle ... 370
DIN cycle (cycle programming) ... 370
DIN macros ... 135
DIN programs, converting ... 602
Direction of rotation (tool
parameters) ... 517
Drilling and milling patterns, cycle
programming ... 350
Drilling cycles, cycle
programming ... 299
Drilling pattern linear, axial ... 351
Drilling, axial ... 300
Drilling, radial ... 302
Driven tool ... 518
Driven tools ... 89
Dry run mode ... 118
DXF contours ... 480
E
End point of ICP contour ... 382
Engraving, character set ... 349
Engraving, face ... 345
Engraving, lateral surface ... 347
Equidistant line (MCRC) ... 50
Equidistant line (TRC) ... 50
Error log file ... 64
Error messages ... 62
Ethernet ... 582
Ethernet interface ... 582
Configuration ... 585
Connection options ... 584
Introduction ... 584
Example of drilling cycles ... 315
Example of milling cycle ... 344
Example of pattern machining ... 367
Example of thread and undercut
cycles ... 297
Examples of recessing cycles ... 269
Examples of turning cycles ... 208
External access ... 581
650
Index
F
Feed angle ... 273
Feed rate ... 84
Feed rate reduction for drilling
Cycle programming
Deep-hole drilling ... 305, 308
Drilling cycle ... 301, 303
File organization ... 127
Fit calculation ... 384
Fits ... 384
Form elements (ICP)
Fundamentals ... 375
Form elements, ICP ... 375
Full-surface machining
Fundamentals ... 39
G
Geometry calculations (ICP) ... 376
H
Handwheel operation ... 108
Handwheel resolution ... 131
Help files, downloading ... 71
Help graphics ... 135
Help system ... 66
I
ICP absolute or incremental
dimensioning ... 383
ICP angle input ... 385
ICP basic elements, turning
contour ... 401
ICP centric polygon in XY plane ... 461
ICP centric polygons in YZ plane ... 478
ICP chamfer in XY plane ... 451
ICP chamfer in YZ plane ... 468
ICP chamfer of turning contour ... 405
ICP chamfer on face ... 417
ICP chamfer on lateral surface ... 423
ICP circle in XY plane ... 452
ICP circle in YZ plane ... 469
ICP circle on face ... 428
ICP circular arc in XY plane ... 450
ICP circular arc in YZ plane ... 467, 468
ICP circular arc on face ... 416
ICP circular arc on lateral surface ... 422
ICP circular arc, turning contour ... 404
ICP circular on lateral surface ... 437
ICP circular pattern in XY plane ... 459
ICP circular pattern in YZ plane ... 476
ICP circular pattern on face ... 434
ICP circular pattern on lateral
surface ... 444
I
ICP circular slot in XY plane ... 456
ICP circular slot in YZ plane ... 473
ICP circular slot on face ... 431
ICP circular slot on lateral surface ... 441
ICP contour direction ... 391
ICP contour element, deleting ... 393
ICP contour elements
Face ... 412, 427
ICP contour elements on the lateral
surface ... 418
ICP contour elements, adding ... 392
ICP contour elements, editing ... 394
ICP contour elements, face ... 412
ICP contour elements, turning
contour ... 401
ICP contour form elements ... 405
ICP contour graphics ... 386
ICP contour programming ... 382
ICP contours with C-axis
machining ... 424
ICP contours with Y-axis
machining ... 424
ICP contours, editing ... 382, 392
ICP contours, fundamentals ... 374
ICP editor in cycle mode ... 377
ICP editor in smart.Turn ... 379
ICP face contours in smart.Turn ... 427
ICP form elements,
superimposing ... 392
ICP geometry calculations ... 376
ICP hole in XY plane ... 457
ICP hole in YZ plane ... 474
ICP hole on face ... 432
ICP hole on lateral surface ... 442
ICP horizontal lines in XY plane ... 448
ICP horizontal lines in YZ plane ... 465
ICP horizontal lines of a turning
contour ... 402
ICP horizontal lines on face ... 414
ICP horizontal lines on lateral
surface ... 420
ICP last contour element, editing or
deleting ... 393
ICP lateral surface contours in
smart.Turn ... 435
ICP line at angle in XY plane ... 449
ICP line at angle in YZ plane ... 466
ICP line at angle on face ... 415
ICP line at angle on lateral
surface ... 421
I
ICP line at angle on turning
contour ... 403
ICP linear pattern in XY plane ... 458
ICP linear pattern in YZ plane ... 475
ICP linear pattern on face ... 433
ICP linear pattern on lateral
surface ... 443
ICP linear slot in XY plane ... 455
ICP linear slot in YZ plane ... 472
ICP linear slot on face ... 431
ICP linear slot on lateral surface ... 440
ICP machining attributes ... 375
ICP nested contours and holes ... 425
ICP polar coordinates ... 385
ICP polygon in XY plane ... 454
ICP polygon in YZ plane ... 471
ICP polygon on face ... 430
ICP polygon on lateral surface ... 439
ICP programming
Absolute or incremental
dimensioning ... 383
Contour direction ... 391
Contour elements on
face ... 412, 427
ICP recess turning, axial ... 256
ICP recess turning, axial finishing ... 260
ICP recess turning, radial ... 254
ICP recess turning, radial
finishing ... 258
ICP recessing axial, finishing ... 236
ICP recessing cycles, axial ... 232
ICP recessing radial ... 230
ICP recessing radial, finishing ... 234
ICP rectangle in XY plane ... 453
ICP rectangle in YZ plane ... 470
ICP rectangle on face ... 429
ICP rectangle on lateral surface ... 438
ICP reference data ... 425
ICP reference data in XY plane ... 446
ICP reference data in YZ plane ... 462
ICP rounding arc in XY plane ... 451
ICP rounding arc of turning
contour ... 405
ICP rounding arc on face ... 417
ICP rounding arc on lateral
surface ... 423
ICP selection functions ... 388
ICP selection of solutions ... 387
ICP single surface in XY plane ... 460
ICP single surface in YZ plane ... 477
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 651
Index
I
ICP starting point of contour in XY
plane ... 447
ICP starting point of contour in YZ
plane ... 464
ICP starting point of face contour ... 412
ICP starting point of lateral surface
contour ... 418
ICP starting point of turning
contour ... 401
ICP transitions between contour
elements ... 383
ICP undercut DIN 509 E ... 407
ICP undercut DIN 509 F ... 408
ICP undercut DIN 76 ... 406
ICP undercut type H ... 410
ICP undercut type K ... 411
ICP undercut type U ... 409
ICP vertical lines in XY plane ... 447
ICP vertical lines in YZ plane ... 464
ICP vertical lines of a turning
contour ... 402
ICP vertical lines on face ... 413
ICP vertical lines on lateral
surface ... 420
ICP workpiece blank contour ... 143
ICP workpiece blank, "bar" ... 400
ICP workpiece blank, "cast part" ... 400
ICP workpiece blank, "tube" ... 400
ICP zoom ... 399
Inch, units of measure ... 48
Incremental coordinates ... 47
Input fields ... 56
Input window ... 53
Inside thread calculation ... 384
Invert ... 390
K
Keystroke log file ... 65
L
Last cut in thread cycles ... 274
Linear dimension ... 418
Linear drilling pattern, radial ... 359
Linear machining at angle ... 149
Linear machining, longitudinal ... 147
Linear machining, transverse ... 148
Linear milling pattern, axial ... 353
List operations ... 57
Load monitoring ... 119
Log file, error log file ... 64
Log file, keystroke log file ... 65
M
M functions ... 157
M functions in cycles ... 137
Machine data display ... 80
Machine data, entering ... 78
Machine mode of operation ... 74
Machine setup ... 92
Machine with multifix ... 85
Machine with turret ... 85
Machine zero point ... 47
Machining attributes, ICP ... 375
Manual Operation ... 108
Manual Operation operating
mode ... 108
Marking (program transfer) ... 594
Menu selection ... 55
Metric, units of measure ... 48
Mid-program startup ... 113
Milling cutter radius compensation
(MCRC) ... 50
Milling cycles, cycle
programming ... 317
Milling direction for contour
milling ... 342
Milling direction for pocket
milling ... 343
Milling pattern
Cycle programming
Notes ... 350
Milling pattern circular, radial ... 365
Milling pattern linear, radial ... 361
Milling, axial figure ... 321
Milling, axial slot ... 319
Milling, face milling ... 328
Milling, ICP contour, axial ... 325
Milling, ICP contour, radial ... 337
Milling, radial figure ... 333
Milling, radial helical slot ... 340
Milling, radial slot ... 331
Mirroring
Copying a contour section by
mirroring ... 390
Monitoring EnDat encoders ... 75
Multipoint tools, editing ... 507
N
NC programs, importing from
predecessor controls ... 600, 604
Network connections ... 582
Network settings ... 585
O
Offset definition ... 94
Operating modes ... 40, 54
Operating modes, tool editor ... 500
Operating times, displaying ... 101
Operation, the basics ... 54
Optical gauge ... 106
Organization mode of operation ... 542
P
Parameters ... 543
Machining parameters ... 561
Parting ... 267
Parting tools ... 500
Pattern, circular drilling pattern,
axial ... 355
Pattern, circular drilling pattern,
radial ... 363
Pattern, circular milling pattern,
axial ... 357
Pattern, circular milling pattern,
radial ... 365
Pattern, linear drilling pattern,
axial ... 351
Pattern, linear drilling pattern,
radial ... 359
Pattern, linear milling pattern,
axial ... 353
Pattern, linear milling pattern,
radial ... 361
Polar coordinates ... 47
Position encoders ... 45
Positioning
Spindle positioning in cycle
mode ... 78
Program execution ... 114
Program information ... 127
Program Run ... 111
Program Run mode ... 111
Program selection ... 127
Program types ... 61
Proportioning of cuts ... 273
Protection zone
Display of protection zone
status ... 96
Protection zone, setting ... 96
R
Rapid positioning milling ... 318
Rapid traverse positioning ... 145
Recess turning with ICP, axial ... 256
Recess turning with ICP, radial ... 254
652
Index
R
Recess turning with ICP, radial
finishing ... 258
Recess turning, axial ... 240
Recess turning, axial finishing ... 248
Recess turning, axial finishing—
expanded ... 252
Recess turning, axial—expanded ... 244
Recess turning, ICP axial,
finishing ... 260
Recess turning, radial ... 239
Recess turning, radial finishing ... 246
Recess turning, radial finishing—
expanded ... 250
Recess turning, radial—
expanded ... 242
Recess turning—fundamentals of cycle
programming ... 238
Recessing axial, finishing ... 224
Recessing axial, finishing—
expanded ... 228
Recessing cycles ... 212
Recessing cycles, contour forms ... 213
Recessing cycles, direction of cutting
and infeed ... 212
Recessing cycles, undercut
position ... 213
Recessing radial, finishing ... 222
Recessing radial, finishing—
expanded ... 226
Recessing tools ... 500
Recessing, axial ... 216
Recessing, axial—expanded ... 220
Recessing, radial ... 214
Recessing, radial—expanded ... 218
Recess-turning tools ... 500
Reference machining ... 121
Reference mark ... 45
Reference run ... 76, 95
Rounding arc ... 155
S
Safety clearance ... 158
Safety clearance G47 ... 140
Safety clearances SCI and SCK ... 140
Screen ... 53
Service files, saving ... 65
Setting up a tool list ... 85
Setting up machine dimensions ... 99
Shift zero point ... 389
Simulation ... 126, 484
Contour generation during
simulation ... 498
S
Simulation window ... 487
Simulation with mid-program
startup ... 495
Simulation, 3-D view ... 491
Simulation, material-removal
graphic ... 490
Simulation, miscellaneous
functions ... 486
Simulation, operating the ... 485
Simulation, setting up the views ... 487
Simulation, tool display ... 490
Simulation, traverse path ... 489
Simulation, zoom ... 493
Single block mode
Program execution ... 114
Single cut cycles ... ... 144
Skip level ... 114
Slide position ... 37
smart.Turn dialogs ... 56
Soft ... 55
Soft keys ... 55
Sorting functions ... 127
Special compensation (recessing
tools) ... 519, 520
Speed limitation
Definition in cycle mode ... 78
Spindle ... 84
Spindle utilization ... 81
Starting point of ICP contour ... 382
Stopping angle (cycle mode) ... 78
Surface roughness
Machining parameters ... 563
Switching functions for cycles ... 137
Switch-off ... 77
Switch-on ... 75
System time, setting ... 102
T
Tapered thread ... 279
Tapered thread, recutting ... 287
Tapping, axial ... 309
Tapping, radial ... 311
Teach-in ... 110
Teach-In mode ... 110
Teach-in operating mode ... 110
Technical characteristics ... 618
Technology editor ... 536
Thread
Cycle programming
API thread ... 281
Tapered thread ... 279
T
Thread cycle (longitudinal) ... 275
Thread cycle (longitudinal)—
expanded ... 277
Thread cycles ... 271
Thread depth ... 273
Thread milling, axial ... 313
Thread parameters ... 608
Thread pitch ... 609
Thread position, cycle
programming ... 271
Thread run-in ... 273
Thread run-out ... 273
Thread, recut (longitudinal) ... 283
Thread, recut expanded
(longitudinal) ... 285
Time calculation (simulation) ... 497
TNCguide ... 66
Tool call ... 89
Tool carriers for multifix ... 85
Tool carriers, turret ... 85
Tool change position G14 ... 140
Tool change position, moving to ... 146
Tool compensation ... 107, 115
Tool control graphics ... 505
Tool dimensions, fundamentals ... 49
Tool editor ... 502
Tool life monitoring ... 90
Tool list ... 502
Tool list, comparing ... 112
Tool measurement ... 103
Tool measurement by touching the
workpiece ... 104
Tool measurement with a touch
probe ... 105
Tool position in turning cycles ... 159
Tool touch probe, calibrating ... 100
Tool types ... 500
Tool-life data, editing ... 509
Tools
Driven tools ... 89
Tool compensation, entering ... 107
Tool list ... 502, 503
Tool management ... 500
Tools in different quadrants ... 86
Tools in different quadrants ... 86
Tools measurement with an optical
gauge ... 106
Tool-tip radius compensation
(TRC) ... 50
Touch probe ... 105
Touch-off ... 104
HEIDENHAIN CNC PILOT 640 653
Index
T
Transfer ... 581
Transformations
Mirroring ... 398
Rotating ... 397
Shifting ... 397
Turning cycles ... 158
Turning cycles, example ... 208
Turret list, filling the ... 88
Turret list, filling with the tool list ... 87
U
Undercut
Parameters, undercut DIN 509 E,
DIN 509 F ... 617
Parameters, undercut DIN 76 ... 615
Undercut cycles ... 271
Undercut DIN 509 E ... 293
Undercut DIN 509 F ... 295
Undercut DIN 76 ... 291
Undercut position, cycle
programming ... 271
Undercutting type H ... 262
Undercutting type K ... 264
Undercutting type U ... 265
Units of measure ... 48
Unresolved contour elements
(ICP) ... 376
USB interface ... 582
W
Wear compensation ... 500
Working with cycles ... 134
Workpiece blank contour, ICP ... 143
Workpiece blank cycles ... 141
Workpiece blank definition ICP ... 400
Workpiece zero point ... 48
Workpiece zero point, defining ... 93
Y
Y axis, fundamentals ... 38






 
 

 

 

 

 


*I_1079662-22*
1079662-22 · Ver02 · SW03 · 1/2015 · H · Printed in Germany
… 649 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 31,33 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640

Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 657 pagina's

Heidenhain CNC PILOT 640 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 656 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info